munotes®

Intellectual Property and International Organisations and Agreements Notes | LL.M. Semester 1 | Mumbai University | munotes

Official Notes munotes.in

Intellectual Property and International Organisations and Agreements

LL.M. · SEMESTER 1

Strictly as per the University of Mumbai LL.M. syllabus in force, with every treaty article read from the instrument itself

For LL.M. students of the University of Mumbai taking Group III, Law of Intellectual Property and Information Technology

Open the book ↓

munotes.in Group 3 Law of Intellectual Property and Information Technology

Intellectual Property and International Organisations and Agreements

Copyright © 2026 munotes.in. All rights reserved.

Written and first published by munotes.in, 2026.

This book is free for individual students to read at munotes.in. No part of it may be reproduced, distributed, stored, translated or used for institutional or classroom purposes in any form without a prior written licence from munotes.in.

Licensing and permissions: contact@munotes.in

The text of statutes and of judgments reproduced in this book is in the public domain under section 52(1)(q) of the Copyright Act 1957. The commentary, arrangement, examples and questions are the original work of munotes.in.

munotes.in is an independent study resource for MU students. It is not affiliated with, endorsed by, or officially connected to the University of Mumbai. Course names and university references describe the students and syllabus the material relates to.

munotes.in

Contents

Module I Intellectual Property Rights: Concept, Growth and Kinds

  1. What Intellectual Property Is 1
  2. Intangible and Incorporeal Property 5
  3. The Concept and the Nature of Intellectual Property 9
  4. The Kinds of Intellectual Property 13
  5. Patents 17
  6. Copyright and Related Rights 21
  7. Trade Marks, Service Marks, Collective and Certification Marks 25
  8. Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, Layout Designs, Plant Varieties and Undisclosed Information 29
  9. Why the Law Protects Intellectual Creations 34
  10. The Need, the Growth and the Objectives of Intellectual Property Rights 38
  11. The Functions of an Intellectual Property System, and the Case Against It 42
  12. Intellectual Property as an Asset and a Driver of Development 46
  13. A Short History: Venice 1474 to the Statute of Anne 50
  14. The International Character of Intellectual Property Rights 54
  15. Territoriality and the Independence of Rights 58
  16. Acquiring an Intellectual Property Right 62
  17. Maintaining an Intellectual Property Right 66
  18. Commercial Exploitation: Assignment and Transmission 70
  19. Commercial Exploitation: Licensing 74
  20. Commercial Exploitation: Franchising, Merchandising, Technology Transfer and Pools 78
  21. Intellectual Property as Security, and How an Intangible Is Valued 82
  22. Abuse of Intellectual Property Rights 86
  23. Anti-Competitive Practices in Intellectual Property Licensing 90
  24. Unfair Trade Practices Touching Intellectual Property in India 94
  25. The Challenges of the Current Era 98
  26. The Indian Intellectual Property System 102

Module II International Organisations and the Treaties They Administer

  1. International Organisations and Agreements: What This Module Is 106
  2. Why an International System Became Necessary: Vienna, 1873 110
  3. The Paris Convention 1883: The Union It Creates 114
  4. Paris: National Treatment, Articles 2 and 3 118
  5. Paris: The Right of Priority, Article 4 122
  6. Paris: Independence of Patents, Working and Compulsory Licences, Articles 4bis, 5 and 6 127
  7. Paris: Well Known Marks, State Emblems and the Special Marks, Articles 6bis to 9 132
  8. Paris: False Indications and Unfair Competition, Articles 10 to 12 138
  9. Paris: How the Union Is Administered, Articles 13 to 18 143
  10. The Berne Convention 1886: The Union and Its Acts 148
  11. Berne: Protected Works and the Points of Attachment, Articles 2 to 5 152
  12. Berne: Moral Rights and the Term of Protection, Articles 6bis and 7 157
  13. Berne: The Economic Rights, Articles 8 to 14ter 162
  14. Berne: Redress, Seizure, Retroactivity and Special Agreements, Articles 15 to 20 167
  15. Berne: The Appendix for Developing Countries, Article 21 and Articles I to VI 172
  16. Berne: How the Union Is Administered, Articles 22 to 26 177
  17. BIRPI and the Road to Stockholm 182
  18. The Convention Establishing WIPO, 1967 187
  19. WIPO: Aims and Functions, Articles 3 and 4 191
  20. WIPO: Membership and How a State Joins, Articles 5, 14, 15 and 16 195
  21. WIPO: The Organs, Articles 6 to 10, 12 and 13 200
  22. WIPO: Finance, Legal Capacity and Amendment, Articles 11, 17, 18 and 19 206
  23. WIPO Today: The Committees, the Centre and the Limits 211
  24. WIPO and the United Nations 216
  25. The Twenty-Eight Treaties WIPO Administers 221
  26. The Rome Convention 1961: Performers, Producers and Broadcasters 226
  27. Rome: The Intergovernmental Committee and the Final Clauses, Articles 23 to 34 233
  28. The Geneva Phonograms Convention 1971 and the Brussels Satellite Convention 1974 239
  29. The WIPO Copyright Treaty 1996, Articles 1 to 14 245
  30. The WIPO Copyright Treaty: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 15 to 25 251
  31. The WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty 1996: Performers and Producers, Articles 1 to 17 256
  32. The WPPT: Common Provisions, Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 18 to 33 262
  33. The Beijing Treaty on Audiovisual Performances 2012, Articles 1 to 17 267
  34. The Beijing Treaty: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 18 to 30 273
  35. The Marrakesh VIP Treaty 2013, Articles 1 to 12 278
  36. The Marrakesh VIP Treaty: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 13 to 22 284
  37. The Patent Cooperation Treaty 1970: What an International Application Is 289
  38. The PCT: International Search and Publication, Articles 15 to 21 295
  39. The PCT: Chapter II and the National Phase, Articles 22 to 42 301
  40. The PCT: Common Provisions, Technical Services and Administration, Articles 43 to 69 308
  41. The Budapest Treaty 1977: Depositing a Microorganism 315
  42. The Madrid Agreement 1891: International Registration of Marks 321
  43. The Madrid Protocol 1989, and Why India Joined It 328
  44. The Other Madrid Agreement of 1891: False and Deceptive Indications of Source 335
  45. The Hague Agreement and the Geneva Act 1999, Articles 1 to 18 341
  46. The Hague Geneva Act: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 19 to 34 348
  47. The Lisbon Agreement 1958 and the Geneva Act of 2015 355
  48. The Nice Agreement 1957: Classifying Goods and Services 361
  49. The Locarno Agreement 1968 and the Strasbourg Agreement 1971 367
  50. The Vienna Agreement 1973: Classifying the Figurative Elements of Marks 373
  51. The Nairobi Treaty 1981: The Olympic Symbol 379
  52. The Washington Treaty 1989 on Integrated Circuits 385
  53. The Trademark Law Treaty 1994 393
  54. The Singapore Treaty 2006, and What It Changed 400
  55. The Patent Law Treaty 2000 407
  56. The WIPO GRATK Treaty 2024: Genetic Resources and Traditional Knowledge 415
  57. The Riyadh Design Law Treaty 2024 422
  58. The UPOV Convention: 1961, 1978 and 1991 429
  59. UPOV: The Union, Its Organs and the Final Clauses, Articles 22 to 42 437
  60. Bretton Woods 1944 and the Organisation That Was Never Born 445
  61. GATT 1947: Its Basic Objectives, and How Far It Succeeded 450
  62. The Rounds of Negotiation, Geneva 1947 to Punta del Este 1986 456
  63. The Uruguay Round 1986 to 1994, and Its Socio Legal Implications 461
  64. How Intellectual Property Got Into a Trade Agreement 467
  65. The Marrakesh Agreement 1994: The World Trade Organization 473
  66. The Structure of the WTO, and the Council for TRIPS 479
  67. Decision Making, Waivers, Amendment and Withdrawal, Articles IX, X and XV 485
  68. Membership and Accession, Articles XI, XII, XIII, XIV and XVI 491
  69. The WTO and Global Economic Policy Making 497
  70. The Norms for Developing Countries 502
  71. The Multilateral Agreements and the Single Undertaking 508
  72. WTO Dispute Settlement: The Procedure a TRIPS Complaint Follows 513
  73. The Other Mechanisms: Good Offices, Conciliation, Mediation and Arbitration 519
  74. UNESCO, the ILO, the FAO and the WHO 524
  75. WIPO and the WTO Compared 531

Module III The TRIPS Agreement

  1. The TRIPS Agreement: What It Is and Why It Changed Everything 537
  2. TRIPS Article 1: The Nature and Scope of Obligations 542
  3. TRIPS Article 2: Paris, Berne, Rome and Washington Carried In 546
  4. TRIPS Article 3: National Treatment 551
  5. TRIPS Articles 4 and 5: Most Favoured Nation Treatment 556
  6. TRIPS Articles 6, 7 and 8: Exhaustion, Objectives and Principles 560
  7. TRIPS Articles 9 to 14: Copyright and Related Rights 565
  8. TRIPS Articles 15 to 21: Trademarks 571
  9. TRIPS Articles 22 to 24: Geographical Indications 576
  10. TRIPS Articles 25 and 26: Industrial Designs 582
  11. TRIPS Article 27: Patentable Subject Matter 587
  12. TRIPS Articles 28, 29 and 30: Rights, Disclosure and Exceptions 592
  13. TRIPS Article 31: Other Use Without Authorisation 597
  14. TRIPS Articles 32, 33 and 34: Revocation, Term and Burden of Proof 603
  15. TRIPS Articles 35 to 38: Layout Designs of Integrated Circuits 608
  16. TRIPS Article 39: Undisclosed Information 613
  17. TRIPS Article 40: Anti-Competitive Practices in Licences 618
  18. TRIPS Article 41: The General Obligations on Enforcement 623
  19. TRIPS Articles 42 to 49: Civil and Administrative Procedures 628
  20. TRIPS Article 50: Provisional Measures 634
  21. TRIPS Articles 51 to 60: Border Measures 639
  22. TRIPS Article 61: Criminal Procedures 645
  23. TRIPS Article 62: Acquisition and Maintenance of Rights 650
  24. TRIPS Article 63: Transparency 655
  25. TRIPS Article 64: Dispute Settlement and the Non Violation Moratorium 660
  26. TRIPS Articles 65 and 66: Transitional Arrangements 665
  27. TRIPS Articles 67, 70: Technical Cooperation and Existing Subject Matter 670
  28. TRIPS Articles 68, 69, 71, 72 and 73: The Institutions 677
  29. The Doha Declaration on TRIPS and Public Health, 2001 682
  30. Article 31bis and the Protocol Amending TRIPS 687
  31. TRIPS and the Indian Patents Act 1970 693
  32. Section 3(d) and the Novartis Case 698
  33. How India Implemented the Rest of TRIPS 703
  34. Plant Variety Protection under TRIPS Article 27.3(b) 708
  35. The TRIPS Disputes That Have Been Decided 715
  36. TRIPS Plus: Free Trade Agreements and What India Has Refused 720

Module IV Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights

  1. Human Rights and Intellectual Property: Two Systems Built Apart 725
  2. Universal Declaration Article 27: Two Halves of One Sentence 730
  3. Covenant Article 15 and General Comment No. 17 735
  4. Is Intellectual Property Itself a Human Right? 741
  5. The Conflict Approach and the Coexistence Approach 746
  6. Public Interest and the Indian Intellectual Property System 752
  7. The Interplay of Rights and Public Interest, and How Rights Are Abused 758
  8. The Right to Health and Access to Medicines 763
  9. Compulsory Licensing in India 768
  10. The Right to Education, Cultural Life, and the Limits of Copyright 775
  11. The Right to Food and Farmers' Rights 780
  12. The Convention on Biological Diversity 1992, Articles 1 to 21 786
  13. The Convention on Biological Diversity: Machinery and Final Clauses, Articles 22 to 42 793
  14. The Nagoya Protocol 2010, Articles 1 to 18 799
  15. Nagoya: Machinery, Final Clauses, and the Biological Diversity Act 806
  16. Traditional Knowledge: Why Patent Law Cannot See It 814
  17. Biopiracy: Turmeric, Neem, Basmati, and the Digital Library 820
  18. Traditional Cultural Expressions and Indigenous Peoples 826
  19. The Challenges of Governing Public Interest and Intellectual Property Together 832
  20. A Human Rights Framework for Intellectual Property 837
munotes.in

Module I

Intellectual Property Rights: Concept, Growth and Kinds

munotes.in

Chapter One

What Intellectual Property Is

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Intellectual property is the name the law gives to a set of rights over things people make with their minds rather than with their hands.

In exam wording: intellectual property comprises the legally recognised rights arising from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary and artistic fields, exercisable against the world at large for a limited period, and conferred by statute over creations of the mind rather than over any physical object.

Why the law has this at all

Start with the problem, not with the definition. A carpenter who makes a chair owns the chair. Nobody has to invent a special law to say so, because the chair is a physical thing and only one person can sit on it at a time. If somebody takes it, the carpenter no longer has it.

A song is not like a chair. If you write a song and I learn it, you still have it. I have taken nothing away from you. Ten million people can sing it at once and none of them stops any of the others. Economists call this non-rivalry: consuming the thing does not use it up.

And a song is hard to fence. Once it is sung in public, anybody who hears it can repeat it. There is no wall to build, no lock to fit. Economists call this non-excludability: you cannot easily keep others out.

Those two features together are the whole problem. They make a song, an invention or a brand name look like something nobody can own, and if nobody can own it, the argument runs, nobody will pay to make it. Writing a symphony takes a year. Finding a drug takes a decade and a great deal of money. Copying either takes an afternoon.

Intellectual property is the answer the law gives. It creates, by statute, an artificial fence: a right to stop other people doing certain things with your creation for a certain number of years. That is all it is. It is not a natural feature of the world and it did not exist before Parliaments made it.

The four things every intellectual property right shares

1. The subject matter is intangible. What is protected is the invention, the expression, the sign or the design, not the copy in your hand. Buying a novel does not buy the copyright in it. Buying a patented machine does not buy the patent.

2. The right is negative. A patent does not entitle its owner to work the invention. It entitles the owner to stop others from working it. If the invention is a drug the regulator has not approved, the patent is worth nothing until the regulator says yes, and the patent office has nothing to do with that.

munotes.in1

What Intellectual Property Is

3. The right is territorial. An Indian patent stops nobody in Germany. This one feature is why Module II exists, and it is worked in full in [Territoriality and the Independence of Rights].

4. The right is limited in time. Twenty years for a patent, the author's life and sixty years for most copyright in India, ten to fifteen years for a design. When the term ends the subject matter falls into the public domain, meaning anybody may use it freely, and that is not a failure of the system but its purpose.

The vocabulary, defined once

Intangible means having no physical existence. Incorporeal is the older word for the same idea and MU uses it on the 2015 paper.

The public domain is the state of a creation that nobody owns: either because its term has expired, or because it was never protectable in the first place.

A monopoly, in this subject, means a legal power to exclude others from a defined activity. It does not mean market dominance and it does not mean high prices, though it can lead to both.

Sui generis is Latin for "of its own kind". A sui generis right is one designed specially for a subject matter that no existing category fits, such as India's plant variety statute. The phrase returns in [Plant Variety Protection under TRIPS Article 27.3(b)].

A statute is an Act of a legislature. Every intellectual property right in India is created by one, and there is no common law patent and no common law copyright.

A worked example

Asha Rane, in Pune, writes a computer program that schedules deliveries for small shops. Ask what she owns.

The source code is a literary work. Under Indian law copyright subsists in it automatically, from the moment it is written down, with no registration and no fee. She can stop others copying the code.

Copyright does not protect the idea. If Ravi Menon writes his own code from scratch that schedules deliveries the same way, Asha has no copyright claim, because copyright protects expression and not ideas. This distinction is worked in [Copyright and Related Rights].

The method might be patentable, and probably is not. Section 3(k) of the Patents Act 1970 excludes a computer programme per se, and whether Asha's method escapes that exclusion depends on whether it produces a technical effect. That is the question in Ferid Allani v Union of India, worked in [TRIPS Article 27: Patentable Subject Matter].

The name is a trade mark. If she calls the program DABBAWALA and uses it in trade, she can build rights in the name, registered or not.

munotes.in2

What Intellectual Property Is

The screen layout may be a design. If the visual appearance is new and original, the Designs Act 2000 may protect it.

Her customer list is undisclosed information. So long as she keeps it secret and takes reasonable steps to do so, the law of confidence protects it, and it is protected for as long as it stays secret and not a day longer.

One product, five different rights, five different statutes, five different terms. That is what a student has to be able to see, and seeing it is most of what Module I is for.

What it does NOT mean

It is not "property" in the ordinary sense. The word is a metaphor and it misleads. You cannot possess an idea, you cannot be dispossessed of it, and the remedies are not the remedies of the law of property.

It is not one right. There is no such thing as "an intellectual property". There are patents, copyrights, trade marks, designs, geographical indications, layout designs, plant varieties and trade secrets, and they share almost nothing except the reason they exist.

It does not reward effort. Copyright rewards original expression, not labour; a patent rewards a non-obvious inventive step, not years spent. A person can work for a decade and get nothing.

Quick revision

  • Intellectual property: rights arising from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary and artistic fields, conferred by statute over creations of the mind.
  • The economic problem it answers: creations of the mind are non-rival (my use does not stop yours) and non-excludable (hard to fence). Without a legal fence, the argument runs, too little would be created.
  • Four shared features: the subject matter is intangible; the right is negative, a right to exclude; it is territorial; it is limited in time, after which the subject matter enters the public domain.
  • Every Indian intellectual property right is statutory. There is no common law patent.
  • One product can carry several rights at once, each under a different Act with a different term.
  • Not a natural right recognised by the law but a right created by it, and not a reward for effort.

Test yourself

1. Why does the law create intellectual property rights at all? Because creations of the mind have two economic features that ordinary physical property does not. They are non-rival, meaning that one person's use does not diminish anyone else's: a million people can sing a song at once and none of them prevents the others. And they are non-excludable, meaning that once the creation is disclosed it is very difficult to keep others from using it, since there is no wall to build and no lock to fit. Together those features mean that a creator who invests time and money in a new drug, a novel or a brand cannot recover that investment from the market in the ordinary way, because a competitor who invested nothing can copy the result at a fraction of the cost and undersell the creator. Intellectual property answers that by creating, by statute, an artificial right to exclude others for a limited period, so that the creator has a period in which to recover the investment. The right is therefore a deliberate policy instrument rather than a recognition of anything natural, and this is why every discussion of it in Module IV is a discussion about balance.

munotes.in3

What Intellectual Property Is

2. What are the common features of all intellectual property rights? Four. First, the subject matter is intangible: what is protected is the invention, the expression, the sign or the design itself, and not the physical article in which it is embodied, so that buying a book does not buy the copyright and buying a patented machine does not buy the patent. Second, the right is negative: it is a right to prevent others from doing defined acts, and it confers no positive right on the owner to exploit the subject matter, which may still require a licence, a regulatory approval or the consent of another right holder. Third, the right is territorial: it exists only under the law that created it and within that law's territory, which is why an international system of treaties became necessary at all. Fourth, the right is limited in time, and on expiry the subject matter falls into the public domain, where anybody may use it. That last feature is not a defect of the system; it is the bargain on which the system rests.

3. Give an example of one product carrying several rights, and name the right in each case. A computer program written and sold by a small Indian developer. The source code is a literary work in which copyright subsists automatically from the moment it is recorded, with no registration required, and that copyright prevents copying of the code but not independent creation of a program that does the same thing. The underlying method may be a patentable invention, though section 3(k) of the Patents Act 1970 excludes a computer programme per se, so patentability turns on whether the invention produces a technical effect. The name under which the program is sold can be a trade mark, registered under the Trade Marks Act 1999 or protected in passing off without registration. The visual appearance of the interface may be an industrial design under the Designs Act 2000 if it is new and original. And the developer's customer list, kept secret and protected by reasonable steps, is undisclosed information protected by the law of confidence for as long as it remains secret. Five rights, five statutes, five different terms, one product.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in4

Chapter Two

Intangible and Incorporeal Property

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Intellectual property is property you cannot touch, and almost every rule about it follows from that one fact.

In exam wording: intellectual property is intangible incorporeal property, that is property whose subject matter has no physical existence and which is therefore incapable of physical possession, delivery or dispossession, so that the ordinary incidents of the law of movable and immovable property apply to it only by analogy and often not at all.

The vocabulary first

Corporeal property is property with a body: land, a car, a bag of rice. You can touch it, hold it, and hand it over.

Incorporeal property is property with no body: a debt, a share in a company, a right of way, a patent. It exists as a legal relationship and nothing else.

Intangible means the same thing as incorporeal in ordinary use. Indian statutes and Indian judgments use both.

Note the spelling. MU prints "incorporate". That is not a word for this idea; the word is incorporeal. Write the correct form in the exam and the meaning is unmistakable either way.

Why the law has this distinction

Because the whole of property law was built for things you can hold. Possession, delivery, theft, adverse possession, bailment, the passing of risk: every one of those concepts assumes an object that can be in one place at a time and in one person's hands.

None of them works on an invention. You cannot possess an inventive concept. You cannot deliver a melody. You cannot be adversely possessed out of a trade mark by somebody sitting on it for twelve years.

So the law had to build a parallel set of rules, and it did so statute by statute. That is why there is a Patents Act, a Copyright Act, a Trade Marks Act and five more, rather than one chapter of the Transfer of Property Act.

The three-way comparison

Immovable propertyMovable propertyIntellectual property
Subject matterLand and things attached to itA physical chattelAn intangible creation
Can be possessedYesYesNo
Can be deliveredBy registered conveyanceBy handing overOnly by assignment in writing
Two people can use it at onceNoNoYes, and this is the whole difficulty
Lost by being takenYesYesNo. Infringement takes nothing away
DurationPerpetualUntil destroyedFixed by statute, then public domain
Created byOccupation, grant, purchaseMaking or buyingStatute alone
Territorial limitsWhere the land isTravels with the goodsOnly where the statute runs

What follows from intangibility, in practice

There is no theft of a patent. Section 378 of the Indian Penal Code, and now the corresponding provision of the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita 2023, requires movable property to be taken out of a person's possession. An infringer takes nothing out of anybody's possession, which is why infringement is a civil wrong with statutory criminal provisions bolted on for particular kinds of copying, and not theft.

munotes.in5

Intangible and Incorporeal Property

Damages are hard to prove. With a stolen car the loss is the car. With an infringed patent the loss is the sales the owner would have made, which requires an argument about a market that did not happen. This is why accounts of profits, statutory damages and delivery up all exist.

Injunctions matter more than damages. Because the loss is diffuse and the wrong is repeatable at no cost, stopping the infringer is worth more than compensating the owner, which is why TRIPS Article 44 requires injunctions and Article 50 requires provisional measures.

Ownership must be recorded. Since possession proves nothing, the law substitutes registers: the Register of Patents, the Register of Trade Marks, the Register of Designs. Copyright is the exception, and Indian registration of copyright is voluntary and only evidentiary.

Transfer must be in writing. Section 68 of the Patents Act requires an assignment to be in writing and duly executed; section 19 of the Copyright Act requires the same; section 39 of the Trade Marks Act deals with assignment. There is no delivery, so writing does the work delivery does elsewhere.

A worked example

Ganesh Iyer buys a patented machine from its patentee for eight lakh rupees.

He owns the machine outright. It is a chattel. He can sell it, mortgage it, break it up for scrap.

He owns no part of the patent. The right to stop others making that machine stays with the patentee, and Ganesh cannot make a second one.

He can nevertheless resell the machine he bought, because the patentee's right in that particular article is exhausted by the first authorised sale. Exhaustion is worked in [TRIPS Articles 6, 7 and 8: Exhaustion, Objectives and Principles].

If a fire destroys the machine, the patent is unaffected. If the patent is revoked, the machine still works. Two kinds of property, one physical object, and neither follows the other.

What it does NOT mean

It does not mean intellectual property is not property. Article 300A of the Constitution says no person shall be deprived of property save by authority of law, and Indian courts treat statutory intellectual property rights as property for that purpose. The European Court of Human Rights has held the same of a trade mark, and that judgment is worked in full in [Is Intellectual Property Itself a Human Right?].

It does not mean the right is weaker. A patent can be worth more than a factory, and it can be mortgaged, licensed, taxed and inherited.

munotes.in6

Intangible and Incorporeal Property

It does not mean there is no physical embodiment. There usually is. The point is that the right attaches to the intangible creation and not to the embodiment, which is why a purchaser of the embodiment gets no share of the right.

Quick revision

  • Corporeal property has a body; incorporeal or intangible property does not. MU prints "incorporate"; the term is incorporeal.
  • Intellectual property cannot be possessed, delivered or dispossessed, so possession, theft, bailment and adverse possession do not apply to it.
  • Consequences: no theft of an intangible; damages hard to prove, so injunctions dominate; ownership proved by registers, not possession; transfer by writing, not delivery.
  • Two people can use the same creation at once and infringement takes nothing away, which is the feature that distinguishes it from every other kind of property.
  • Duration is fixed by statute, and afterwards the subject matter is in the public domain.
  • Buying the embodiment does not buy the right; section 68 of the Patents Act and section 19 of the Copyright Act require assignments in writing.

Test yourself

1. What does it mean to call intellectual property intangible incorporeal property, and what follows from it? It means that the subject matter of the right, the invention, the expression, the sign or the design, has no physical existence, so the right cannot be possessed, handed over or physically taken. Four practical consequences follow, and each of them explains a rule a student otherwise has to memorise. There is no theft of an intangible, because theft requires that movable property be taken out of somebody's possession and an infringer takes nothing out of anybody's possession, which is why infringement is primarily a civil wrong. Damages are hard to prove, because the loss is the sales that did not happen rather than an object that has gone, which is why accounts of profits and statutory damages exist. Injunctions matter more than damages, because a wrong that costs the infringer nothing to repeat has to be stopped rather than compensated, which is why TRIPS Article 44 requires injunctive relief and Article 50 requires provisional measures. And ownership has to be recorded on a public register and transferred in writing, because possession proves nothing and there is no delivery to mark the moment of transfer.

2. Distinguish intellectual property from movable and immovable property. Immovable property is land and what is attached to it; movable property is a physical chattel; both can be possessed, and both can be lost by being taken. Intellectual property has no physical subject matter at all and therefore cannot be possessed or taken. The critical distinction is that immovable and movable property are rivalrous, meaning that only one person can use the thing at one time, whereas the subject matter of intellectual property can be used by any number of people simultaneously without any of them interfering with any other, so that an infringer deprives the owner of nothing except an opportunity to be paid. Duration differs too: title to land is perpetual and title to a chattel lasts until the chattel is destroyed, while every intellectual property right has a term fixed by statute after which the subject matter enters the public domain. Territoriality differs: land law follows the land and a chattel carries its title with it across borders, while an intellectual property right exists only under the statute that created it and stops at that statute's border, which is the fact that makes an international treaty system necessary. And creation differs: land and chattels can be acquired by occupation, manufacture or purchase, while every intellectual property right in India owes its existence to an Act of Parliament.

munotes.in7

Intangible and Incorporeal Property

3. Ganesh buys a patented machine. What does he own and what does he not own? He owns the machine, which is a chattel, absolutely. He may use it, resell it, mortgage it or destroy it, and his right to resell that particular machine is protected by the doctrine of exhaustion, under which the patentee's rights in the individual article are spent by the first authorised sale. He owns no part of the patent. The patent is a separate item of incorporeal property, which continues to belong to the patentee, and it entitles the patentee to prevent Ganesh from manufacturing a second machine to the same specification. The two items of property are independent of one another in both directions: if the machine is destroyed by fire the patent is unaffected, and if the patent is revoked by the Controller the machine continues to work and continues to belong to Ganesh. The example is the whole distinction between the intangible right and its physical embodiment in a single transaction.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in8

Chapter Three

The Concept and the Nature of Intellectual Property

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The nature of intellectual property is the set of features that make it behave differently from every other kind of property, and an examiner asking about its nature is asking for those features and their consequences.

In exam wording: intellectual property is a statutory, negative, territorial and time limited right over an intangible creation, transferable and divisible like other property but incapable of possession, and justified not by the creator's ownership of the thing but by the public purpose the grant is intended to serve.

Why this question is asked in that form

Because "concept" and "nature" are different questions. The concept is what intellectual property is. The nature is how it behaves. A student who answers the first and stops has answered half the question.

And the University pairs them with "types" every time. June 2023 asked for concept, nature and types together; February 2026 asked for the significance of different types with illustrations. The three go together because the types are only intelligible once the nature is understood.

The concept

Intellectual property is a bundle of statutory rights over creations of the mind. The bundle differs from right to right, but in every case it consists of a power to prevent defined acts by other people for a defined period.

The World Intellectual Property Organization Convention gives the widest definition there is. Article 2(viii) of the Convention Establishing WIPO defines intellectual property to include the rights relating to literary, artistic and scientific works; performances of performing artists, phonograms and broadcasts; inventions in all fields of human endeavour; scientific discoveries; industrial designs; trademarks, service marks and commercial names and designations; protection against unfair competition; and all other rights resulting from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary or artistic fields.

That last clause is why the definition is wider than any statute. It is open ended. A right that does not yet exist can fall inside it, and this matters when a chapter reaches the WIPO GRATK Treaty of 2024, which protects something no national patent statute protects.

The nature: nine features

1. It is statutory. No Indian intellectual property right exists at common law. Every one is the creature of an Act, and the Act settles what the right covers and how long it lasts. The single exception is passing off, which is a common law tort protecting goodwill and is not itself an intellectual property right.

2. It is intangible. Worked in full in [Intangible and Incorporeal Property].

3. It is a negative right. The owner may stop others; the owner is not thereby entitled to act. Section 48 of the Patents Act 1970 confers the right to prevent third parties from making, using, offering for sale, selling or importing, and confers nothing else.

munotes.in9

The Concept and the Nature of Intellectual Property

4. It is territorial. It runs only where its statute runs. Worked in [Territoriality and the Independence of Rights].

5. It is limited in time. Twenty years from filing for a patent under section 53; the author's life and sixty calendar years for most Indian copyright under section 22; ten years, extendable to fifteen, for a design under section 11; ten years renewable indefinitely for a trade mark under section 25.

6. It is transferable and divisible. It can be assigned wholly or partly, licensed exclusively or non-exclusively, split by territory, by field of use, by period. This is what makes it a commercial asset, and it is the subject of [Commercial Exploitation: Assignment and Transmission] and the chapters after it.

7. It can be inherited and can be security. It passes on death, it can be mortgaged, and it appears on a balance sheet.

8. It is subject to public interest limits from the inside. Compulsory licences, fair dealing, government use, revocation for non-working: the limits are written into the same statutes that create the rights. This is the point Module IV builds on.

9. It is capable of simultaneous exploitation. A licensor can license the same patent to fifty people at once, which no owner of a chattel can do with the chattel.

A distinctions table students lose marks on

PatentCopyrightTrade markDesign
ProtectsA new, non-obvious, useful inventionThe original expression of an ideaA sign that distinguishes trade originThe visual appearance of an article
ArisesOn grant, after examinationAutomatically on creationOn use, and on registrationOn registration
Registration neededYesNo, voluntary in IndiaNo for passing off, yes to sue for infringementYes
Indian term20 years from filingLife plus 60 years, generally10 years, renewable for ever10 years, extendable by 5
Indian statutePatents Act 1970Copyright Act 1957Trade Marks Act 1999Designs Act 2000
TestNovelty, inventive step, industrial applicationOriginality and fixationDistinctivenessNovelty and originality of appearance

A worked example

Kavita Deshmukh designs a folding solar lamp for use in villages without power.

The mechanism is potentially a patent. If the folding hinge is new and involves an inventive step, section 2(1)(j) of the Patents Act is satisfied and a patent may be granted after examination, running twenty years from the filing date.

The shape is potentially a design. If the outward appearance of the lamp is new and appeals to the eye, the Designs Act protects it for ten years extendable by five, and it is registered without examination for inventiveness.

Those two cannot always coexist. Section 2(d) of the Designs Act excludes from "design" anything that is a mode or principle of construction, so the functional hinge is a patent question and the pleasing shape is a design question, and Kavita's lawyer has to separate them.

munotes.in10

The Concept and the Nature of Intellectual Property

The instruction leaflet is copyright, automatically, as a literary work.

The name SURYA is a trade mark, which she can renew every ten years for ever, so long as she keeps using it.

Four rights. Four terms. Four tests. One lamp. The nature of intellectual property is the reason that sentence is not a paradox.

What it does NOT mean

"Nature" does not mean "advantages". A weak answer lists benefits: encourages innovation, rewards creators, promotes trade. Those are justifications, and they belong in [Why the Law Protects Intellectual Creations]. The nature of the right is what it is and how it behaves.

It is not true that all intellectual property requires registration. Copyright never does, and passing off protects an unregistered mark.

It is not true that intellectual property confers a monopoly over an idea. Copyright protects expression and not the idea; a patent protects a claimed invention and not the field.

Quick revision

  • Concept: a bundle of statutory rights to prevent defined acts in relation to a creation of the mind, for a defined period.
  • The widest definition is Article 2(viii) of the WIPO Convention, which ends with "all other rights resulting from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary or artistic fields", and is therefore open ended.
  • Nature, nine features: statutory; intangible; negative; territorial; time limited; transferable and divisible; inheritable and capable of being security; internally limited by public interest provisions; capable of simultaneous exploitation by many licensees.
  • Indian terms to quote: patent 20 years (section 53); copyright life plus 60 (section 22); design 10 plus 5 (section 11); trade mark 10 years renewable for ever (section 25).
  • Passing off is the one protection here that is not statutory; it is a common law tort protecting goodwill.
  • Nature is not advantages. The justifications are a separate question.

Test yourself

1. Explain the concept and the nature of intellectual property. The concept is that intellectual property is a bundle of rights conferred by statute over creations of the mind, each right consisting of a power to prevent other people from doing defined acts in relation to the creation for a defined period. The widest authoritative statement of what falls within it is Article 2(viii) of the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization, which lists literary, artistic and scientific works, performances, phonograms and broadcasts, inventions in all fields of human endeavour, scientific discoveries, industrial designs, trademarks, service marks, commercial names and designations, and protection against unfair competition, and then adds all other rights resulting from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary or artistic fields, which makes the definition open ended.

munotes.in11

The Concept and the Nature of Intellectual Property

The nature of the right is a different matter and consists of the features that distinguish it from other property: it is statutory rather than natural, so that no Indian intellectual property right exists at common law apart from the tort of passing off; it is intangible and therefore incapable of possession; it is negative, conferring a power to exclude rather than a licence to act; it is territorial, running only where its statute runs; it is limited in time, after which the subject matter enters the public domain; it is transferable and divisible by assignment and licence, by territory, field and period; it is capable of being inherited and of being given as security; it carries public interest limitations written into the same statute that creates it; and it can be exploited by many licensees at once, which no owner of a chattel can achieve.

2. Why must an answer on the nature of intellectual property not become a list of advantages? Because the two questions are different and the examiner has asked one of them. The nature of a right is a description of what it is and how it behaves, and it is answered by features that can be demonstrated from the statute: that section 48 of the Patents Act confers a right to prevent and nothing more, that section 53 fixes a term of twenty years, that section 68 requires an assignment to be in writing. The advantages of an intellectual property system are a claim about consequences, and they belong to the separate question why the law protects intellectual creations at all, which is answered by the natural rights, labour, personality and utilitarian arguments and by the objections to each. A candidate who writes that intellectual property encourages innovation, rewards creativity and promotes trade has produced three assertions about policy and has not described the right, and the answer reads as though the candidate does not know the difference. The reliable structure is to state the concept, then the features of the nature with a statutory provision beside each, and to leave the justifications for the question that asks for them.

3. Kavita designs a folding solar lamp. Identify the rights and the tests each must satisfy. The folding mechanism may be a patentable invention, which requires novelty, an inventive step and industrial applicability under section 2(1)(j) of the Patents Act 1970, and if granted the patent runs twenty years from the filing date under section 53. The outward appearance of the lamp may be registrable as a design under the Designs Act 2000 if the shape, configuration, pattern or ornament is new or original and appeals to the eye, protection running ten years and extendable by five under section 11. The two do not overlap, because section 2(d) of the Designs Act excludes from the definition of design any mode or principle of construction, so the functional aspects of the hinge belong to the patent claim and the aesthetic aspects to the design registration, and the drafting has to separate them. The instruction leaflet supplied with the lamp is a literary work in which copyright subsists automatically on creation, for the author's life and sixty calendar years thereafter under section 22 of the Copyright Act 1957. The brand name under which the lamp is sold is a trade mark, protectable in passing off from the moment goodwill exists and registrable under the Trade Marks Act 1999 for ten years, renewable indefinitely under section 25. Four rights, four tests, four terms, one product.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in12

Chapter Four

The Kinds of Intellectual Property

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

There are eight kinds of intellectual property in Indian law, and the way to tell them apart is to ask what each one protects, not what it is called.

In exam wording: intellectual property is conventionally divided into industrial property, comprising patents, trade marks, industrial designs, geographical indications, layout designs of integrated circuits, plant varieties and undisclosed information, and copyright with its neighbouring rights, each category having its own subject matter, its own test of protectability, its own term and its own statute.

Why the law has more than one category

Because the things being protected are not alike. A machine, a poem, a brand, a shape, a place name and a secret have almost nothing in common except that none of them is a chattel.

Each needs a different bargain. An inventor is asked to disclose the invention in return for twenty years of exclusivity, because disclosure is what advances the art. An author is asked to disclose nothing and gets a much longer term, because a novel does not teach anybody how to build anything. A trader who uses a mark gets a right that never expires, because the mark is protected for the consumer's benefit as much as the trader's.

So the categories are not tidy boxes. They are different bargains. A student who understands that will never confuse them.

The two traditional families

Industrial property, the phrase used by the Paris Convention. Article 1(2) of the Paris Convention says industrial property has as its object patents, utility models, industrial designs, trademarks, service marks, trade names, indications of source or appellations of origin, and the repression of unfair competition. Article 1(3) adds that industrial property is to be understood in the broadest sense, applying not only to industry and commerce proper but to agricultural and extractive industries and to all manufactured or natural products.

Copyright and neighbouring rights, the subject of the Berne Convention and, for neighbouring rights, of the Rome Convention.

The division is historical, not logical. It exists because two different conventions were made in two different decades by two different sets of people, and the two secretariats were only merged in 1893 and only became WIPO in 1967. That story is [BIRPI and the Road to Stockholm].

The eight categories in Indian law

1. Patents, Patents Act 1970. A new product or process involving an inventive step and capable of industrial application. Twenty years from filing. Worked in [Patents].

2. Copyright and related rights, Copyright Act 1957. Original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic works, cinematograph films and sound recordings, plus the rights of performers and broadcasting organisations. No registration needed. Worked in [Copyright and Related Rights].

3. Trade marks, Trade Marks Act 1999. A mark capable of being represented graphically and of distinguishing the goods or services of one person from those of others. Ten years, renewable for ever. Worked in [Trade Marks, Service Marks, Collective and Certification Marks].

munotes.in13

The Kinds of Intellectual Property

4. Industrial designs, Designs Act 2000. Features of shape, configuration, pattern, ornament or composition of lines or colours applied to an article, judged solely by the eye. Ten years, extendable by five.

5. Geographical indications, Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration and Protection) Act 1999. An indication identifying goods as originating in a territory where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic is essentially attributable to that origin. Ten years, renewable indefinitely.

6. Layout designs of integrated circuits, Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000. The three dimensional disposition of the elements of an integrated circuit. Ten years, non renewable.

7. Plant varieties, Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act 2001. A variety that is new, distinct, uniform and stable. Fifteen years for most crops, eighteen for trees and vines.

8. Undisclosed information, protected in India by the common law of confidence and by contract, with no statute of its own. Protected for as long as the information stays secret.

The nine treaty categories, and why they differ from the eight

TRIPS Article 1.2 says that for the purposes of the Agreement, intellectual property refers to all categories of intellectual property that are the subject of Sections 1 to 7 of Part II. Those seven sections are: copyright and related rights; trademarks; geographical indications; industrial designs; patents; layout designs of integrated circuits; and protection of undisclosed information.

That is seven, not eight, and plant varieties are not one of them. Plant varieties enter TRIPS through Article 27.3(b), which permits their exclusion from patentability provided a member protects them by patents, by an effective sui generis system, or by a combination. So India's plant variety statute exists because of TRIPS but plant varieties are not a TRIPS category of their own.

And trade names are a Paris category that TRIPS does not list. Article 8 of the Paris Convention requires protection of trade names without any obligation of filing or registration, and Article 2.1 of TRIPS carries Paris Articles 1 to 12 in, so the obligation binds anyway. This is the kind of detail that separates a good answer from a list.

A worked example: telling them apart

Take a bottle of Darjeeling tea sold in a distinctive tin.

The tea itself: no intellectual property. A natural product, grown.

DARJEELING: a geographical indication, registered as GI application number 1 in India, because the quality is attributable to where it is grown. It is also registered as a certification trade mark, and one product can carry both.

munotes.in14

The Kinds of Intellectual Property

The tin's shape: an industrial design, if new and judged by the eye.

The picture on the tin: an artistic work in copyright.

The brand of the seller: a trade mark.

The blending process, if kept secret: undisclosed information.

A machine that seals the tin: a patent, owned by somebody else entirely.

Six categories on one shelf, and the way to sort them is always the same question: what exactly is being protected?

What it does NOT mean

A trade mark is not a brand. A brand is a commercial idea. A trade mark is a legal right in a particular sign for particular goods.

A design is not a patent for a shape. A design protects appearance only, and it protects it against copying of the appearance and nothing else. Section 2(d) of the Designs Act excludes any mode or principle of construction.

A geographical indication is not owned by anybody. It is a collective right, and any producer in the region who meets the standard may use it. This is what makes it different from every other category.

Copyright does not protect facts, ideas, methods or news. It protects the expression, and only if that expression is original.

Quick revision

  • Two families: industrial property (Paris Article 1(2)) and copyright with neighbouring rights (Berne and Rome).
  • Eight Indian categories: patents; copyright and related rights; trade marks; industrial designs; geographical indications; layout designs; plant varieties; undisclosed information.
  • TRIPS lists SEVEN in Sections 1 to 7 of Part II (Article 1.2). Plant varieties are not among them; they enter through Article 27.3(b). Trade names are a Paris Article 8 category TRIPS does not list separately.
  • Terms: patent 20 years; copyright life plus 60; trade mark 10 renewable for ever; design 10 plus 5; geographical indication 10 renewable; layout design 10, not renewable; plant variety 15 or 18 years; trade secret as long as it stays secret.
  • A geographical indication is collective: no single owner, and any qualifying producer may use it.
  • The sorting question is always: what exactly is protected?

Test yourself

1. Mention the various types of intellectual property rights. Indian law recognises eight. Patents, under the Patents Act 1970, protect a new product or process involving an inventive step and capable of industrial application, for twenty years from filing. Copyright and related rights, under the Copyright Act 1957, protect original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic works, cinematograph films and sound recordings, together with the rights of performers and broadcasting organisations, without any registration and generally for the author's life and sixty years. Trade marks, under the Trade Marks Act 1999, protect a mark capable of graphical representation which distinguishes one trader's goods or services from another's, for ten years renewable indefinitely. Industrial designs, under the Designs Act 2000, protect the visual appearance of an article judged solely by the eye, for ten years extendable by five. Geographical indications, under the Act of 1999, protect an indication identifying goods whose quality or reputation is essentially attributable to their geographical origin, for ten years renewable.

munotes.in15

The Kinds of Intellectual Property

Layout designs of integrated circuits, under the Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000, protect the three dimensional disposition of the elements of a circuit for ten years without renewal. Plant varieties, under the Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act 2001, protect a variety that is new, distinct, uniform and stable, for fifteen years for most crops and eighteen for trees and vines. Undisclosed information is protected in India by the common law of confidence and by contract, with no statute of its own, and for as long as the information remains secret.

2. How does the TRIPS list of categories differ from the Indian list, and why does the difference matter? Article 1.2 of TRIPS defines intellectual property, for the purposes of the Agreement, as all the categories that are the subject of Sections 1 to 7 of Part II, which are copyright and related rights, trademarks, geographical indications, industrial designs, patents, layout designs of integrated circuits, and undisclosed information. That is seven categories, and plant varieties are not among them. Plant varieties enter the Agreement obliquely, through Article 27.3(b), which permits a member to exclude plants and animals from patentability provided that it protects plant varieties either by patents, or by an effective sui generis system, or by any combination of the two. India's Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act 2001 exists because of that provision, but a candidate who lists plant varieties as a TRIPS category has misread Article 1.2. The other difference runs the other way: Article 8 of the Paris Convention requires the protection of trade names in all countries of the Union without any obligation of filing or registration, and TRIPS Article 2.1 carries Paris Articles 1 to 12 into the Agreement, so the trade name obligation binds every WTO member even though TRIPS has no section about it. Both differences matter because they show that the categories are the product of drafting history rather than of logic.

3. Take one product and identify the different rights it can carry. A tin of Darjeeling tea. The tea itself carries no intellectual property, being a grown natural product. The word DARJEELING is a geographical indication, registered as the first geographical indication in India, because the quality and reputation of the tea are essentially attributable to the region in which it is grown, and it is a collective right that any qualifying producer in the region may use rather than a right owned by any one person; it is separately registered as a certification trade mark, which shows that one sign can be protected in two ways at once. The shape of the tin can be registered as an industrial design if it is new or original and appeals to the eye. The illustration printed on the tin is an artistic work protected by copyright from the moment it is drawn, with no registration required. The seller's own brand name is a trade mark, protectable in passing off from the moment goodwill exists and registrable for ten years renewable indefinitely. The blending process, if kept confidential, is undisclosed information protected by the law of confidence for so long as it stays secret. And the machine that seals the tin will be the subject of somebody else's patent. Six categories on one shelf, sorted by asking in each case what exactly is being protected.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in16

Chapter Five

Patents

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A patent is a twenty year right to stop others working an invention, given in exchange for telling the world how the invention works.

In exam wording: a patent is a statutory grant conferring on the patentee, for a term of twenty years from the date of filing, the exclusive right to prevent third parties from making, using, offering for sale, selling or importing the patented product or the product obtained directly by the patented process, in consideration of a full and particular disclosure of the invention in a specification open to public inspection.

Why the law has this at all

An invention is expensive to make and cheap to copy. A pharmaceutical company may spend a decade and enormous sums finding a molecule that works. A competitor with the molecule in hand can manufacture it in months.

Without a patent the rational course is secrecy. Keep the process behind a locked door and hope nobody works it out. Secrecy protects the inventor but teaches nobody, and the art does not advance.

A patent is a bargain that buys disclosure. The inventor files a specification describing the invention so fully that a person skilled in the art could perform it, the specification is published, and in exchange the inventor gets twenty years of exclusivity. When the term ends, the disclosure is already in the public domain and anybody may use it.

That is the whole theory, and it is worth stating in the exam, because every argument in Module IV about access to medicines is an argument about whether the bargain is a fair one.

The three requirements

Novelty. The invention must be new, meaning not anticipated by publication or by use anywhere in the world before the priority date. Section 2(1)(l) of the Patents Act 1970 defines "new invention" and section 13 governs the examiner's search.

Inventive step. Section 2(1)(ja) defines it as a feature of an invention that involves technical advance as compared to existing knowledge, or has economic significance, or both, and that makes the invention not obvious to a person skilled in the art. The words "technical advance" and "economic significance" are India's own; TRIPS Article 27.1 says only "non-obvious".

Industrial application. Section 2(1)(ac): capable of being made or used in an industry. TRIPS Article 27.1 offers "capable of industrial application" with a footnote permitting a member to read it as synonymous with "useful".

What cannot be patented in India

Section 3 lists the exclusions, and four of them matter for this paper.

Section 3(d) excludes the mere discovery of a new form of a known substance which does not result in the enhancement of the known efficacy of that substance. This is the provision construed in the Novartis case, worked in [Section 3(d) and the Novartis Case].

munotes.in17

Patents

Section 3(j) excludes plants and animals in whole or any part thereof other than microorganisms, and essentially biological processes for the production or propagation of plants and animals. This is India's use of TRIPS Article 27.3(b).

Section 3(k) excludes a mathematical or business method, a computer programme per se, and algorithms. The words "per se" are what the Delhi High Court had to construe in the Ferid Allani case.

Section 3(p) excludes an invention which in effect is traditional knowledge, or an aggregation or duplication of known properties of traditionally known components. This is worked in [Biopiracy: Turmeric, Neem, Basmati, and the Digital Library].

What a patentee actually gets

Section 48 gives the right to prevent third parties, who do not have the patentee's consent, from making, using, offering for sale, selling or importing for those purposes the patented product, or the product obtained directly by a patented process.

Note what is absent. There is no right to work the invention. A patented drug still needs a marketing approval. A patented device may still infringe somebody else's patent.

Section 53 fixes the term at twenty years from the date of filing, which matters because examination can take years and every year of delay is a year of the term gone. That is why TRIPS Article 62.2 requires grant within a reasonable period of time.

A worked example

Dr Meera Pillai, in a laboratory in Hyderabad, finds a new catalyst that halves the energy needed to make a common fertiliser.

Day 1. She files a provisional specification at the Indian Patent Office describing what she has. That date is her priority date, and everything published anywhere in the world after it is irrelevant to novelty.

Month 12. She files a complete specification with claims defining the monopoly she asks for. Under section 11A the application is published after eighteen months from priority.

She has twelve months from the priority date to file abroad under Article 4 of the Paris Convention, or thirty months if she uses the Patent Cooperation Treaty, which is why [The Patent Cooperation Treaty 1970: What an International Application Is] exists.

Examination. She requests examination; the examiner searches the prior art and objects. She amends the claims. This takes three years.

Grant, in year four. She now has sixteen years of the twenty left.

A competitor copies the catalyst. Meera sues under section 48. If the competitor pleads that her invention is obvious, the burden of proving obviousness lies on the competitor, but if her patent is for a process and the competitor makes an identical product, section 104A reverses the burden and the competitor has to prove it used a different process. TRIPS Article 34 is the reason that provision exists.

munotes.in18

Patents

What it does NOT mean

A patent is not a right to sell. Regulatory approval is a separate question entirely.

A patent is not granted for an idea. It is granted for a claimed invention, and the claims define the monopoly. Everything outside the claims is free.

A granted patent is not a valid patent. Section 64 allows revocation on a dozen grounds, and Indian patents are frequently revoked. The Monsanto case turned on how a revocation counter-claim must be tried.

A patent does not last twenty years from grant. It runs from filing, and in India there is no extension for regulatory delay.

Quick revision

  • Patent: a statutory right to exclude, for twenty years from filing (section 53 of the Patents Act 1970), in exchange for a full disclosure.
  • Three requirements: novelty (section 2(1)(l)); inventive step (section 2(1)(ja), which requires technical advance or economic significance and non-obviousness); industrial application (section 2(1)(ac)).
  • Section 48 confers a right to prevent making, using, offering for sale, selling and importing. It confers no right to work the invention.
  • Key Indian exclusions: section 3(d) new forms without enhanced efficacy; 3(j) plants and animals; 3(k) computer programme per se; 3(p) traditional knowledge.
  • Section 104A reverses the burden of proof for process patents, which is TRIPS Article 34.
  • The term runs from filing, so examination delay eats it; TRIPS Article 62.2 requires grant within a reasonable period.

Test yourself

1. What is the bargain a patent represents, and why does it matter to this paper? The bargain is disclosure for exclusivity. An inventor who has found something new could keep it secret, and secrecy would protect the invention for as long as nobody worked it out, but it would teach nobody and the art would not advance. The patent system offers an alternative: describe the invention in a specification so fully and particularly that a person skilled in the art can perform it, allow that specification to be published, and receive in exchange the exclusive right to prevent others working the invention for twenty years from the filing date. At the end of the term the disclosure is already public and anybody may use it freely. The bargain matters to this paper for two reasons. It is the justification the whole international patent system rests on, so a student who cannot state it cannot explain why the Paris Convention or the Patent Cooperation Treaty exist. And it is the thing Module IV puts in question, because every argument about access to medicines is an argument about whether twenty years of exclusivity is too high a price for the disclosure obtained.

munotes.in19

Patents

2. State the requirements of patentability and the principal Indian exclusions. Three requirements. Novelty, meaning that the invention was not anticipated by publication or public use anywhere in the world before the priority date, defined in section 2(1)(l) of the Patents Act 1970. Inventive step, defined in section 2(1)(ja) as a feature involving technical advance compared with existing knowledge, or having economic significance, or both, and making the invention not obvious to a person skilled in the art, a formulation that goes beyond the bare non-obviousness required by TRIPS Article 27.1. And industrial applicability, defined in section 2(1)(ac) as being capable of being made or used in an industry. Section 3 then lists what is not an invention, and four exclusions matter here: section 3(d), which excludes the mere discovery of a new form of a known substance that does not enhance the known efficacy of that substance; section 3(j), which excludes plants and animals in whole or in part other than microorganisms and essentially biological processes, and is India's use of the flexibility in TRIPS Article 27.3(b); section 3(k), which excludes mathematical and business methods, computer programmes per se and algorithms; and section 3(p), which excludes an invention that is in effect traditional knowledge or an aggregation or duplication of the known properties of traditionally known components.

3. What does a patentee get, and what does a patentee not get? Section 48 confers the right to prevent third parties who do not have the patentee's consent from making, using, offering for sale, selling or importing for those purposes the patented product, or the product obtained directly by a patented process. That is a purely negative right and it is the whole of what the grant confers. The patentee does not get a right to work the invention: a patented medicine still requires marketing approval from the drug regulator, a patented device may itself infringe an earlier patent held by somebody else, and a patented process may be prohibited by other law altogether. The patentee does not get a monopoly over the field, only over what the claims define, so a competitor who works outside the claims infringes nothing. The patentee does not get a right that is safe from challenge, because section 64 permits revocation on numerous grounds and revocation is common. And the patentee does not get twenty years of enforceable exclusivity, because the term runs from the date of filing under section 53 and every year spent in examination is a year of the term consumed, which is why TRIPS Article 62.2 obliges members to grant within a reasonable period of time so as to avoid unwarranted curtailment of the period of protection.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in20

Chapter Seven

Trade Marks, Service Marks, Collective and Certification Marks

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A trade mark is a sign that tells a buyer where goods come from, and the right is given as much for the buyer's sake as for the trader's.

In exam wording: a trade mark is a mark capable of being represented graphically and of distinguishing the goods or services of one person from those of others, and may include the shape of goods, their packaging and combinations of colours; registration confers on the proprietor the exclusive right to use the mark in relation to the goods or services for which it is registered and to obtain relief in respect of infringement.

Why the law has this at all

The reason is not the same as for patents and copyright. A patent and a copyright reward creation. A trade mark rewards nothing: the word APPLE was not invented by anybody and no effort went into choosing it.

The reason is information. A buyer who cannot tell one manufacturer's goods from another's cannot punish a bad one by buying elsewhere, and a manufacturer who cannot be identified has no reason to maintain quality. The mark is what makes reputation possible.

So the right protects two people at once: the trader, whose goodwill it protects, and the consumer, who is protected from confusion. That dual purpose is why the tests are all phrased in terms of likelihood of confusion rather than in terms of copying.

And it is why the term is unlimited. A patent expires because the information should become free. A mark does not expire, because the day it becomes free is the day buyers start being deceived. Section 25 of the Trade Marks Act 1999 gives ten years, renewable for ever.

What can be a mark

Section 2(1)(zb) defines a trade mark as a mark capable of being represented graphically and capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one person from those of others, and may include shape of goods, their packaging and combination of colours.

Section 2(1)(m) defines "mark" to include a device, brand, heading, label, ticket, name, signature, word, letter, numeral, shape of goods, packaging or combination of colours or any combination thereof.

Non-traditional marks are sounds, smells, moving images and holograms. India has registered sound marks. The Singapore Treaty on the Law of Trademarks 2006 was made to accommodate them, and India acceded to it in 2013.

The four kinds of mark

Trade marks, for goods.

Service marks, for services. The Paris Convention Article 6sexies obliges countries to protect service marks but does not require them to be registrable; TRIPS Article 15.1 removes that gap by defining a trademark to include service marks.

Collective marks, section 61 of the Trade Marks Act, owned by an association and used by its members.

munotes.in25

Trade Marks, Service Marks, Collective and Certification Marks

Certification trade marks, section 2(1)(e), which certify origin, material, quality or accuracy and which the proprietor may not use itself. DARJEELING is registered as a certification mark as well as a geographical indication.

Registered and unregistered rights

Registration is not the source of the right. A trader who uses a mark and builds goodwill can sue in passing off, a common law tort, whether registered or not. Section 27(2) of the Act preserves it in terms.

Registration adds an action for infringement, which is easier to prove because the plaintiff need not prove goodwill, only that the defendant used a mark identical or deceptively similar in the course of trade.

Well known marks are protected against use on unrelated goods. This comes from Paris Article 6bis, extended by TRIPS Article 16.2 and 16.3, and enacted in India as sections 11(6) to 11(9). It is worked in [Paris: Well Known Marks, State Emblems and the Special Marks, Articles 6bis to 9].

A worked example

Rehana Sheikh sells hand made soap in Bengaluru under the name NILGIRI GLOW, with a distinctive leaf device.

She has rights from first use. The moment buyers associate the name with her soap, she has goodwill, and a rival who uses a confusingly similar name commits passing off.

She registers in class 3. The Nice Classification puts soaps and cosmetics in class 3, and this is why [The Nice Agreement 1957: Classifying Goods and Services] matters: her registration protects her in that class and not across the whole of trade.

A competitor uses NILGIRI GLO for shampoo. Shampoo is also class 3, and the mark is deceptively similar, so she has an infringement action under section 29.

A hotel opens as NILGIRI GLOW. Hotel services are class 43, and her registration does not reach it. She must show her mark is well known under section 11(6) to stop it, and that is the Paris Article 6bis question.

She wants to sell in Germany, Japan and the United States. Three national applications, three sets of agents, three languages, unless she uses the Madrid Protocol and files one international application designating all three. That is [The Madrid Protocol 1989, and Why India Joined It].

What it does NOT mean

A trade mark is not a monopoly in a word. It is a right in a sign for particular goods or services, and the same word can belong to different people in different classes.

Registration in India does not protect abroad. Toyota learned this: it had used the mark for years worldwide and still lost in India for want of Indian goodwill at the material time.

munotes.in26

Trade Marks, Service Marks, Collective and Certification Marks

A mark does not last for ever automatically. It lasts for ever if renewed and used. Section 47 permits removal for five years and three months of non use.

Passing off is not infringement. They are different actions with different ingredients, and a candidate who runs them together loses marks.

Quick revision

  • Trade mark: a graphically representable sign capable of distinguishing one trader's goods or services from another's (section 2(1)(zb)).
  • The purpose is information, not reward: it protects the trader's goodwill and the buyer against confusion, which is why the tests turn on likelihood of confusion.
  • Term: ten years, renewable indefinitely (section 25). Removable for five years and three months of non use (section 47).
  • Four kinds: trade marks, service marks (Paris Article 6sexies, TRIPS Article 15.1), collective marks (section 61), certification marks (section 2(1)(e)).
  • Unregistered marks are protected by passing off, preserved by section 27(2). Registration adds an infringement action under section 29.
  • Well known marks: Paris Article 6bis, TRIPS Article 16.2 and 16.3, Indian sections 11(6) to 11(9).
  • Non traditional marks are why the Singapore Treaty 2006 exists; India acceded in 2013.

Test yourself

1. Why does trade mark law exist, and why is its term unlimited? It exists to make trade origin identifiable. A buyer who cannot tell whose goods are whose cannot reward a good manufacturer by returning to it or punish a bad one by going elsewhere, and a manufacturer who cannot be identified has no commercial reason to maintain quality. The mark is what makes reputation possible, so the right protects two interests at once: the trader's goodwill, and the buyer's freedom from deception. That dual purpose explains the shape of the whole law, because every test is phrased in terms of the likelihood of confusion rather than in terms of copying, and a defendant who copies without confusing infringes nothing while a defendant who confuses without copying may infringe. The term is unlimited because the justification is continuous rather than exhausted. A patent expires because the disclosure it bought should eventually become free to all, and a copyright expires because the work should eventually enter the public culture. A trade mark, by contrast, performs its function only for as long as it is used, and the day it becomes free is the day buyers begin to be deceived, so section 25 of the Trade Marks Act 1999 grants ten years renewable indefinitely, subject to removal for non use under section 47.

2. Distinguish infringement from passing off. Infringement is a statutory action available only to the proprietor of a registered trade mark, under section 29 of the Trade Marks Act 1999. The plaintiff proves registration, and that the defendant used in the course of trade a mark identical with or deceptively similar to the registered mark in relation to goods or services for which it is registered, and in the case of an identical mark on identical goods confusion is presumed. Goodwill need not be proved, because the registration stands in its place. Passing off is a common law tort, preserved expressly by section 27(2), and it protects goodwill rather than a mark. The plaintiff must prove three things: that it has goodwill or reputation attached to the goods or services; that the defendant has made a misrepresentation likely to lead the public to believe that the defendant's goods or services are the plaintiff's; and that damage has been or is likely to be suffered. Passing off is therefore harder to establish but wider in reach, because it is not confined to registered goods or classes and can protect get up, trade dress and unregistered names. The two actions are frequently pleaded together and they are not interchangeable.

munotes.in27

Trade Marks, Service Marks, Collective and Certification Marks

3. Rehana registers NILGIRI GLOW for soap. Trace what her registration does and does not reach. Registration in class 3, which under the Nice Classification covers soaps and cosmetics, gives her the exclusive right to use the mark for those goods and an infringement action under section 29 against a rival using an identical or deceptively similar mark on identical or similar goods, without her having to prove goodwill. So a competitor selling shampoo as NILGIRI GLO, shampoo also being class 3 and the mark deceptively similar, infringes. A hotel trading as NILGIRI GLOW is a different matter, because hotel services fall in class 43 and her registration does not extend there. To stop the hotel she must show that her mark is well known within the meaning of section 11(6), which is India's enactment of Article 6bis of the Paris Convention as extended by Articles 16.2 and 16.3 of TRIPS, and a well known mark is protected against use even on goods or services that are not similar. Outside India her registration reaches nothing at all, because trade mark rights are territorial, so protection in Germany, Japan and the United States requires either three national applications or a single international application under the Madrid Protocol designating those countries, which is why India acceded to the Protocol on 8 July 2013.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in28

Chapter Eight

Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, Layout Designs, Plant Varieties and Undisclosed Information

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Industrial designs protect how a thing looks, geographical indications protect where it comes from, layout designs protect the pattern etched on a chip, and plant varieties protect a new kind of seed; undisclosed information protects whatever you have managed to keep secret.

In exam wording: the remaining categories of intellectual property recognised in India are industrial designs under the Designs Act 2000, geographical indications under the Act of 1999, layout designs of semiconductor integrated circuits under the Act of 2000, plant varieties under the Act of 2001, and undisclosed information protected by the common law of confidence, each with its own subject matter, term and international instrument.

Industrial designs

What is protected. Section 2(d) of the Designs Act 2000 defines a design as the features of shape, configuration, pattern, ornament or composition of lines or colours applied to any article, in two or three dimensions, by any industrial process, being features that in the finished article appeal to and are judged solely by the eye.

The exclusions inside the definition matter more than the definition. A design does not include any mode or principle of construction, anything which is in substance a mere mechanical device, a trade mark, a property mark, or an artistic work under the Copyright Act.

Why "judged solely by the eye" is the key phrase. It draws the line against patents. Function belongs to the Patents Act; appearance belongs to the Designs Act; and a feature dictated solely by function is not a design at all.

Requirements. Novelty or originality, not previously published in India or elsewhere, and not contrary to public order or morality.

Term. Ten years from registration under section 11, extendable by five on application before expiry.

International instrument. The Hague Agreement, whose Geneva Act of 1999 allows one international application. India is not a party, and why not is a real question, worked in [The Hague Agreement and the Geneva Act 1999, Articles 1 to 18]. The Locarno Agreement 1968 supplies the classification.

A worked case. In Dhanpat Seth v. Nil Kamal Plastic Crates Ltd the plaintiffs held a patent, not a design registration, over a plastic version of the traditional kilta basket.

Facts. The kilta is a conical bamboo basket used in Himachal Pradesh from time immemorial for carrying produce. The plaintiffs made the same shape in polypropylene with adjustable nylon straps and buckles, obtained a patent, and sued a competitor whose crate was in high density polyethylene. The Division Bench inspected all three articles.

Held. The appeal against refusal of an interim injunction was dismissed. Changing the material from bamboo to a polymer was not an inventive step within section 2(1)(ja), the substitution of plastic for natural materials being long established; and section 3(p) of the Patents Act excludes an invention which in effect is traditional knowledge or an aggregation or duplication of known properties of traditionally known components. The judgment is at 2007 SCC OnLine HP 39; AIR 2008 HP 23.

munotes.in29

Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, Layout Designs, Plant Varieties and Undisclosed Information

Why it matters here. It shows the boundary between shape as function and shape as tradition, and it is the case that made the point that the Controller had not even put the traditional article before himself as a citation.

Geographical indications

What is protected. Section 2(1)(e) of the Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration and Protection) Act 1999: an indication which identifies goods as agricultural, natural or manufactured goods originating in a territory, region or locality, where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic is essentially attributable to that origin.

It is a collective right. There is no owner. An association of producers registers it, and any producer in the region who meets the specification may use it. This is what distinguishes it from every other category.

Two registers. Part A registers the geographical indication; Part B registers the authorised users.

Term. Ten years, renewable indefinitely.

Treaty basis. TRIPS Articles 22 to 24, with additional protection for wines and spirits in Article 23. The Lisbon Agreement 1958 and its Geneva Act 2015 provide international registration; India is not a party to either.

The first Indian registration was Darjeeling tea.

Layout designs of integrated circuits

What is protected. Section 2(1)(h) of the Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000: a layout design is a layout of transistors and other circuitry elements, including lead wires, expressed in any manner in a semiconductor integrated circuit.

Requirements. It must be original, not commercially exploited anywhere for more than two years, and inherently distinctive.

Term. Ten years from filing or first commercial exploitation, whichever is earlier. Not renewable.

Treaty basis. The Washington Treaty on Intellectual Property in Respect of Integrated Circuits 1989, which never came into force, and TRIPS Articles 35 to 38, which incorporated most of it by reference and made it binding anyway. MU has set integrated circuits as a whole question twice, and both chapters are in Modules II and III.

Plant varieties

What is protected. A variety that is new, distinct, uniform and stable, under the Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act 2001.

What makes the Indian Act unusual. It registers not only new varieties but extant varieties, farmers' varieties and essentially derived varieties, and Chapter VI confers farmers' rights, including the right to save, use, sow, resow, exchange and share farm saved seed. Section 39(1)(iv) protects that expressly.

Term. Fifteen years for annual crops, eighteen for trees and vines, in each case from registration.

munotes.in30

Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, Layout Designs, Plant Varieties and Undisclosed Information

Treaty basis. TRIPS Article 27.3(b), which permits exclusion of plants and animals from patentability provided varieties are protected by patents, by an effective sui generis system, or by a combination. India chose a sui generis system and did not join UPOV. Worked in [The Right to Food and Farmers' Rights].

Undisclosed information

What is protected. Information that is secret, has commercial value because it is secret, and has been the subject of reasonable steps to keep it secret. Those are the three conditions in TRIPS Article 39.2.

India has no statute. Protection comes from the equitable action for breach of confidence and from contract, and Indian courts have repeatedly granted injunctions on that basis.

Term. As long as the secret holds. There is no expiry, and no register, and disclosure destroys the right for ever.

Treaty basis. TRIPS Article 39, itself resting on Paris Article 10bis on unfair competition, worked in [TRIPS Article 39: Undisclosed Information].

Distinctions students lose marks on

DesignGeographical indicationLayout designPlant varietyUndisclosed information
Subject matterAppearance of an articleOrigin linked qualityCircuit topographyA plant varietySecret commercial information
OwnerThe registered proprietorNobody. It is collectiveThe registered creatorThe breeder, or a farmerThe holder
RegistrationCompulsoryCompulsoryCompulsoryCompulsoryNone possible
Indian term10 plus 5 years10 years, renewable10 years, no renewal15 or 18 yearsWhile secret
TreatyHague, Locarno, TRIPS 25 to 26Lisbon, TRIPS 22 to 24Washington, TRIPS 35 to 38UPOV, TRIPS 27.3(b)TRIPS 39

A worked example

A weavers' cooperative in a named region produces a distinctive silk sari.

The pattern woven into the cloth may be registered as a design under the Designs Act, 2000, for ten years extendable by five, if it is new or original and not dictated by function.

The name of the region, used for the sari, may be registered as a geographical indication under the 1999 Act, held by the cooperative as an association of producers, unassignable under section 24, and renewable indefinitely.

The drawing from which the pattern was made is an artistic work, but section 15(2) of the Copyright Act ends the copyright once the design has been applied to more than fifty articles by an industrial process without registration.

A distinctive mark applied to the finished sari may be registered as a trade mark, or as a collective mark under Chapter VIII.

And the plant from which the silk dye is extracted engages neither of these: access to it is governed by the Biological Diversity Act, and any new variety of the dye plant by the plant varieties Act.

Five regimes, one product, and each protects a different thing.

munotes.in31

Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, Layout Designs, Plant Varieties and Undisclosed Information

Quick revision

  • Design: appearance only, judged solely by the eye, section 2(d) Designs Act 2000; excludes any mode or principle of construction. 10 plus 5 years.
  • Geographical indication: quality essentially attributable to origin, section 2(1)(e) of the 1999 Act. Collective, no owner. Two part register. 10 years renewable. First Indian registration: Darjeeling tea.
  • Layout design: original, not exploited more than two years, inherently distinctive. 10 years, no renewal. Washington Treaty 1989 never came into force; TRIPS 35 to 38 carried it in.
  • Plant variety: new, distinct, uniform, stable. India also registers extant, farmers' and essentially derived varieties and confers farmers' rights in Chapter VI. 15 or 18 years.
  • Undisclosed information: TRIPS Article 39.2 three conditions, secret, commercially valuable because secret, reasonable steps taken. No Indian statute, no register, no expiry.
  • Dhanpat Seth v. Nil Kamal Plastic Crates Ltd: plastic version of a traditional kilta was not an inventive step and fell within section 3(p).

Test yourself

1. What distinguishes a geographical indication from every other intellectual property right? That it has no owner. Every other right in this subject vests in an identified proprietor who may exclude everybody else, assign the right and license it. A geographical indication vests in nobody. It is registered on the application of an association of persons, a producer, or an authority established by law representing the interest of the producers, and once registered any producer within the defined region whose goods meet the specification may apply to be entered on Part B of the register as an authorised user and may then use the indication. The right is therefore collective, and the correlative of that is that it cannot be assigned, transmitted, licensed, pledged or mortgaged, because there is nobody with the power to dispose of it. Two further consequences follow. The right is potentially perpetual, renewable every ten years, because the link between the goods and the place does not expire. And the enforcement interest is as much the public's as the producers', because the wrong done by a false indication is a deception of buyers about the geographical origin of what they are paying for.

2. Why did the Washington Treaty on Integrated Circuits matter even though it never came into force? Because TRIPS carried it in. The Treaty on Intellectual Property in Respect of Integrated Circuits was adopted at Washington on 26 May 1989 and never attracted the ratifications it needed, largely because the countries with the largest semiconductor industries were dissatisfied with its provisions on compulsory licensing and on innocent infringement. It would have been a dead letter but for Article 35 of TRIPS, which obliges members to provide protection in accordance with Articles 2 to 7 other than Article 6(3), Article 12 and Article 16(3) of that Treaty, and then adds in Articles 36 to 38 the further obligations that had been the sticking points. The effect is that the substance of a treaty that never entered into force binds every member of the World Trade Organization, and India gave effect to it in the Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000. It is the clearest illustration in this subject of what TRIPS did to the older treaty system: it took existing texts, incorporated them by reference, and attached to them an enforcement mechanism the original instruments never had.

munotes.in32

Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, Layout Designs, Plant Varieties and Undisclosed Information

3. India protects plant varieties but not by patents. Explain the choice and the statute that resulted. Article 27.3(b) of TRIPS permits a member to exclude from patentability plants and animals other than microorganisms, and essentially biological processes for their production, provided that the member protects plant varieties either by patents, or by an effective sui generis system, or by any combination of the two. India excluded them from patentability in section 3(j) of the Patents Act and chose the sui generis route, enacting the Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act 2001 rather than acceding to the International Convention for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants. The reason is the farmer. The 1991 Act of that Convention restricts what a farmer may do with saved seed and leaves the exception to each member's discretion, whereas Indian agriculture depends on farmers saving, exchanging and selling seed. So the Indian Act registers not only new varieties but extant varieties, farmers' varieties and essentially derived varieties; it treats a farmer who has conserved a landrace as a breeder entitled to registration; and Chapter VI confers farmers' rights, section 39(1)(iv) providing expressly that a farmer shall be deemed to be entitled to save, use, sow, resow, exchange, share or sell farm produce including seed of a protected variety, the only restriction being that the seed may not be sold in a branded package. Terms are fifteen years for annual crops and eighteen for trees and vines.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in33

Chapter Nine

Why the Law Protects Intellectual Creations

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

There are four classic arguments for intellectual property, and each of them has an objection that a good answer states.

In exam wording: the protection of intellectual property is justified on four grounds, the natural rights argument, the labour or desert argument derived from Locke, the personality argument derived from Hegel and Kant, and the utilitarian or incentive argument, of which the last is the ground on which most modern systems including India's actually rest.

Why the question is worth asking

Because nothing about intellectual property is inevitable. Land law exists everywhere because land is scarce everywhere. Patents exist because Parliaments passed Acts, and they could repeal them tomorrow.

Because the justification decides the shape of the right. A system built on the author's personality gives strong moral rights and a long term, which is the French and German pattern. A system built on incentive gives a term calculated to be just long enough, which is the American pattern. India has taken from both.

And because Module IV is an argument about the justification. A student who cannot state why the system exists cannot say what should be done when it collides with the right to health.

The four arguments

1. Natural rights

The claim. A person who creates something has a right to it in the nature of things, before and independently of any statute, and the law merely recognises what already exists.

Where it comes from. The French revolutionary decrees of 1791 and 1793 spoke of the author's property as the most sacred, the most personal of all properties. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights Article 27(2) carries an echo of it: everyone has the right to the protection of the moral and material interests resulting from any scientific, literary or artistic production of which he is the author.

The objection. It proves too much and too little. Too much, because a natural right would have no expiry, and every system limits the term. Too little, because it says nothing about how wide the right should be, and a right whose content the theory cannot specify is not doing much work.

2. Labour, or desert

The claim. John Locke argued that a person who mixes labour with something unowned acquires property in the result. Applied here: a person who labours to produce an invention or a book deserves the fruits.

The objection, and it is strong. Copyright does not reward labour: it rewards originality, and a phrase written in a second is protected while a decade of research producing an obvious result is not. Locke's own proviso required that enough and as good be left for others, and a patent on a basic research tool leaves nothing as good for anyone.

munotes.in34

Why the Law Protects Intellectual Creations

And ideas are not unowned in the Lockean sense. Every invention builds on what came before, so the labourer is mixing labour with a common stock that others also built.

3. Personality

The claim. Hegel and Kant, in different ways, treated property as an extension of the person's will into the world, and a created work as a particularly intimate extension.

What it explains. Moral rights. Berne Article 6bis gives the author the right to claim authorship and to object to distortion or mutilation prejudicial to honour or reputation, independently of the economic rights and even after they are transferred. Section 57 of the Indian Copyright Act says the same. No incentive argument explains why that right should survive the sale of the copyright.

The objection. It explains copyright far better than it explains patents, and it explains a novel far better than it explains a database or a corporate software product with two hundred authors.

4. Utility, or incentive

The claim. Without exclusivity, too little would be invented and written, because copiers would free ride and creators could not recover their investment. The right is a deliberate cost imposed on the public to buy a benefit for the public.

Where it is written down. The clearest statement in a legal text is Article 7 of TRIPS: the protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users, in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations. That is a utilitarian sentence and it is binding treaty text.

The objection. It is an empirical claim and the evidence is mixed. It is also self limiting: if the case rests on consequences, then where the consequences are bad the case fails, which is what the access to medicines argument says.

The Indian position

India's statutes are utilitarian in structure and personalist in one corner. Compulsory licensing, working requirements, the section 3(d) efficacy test and the farmers' rights chapter all treat the right as an instrument of policy. Section 57 moral rights and the 2012 royalty amendments treat the author as a person with an inalienable connection to the work.

The Supreme Court has put the utilitarian case in terms. In the Bayer compulsory licence case the Bombay High Court said in terms that the law of patent is a compromise between the interest of the inventor and the public, and that public interest is and should always be fundamental. That case is worked in [Compulsory Licensing in India].

A worked example

Suppose Parliament proposed to extend Indian copyright from life plus sixty to life plus a hundred and fifty years.

munotes.in35

Why the Law Protects Intellectual Creations

The natural rights argument would support it, because a natural right has no reason to end at all.

The labour argument would not, because no additional labour is performed by an author who has been dead for a century.

The personality argument would be indifferent, because the personality interest is protected by moral rights that already survive indefinitely under section 57.

The utilitarian argument would oppose it flatly, because nobody writes a book in 2026 because of royalties in 2200, so the extension buys no additional creation and costs the public a century of free access.

That is why the four arguments have to be stated separately. They do not give the same answer, and the examiner is asking which one the system actually runs on.

What it does NOT mean

These are not four ways of saying the same thing. They conflict, and the conflict is the point.

"Reasons for protecting" is not a list of the rights protected. MU's 2015 question has been answered badly for that reason.

The incentive argument is not proved. It is a policy hypothesis, adopted because the alternative is worse, and honest treatment says so.

Quick revision

  • Four justifications: natural rights; labour or desert (Locke); personality (Hegel, Kant); utility or incentive.
  • Natural rights: echoed in Article 27(2) of the Universal Declaration. Objection: a natural right would not expire, and every system limits the term.
  • Labour: objection is that copyright rewards originality and not effort, and Locke's own proviso required enough and as good to be left for others.
  • Personality: explains moral rights, Berne Article 6bis and Indian section 57, which no incentive theory explains.
  • Utility: stated in binding treaty text at TRIPS Article 7, which speaks of balance, mutual advantage and social and economic welfare.
  • India's statutes are structurally utilitarian with a personalist corner in section 57 and the 2012 royalty amendments.
  • Test the arguments by asking what each would say about extending the term: they disagree, and that is why they must be stated separately.

Test yourself

1. Set out the reasons for protecting intellectual property, and the objection to each. Four arguments are conventionally given. The natural rights argument holds that a creator has a right to the creation in the nature of things, which the law recognises rather than confers, an idea echoed in Article 27(2) of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights; the objection is that a natural right would not expire and every system in the world limits the term, and that the theory cannot say how wide the right should be. The labour or desert argument, derived from Locke, holds that a person who mixes labour with an unowned thing acquires property in the result; the objections are that copyright rewards originality rather than effort, so that a sentence written in a moment is protected while a decade of unoriginal research is not, that Locke's own proviso required enough and as good to be left for others, and that ideas are never unowned because every creation builds on a common stock. The personality argument, derived from Hegel and Kant, treats a work as an extension of the creator's will; it explains moral rights, which Berne Article 6bis and section 57 of the Indian Copyright Act confer independently of the economic rights, but it explains a novel far better than a corporate database. The utilitarian argument holds that exclusivity is a cost imposed on the public to buy the benefit of creations that would not otherwise be made; the objection is that it is an empirical claim whose evidence is mixed, and that it is self limiting, since a right whose justification is consequences must yield where the consequences are bad.

munotes.in36

Why the Law Protects Intellectual Creations

2. Which justification does the international system actually adopt? The utilitarian one, and it says so. Article 7 of the TRIPS Agreement, headed Objectives, provides that the protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users of technological knowledge and in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations. Every clause of that sentence is consequentialist: contribution, advantage, welfare, balance. Article 8, headed Principles, goes further and permits members to adopt measures necessary to protect public health and nutrition and to promote the public interest in sectors of vital importance to their socio economic and technological development. The Doha Declaration on the TRIPS Agreement and Public Health of 2001 then affirmed that the Agreement should be interpreted and implemented in a manner supportive of members' right to protect public health, and directed attention to Articles 7 and 8 in terms. There is a personalist strand as well, since Berne Article 6bis requires moral rights, although TRIPS Article 9.1 expressly excludes Article 6bis from the obligations it incorporates. But the architecture of the Agreement, and of Indian law under it, is utilitarian.

3. Why does the justification chosen affect the shape of the right? Because each justification answers differently the two questions every system has to settle, how long the right should last and how wide it should be. A natural rights or personality theory has no internal reason for the right to end, so systems built on it give long terms and strong inalienable moral rights, which is the continental European pattern of the author's right. A utilitarian theory measures the term against the incentive it buys, so it gives the shortest term that will produce the creation, and it treats the right as an instrument that may be limited whenever limiting it produces a better result, which is why compulsory licensing, working requirements, fair dealing and the exclusion of unpatentable subject matter all belong naturally to a utilitarian system. A labour theory would produce something different again, protecting effort rather than originality, which no actual system does. The practical way to see the difference is to test a proposed reform against each: a proposal to extend copyright from life plus sixty to life plus a hundred and fifty would be supported by a natural rights theory, unaffected by a personality theory, unsupported by a labour theory since a dead author performs no further labour, and flatly opposed by a utilitarian theory, because nobody writes in 2026 in the expectation of royalties in 2200 and the extension therefore buys no creation at all while costing the public a century of free access.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in37

Chapter Ten

The Need, the Growth and the Objectives of Intellectual Property Rights

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The need is economic, the growth is historical, and the objectives are what the statutes say they are; the question asks for all three in that order.

In exam wording: the need for intellectual property rights arises from the public good character of intangible creations; their growth traces from the Venetian and English statutes of the fifteenth and eighteenth centuries through the international conventions of the 1880s to the trade linked regime of 1994 and the digital and genetic resource treaties since; and their objectives, as stated in Article 7 of TRIPS, are the promotion of innovation, the transfer and dissemination of technology, mutual advantage and a balance of rights and obligations.

The need

Three propositions, and each can be shown rather than asserted.

1. Creations of the mind are public goods. They are non rival and non excludable, worked in [What Intellectual Property Is]. The market therefore under supplies them, because the creator bears the whole cost and captures only part of the benefit.

2. The cost of creating and the cost of copying have diverged, and keep diverging. In 1450 copying a book took a scribe a year. In 1500 it took a printer a week. In 2026 it takes a second. The cheaper copying gets, the sharper the problem becomes, and this is why every technological change produces new intellectual property law.

3. Modern economies trade in intangibles. A large part of the value of a modern company is not in its factories. India's software services exports, its pharmaceutical exports and its film industry all depend on rights that exist only because statutes create them.

The fourth reason is defensive, and it matters to India. Without a domestic system, Indian traditional knowledge and genetic resources were patented abroad by others, which is the biopiracy story worked in [Biopiracy: Turmeric, Neem, Basmati, and the Digital Library].

The growth

Stage one: the privileges. The Venetian Senate's decree of 1474 is the first general patent statute, offering ten years to the maker of any new and ingenious device. English monarchs granted patents of monopoly, abused them, and Parliament restrained the practice by the Statute of Monopolies 1624, whose section 6 preserved grants for the sole working of new manufactures for fourteen years.

Stage two: the statutes. The Statute of Anne 1710 gave authors, not printers, a term of copyright. The French decrees of 1791 and 1793 declared the author's right. The United States Constitution of 1787 gave Congress power to secure to authors and inventors, for limited times, the exclusive right to their writings and discoveries.

Stage three: the conventions. The Paris Convention of 1883 and the Berne Convention of 1886. Both were made because rights stopped at borders and trade did not. Their story is [Why an International System Became Necessary: Vienna, 1873].

munotes.in38

The Need, the Growth and the Objectives of Intellectual Property Rights

Stage four: the organisation. The two secretariats merged in 1893, became BIRPI, and became the World Intellectual Property Organization by the Convention of 1967, which came into force in 1970.

Stage five: trade linkage. The Uruguay Round of 1986 to 1994 produced the TRIPS Agreement, which for the first time attached minimum standards to a dispute settlement system with real consequences.

Stage six: the digital and genetic era. The WIPO Copyright Treaty and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty of 1996, the Beijing Treaty of 2012, the Marrakesh VIP Treaty of 2013, and the WIPO Treaty on Intellectual Property, Genetic Resources and Associated Traditional Knowledge of 2024.

India's own growth. The Indian Patents and Designs Act 1911, the Copyright Act 1957, the Patents Act 1970 which deliberately excluded product patents for medicines, the three amendments of 1999, 2002 and 2005 which restored them under TRIPS, and the four new statutes of 1999 to 2001.

The objectives

Stated in a binding text. TRIPS Article 7: the protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users of technological knowledge and in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations.

Five objectives are in that one sentence: innovation, transfer of technology, dissemination, mutual advantage, and balance.

Article 8 adds the principles: members may adopt measures necessary to protect public health and nutrition, and to promote the public interest in sectors of vital importance to their socio economic and technological development, provided the measures are consistent with the Agreement.

And the Indian statutes state their own. Section 83 of the Patents Act 1970 declares the general principles applicable to the working of patented inventions, including that patents are granted to encourage inventions and to secure that they are worked in India on a commercial scale, that they are not granted merely to enable patentees to enjoy a monopoly for the importation of the patented article, and that they should not in any way prohibit the Central Government from taking measures to protect public health.

A worked example: reading the growth backwards

Ask why India excluded product patents for medicines in 1970 and restored them in 2005.

1911 to 1970. The Indian Patents and Designs Act 1911 permitted product patents for medicines. By the 1950s more than eighty per cent of Indian patents were held by foreign companies and Indian drug prices were among the highest in the world.

The Ayyangar Committee reported in 1959 and recommended that product patents for medicines and food be abolished, leaving process patents only.

munotes.in39

The Need, the Growth and the Objectives of Intellectual Property Rights

The Patents Act 1970 did that in section 5. An Indian firm could not copy a patented process, but it could invent a different process to make the same molecule, and it did. The Indian generic industry grew out of that provision.

TRIPS Article 27.1 required patents in all fields of technology, which meant product patents for medicines. Section 5 was repealed with effect from 1 January 2005.

What India kept. Section 3(d), section 84 compulsory licensing, section 92 government use, section 107A parallel imports and the Bolar exception. Every one of them sits inside a flexibility TRIPS leaves open, and the whole of Modules III and IV is about how far those flexibilities go.

What it does NOT mean

"Growth" is not a list of dates. It is a sequence of problems and answers, and an answer that says what problem each stage solved is worth twice one that says what year it happened.

The objectives are not aspirations. Article 7 is treaty text, and the Doha Declaration directed that the Agreement be read in the light of it.

India did not resist patents. India resisted product patents for medicines and food for thirty five years, for a stated reason, and then complied.

Quick revision

  • The need: creations of the mind are public goods, non rival and non excludable; the gap between the cost of creating and the cost of copying keeps widening; modern economies trade in intangibles; and a country without a system finds its own knowledge patented elsewhere.
  • Growth in six stages: privileges (Venice 1474, Statute of Monopolies 1624); statutes (Statute of Anne 1710, French decrees 1791 and 1793); conventions (Paris 1883, Berne 1886); organisation (BIRPI, then WIPO 1967, in force 1970); trade linkage (TRIPS 1994); digital and genetic era (WCT and WPPT 1996, Beijing 2012, Marrakesh VIP 2013, GRATK 2024).
  • Objectives: TRIPS Article 7, five of them in one sentence, innovation, transfer, dissemination, mutual advantage, balance. Article 8 adds public health and nutrition.
  • India's own objectives are in section 83 of the Patents Act 1970, including working in India and not merely importing.
  • India's arc: 1911 product patents; 1970 section 5 abolished them for medicines and food on the Ayyangar Committee's recommendation; 2005 restored them under TRIPS Article 27.1, keeping sections 3(d), 84, 92, 107A.

Test yourself

1. Discuss the need for intellectual property rights. The need arises from an economic feature of the subject matter. Creations of the mind are public goods in the economist's sense: they are non rival, so that any number of people can use the same invention or work at once without any of them interfering with the others, and they are non excludable, so that once disclosed they are very difficult to keep others from using. A creator therefore bears the entire cost of creation and captures only a fraction of the benefit, and the market under supplies creation. The problem sharpens as technology advances, because the cost of creating has stayed high while the cost of copying has collapsed: a manuscript that took a scribe a year in 1450 took a printer a week by 1500 and takes a computer a second today, and every technological step of that kind has produced new intellectual property law. A third reason is that modern economies increasingly trade in intangibles rather than in goods, so that a large share of national income depends on rights that exist only because statutes create them, and India's software services, pharmaceutical and film industries are examples. A fourth reason is defensive and particularly Indian: a country without a functioning system and without a record of its own knowledge finds that knowledge patented abroad by others, which is what happened with turmeric, neem and basmati.

munotes.in40

The Need, the Growth and the Objectives of Intellectual Property Rights

2. Trace the growth of intellectual property rights. Six stages. First, the privileges: the Venetian decree of 1474, the first general patent statute, offering ten years to the maker of any new and ingenious device; and the English Statute of Monopolies 1624, whose section 6 preserved grants for the sole working of new manufactures for fourteen years while abolishing the rest. Second, the statutes conferring rights on creators rather than on printers or courtiers: the Statute of Anne 1710, the French decrees of 1791 and 1793, and the intellectual property clause of the United States Constitution of 1787. Third, the conventions, made because rights stopped at national borders while trade did not: the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property of 1883 and the Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works of 1886. Fourth, the organisation: the two convention secretariats merged in 1893, became known as BIRPI, and became the World Intellectual Property Organization under the Convention of 1967, in force in 1970. Fifth, trade linkage: the Uruguay Round of 1986 to 1994 produced the TRIPS Agreement, which attached minimum standards to the dispute settlement machinery of the World Trade Organization. Sixth, the digital and genetic era: the WIPO Copyright Treaty and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty of 1996, the Beijing Treaty of 2012, the Marrakesh VIP Treaty of 2013 and the WIPO GRATK Treaty of 2024.

3. What are the objectives of an intellectual property system, and where are they stated? They are stated in binding treaty text. Article 7 of TRIPS provides that the protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users of technological knowledge and in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations. Five objectives are contained in that single sentence: innovation, transfer of technology, dissemination, mutual advantage, and balance. Article 8 supplies the principles, permitting members to adopt measures necessary to protect public health and nutrition and to promote the public interest in sectors of vital importance to their socio economic and technological development, and to take appropriate measures to prevent the abuse of intellectual property rights by right holders, in each case provided the measures are consistent with the Agreement. Indian law states its own objectives too: section 83 of the Patents Act 1970 declares that patents are granted to encourage inventions and to secure that they are worked in India on a commercial scale, that they are not granted merely to enable patentees to enjoy a monopoly for the importation of the patented article, and that nothing in the Act shall prohibit the Central Government from taking measures to protect public health.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in41

Chapter Eleven

The Functions of an Intellectual Property System, and the Case Against It

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Intellectual property performs four economic functions, and there is a serious argument against each of them that a student should be able to state.

In exam wording: an intellectual property system performs the functions of incentivising creation, disclosing information, permitting the orderly transfer of technology and reducing consumer search costs, and the case against intellectual property, which is the standing criticism of intellectual property as an institution rather than of any particular rule in it, rests on the grounds that it creates deadweight loss, that it obstructs cumulative innovation, that its incentive effect is empirically unproven outside a few industries, and that it transfers wealth from countries that consume knowledge to countries that produce it.

The four functions

1. Incentive to create. The exclusive right lets a creator charge more than the cost of copying, and so recover the cost of creating. This is the function the whole system is built on.

2. Disclosure. A patent is granted only in exchange for a specification that enables a person skilled in the art to perform the invention, and that specification is published. Without patents, the rational strategy is secrecy, and secrecy teaches nobody. The disclosure function has no counterpart in copyright, which is why the terms differ so much.

3. Orderly transfer of technology. You cannot sell what you cannot own. A firm with knowledge and no factory and a firm with a factory and no knowledge can only make a deal if the knowledge can be defined, valued and transferred, and a patent is what makes that possible. This is why TRIPS Article 7 names transfer of technology as an objective.

4. Reduction of search costs. A trade mark tells a buyer whose goods these are, which saves the buyer from inspecting every product and lets a producer profit from quality. This function belongs to marks alone.

The four objections

1. Deadweight loss. Because the marginal cost of an extra copy is near zero, any price above near zero excludes some buyers who value the product more than it costs to supply them. Those transactions simply do not happen, and the loss is not transferred to anybody; it evaporates. The system deliberately accepts this loss in order to buy creation, and the whole argument is about whether the purchase is worth the price.

2. Obstruction of cumulative innovation. Every invention builds on earlier ones. If the earlier ones are patented, the later inventor needs licences, and where many patents cover one product the transaction costs can stop the product being made at all. This is the anticommons problem, and it is acute in biotechnology and telecommunications.

3. The incentive effect is not proved. The claim that patents increase innovation is an empirical claim. The evidence supports it strongly for pharmaceuticals, where copying is trivial and development is enormously expensive, and weakly or not at all for many other industries, where lead time, complexity and reputation do the work instead.

munotes.in42

The Functions of an Intellectual Property System, and the Case Against It

4. It transfers wealth across borders. A country that consumes more protected knowledge than it produces pays out more in royalties than it receives. In 1994 that described almost every developing country, and it is the reason the TRIPS negotiation was as hard as it was. This is worked in [The Uruguay Round 1986 to 1994, and Its Socio Legal Implications].

The four answers the system gives

The system does not ignore the objections. It answers each with a limitation.

Against deadweight loss: a limited term. The right expires and the loss stops.

Against the anticommons: compulsory licences and exceptions. TRIPS Article 30 permits limited exceptions and Article 31 permits use without authorisation. Section 84 of the Indian Patents Act is one answer and section 91 for dependent patents is another.

Against the unproven incentive: variable protection. Different terms and different tests for different subject matter, and exclusions for what does not need the incentive.

Against the wealth transfer: transitional periods and technology transfer obligations. TRIPS Articles 65, 66 and 67, worked in [TRIPS Articles 65 and 66: Transitional Arrangements].

A worked example

A company patents a gene sequence used as a diagnostic marker for a hereditary disease.

The incentive function is real. Finding the marker took years and money, and without a patent a competitor could offer the test immediately.

The disclosure function is real. The sequence and its association with the disease are published in the specification, and the world's researchers can read them.

The anticommons objection is also real. Any researcher who wants to develop a better test, or a test for several markers at once, now needs a licence, and if twenty markers are held by twelve companies the multi marker test may never be made.

The deadweight loss is real and measurable. The test costs very little to run and is priced far above that, so patients who would benefit go without.

Indian law answers by excluding. Section 3(j) of the Patents Act excludes plants and animals in whole or in part, and section 3(c) excludes the discovery of any living thing or non living substance occurring in nature, so a naturally occurring sequence is not patentable in India at all. That is a national policy choice inside TRIPS Article 27, and whether it is the right one is exactly the argument this chapter exists to let a student have.

What it does NOT mean

Criticising the system is not arguing for abolition. Almost nobody argues for that. The argument is about scope, term and exceptions.

munotes.in43

The Functions of an Intellectual Property System, and the Case Against It

"Deadweight loss" is not the same as "high prices". A high price that transfers money from buyer to seller is a transfer, not a loss. The loss is the transactions that never happen.

The objections are not anti Western or anti trade. Every one of them appears in the economic literature of the countries with the strongest systems.

Quick revision

  • Four functions: incentive to create; disclosure (patents only); orderly transfer of technology (TRIPS Article 7 names it); reduction of search costs (marks only).
  • Four objections: deadweight loss, because price above near zero marginal cost excludes willing buyers; anticommons, because cumulative innovation needs many licences; the incentive effect is unproven outside industries where copying is trivial and development costly; and it transfers wealth from knowledge importing to knowledge exporting countries.
  • Four answers: limited term; compulsory licences and exceptions (TRIPS Articles 30 and 31); variable protection by subject matter; transitional periods and technology transfer (TRIPS Articles 65, 66, 67).
  • India's answer to gene patents is exclusion: sections 3(c) and 3(j) of the Patents Act.
  • Criticism is about scope, term and exceptions, not about abolition.

Test yourself

1. What functions does an intellectual property system perform? Four. The incentive function: by allowing a creator to charge a price above the cost of copying, the right lets the creator recover the cost of creating, which the market would otherwise not permit because the subject matter is a public good. The disclosure function, which belongs to patents alone: a patent is granted only in exchange for a specification sufficient to enable a person skilled in the art to perform the invention, and that specification is published, so the alternative strategy of trade secrecy, which protects the holder but teaches nobody, is displaced. The transfer function: knowledge that cannot be owned cannot be sold, so a firm with knowledge and no manufacturing capacity and a firm with capacity and no knowledge can strike a bargain only if the knowledge is defined by claims, capable of valuation and capable of assignment or licence, which is why Article 7 of TRIPS names the transfer and dissemination of technology among the objectives of the system. And the search cost function, which belongs to trade marks alone: a mark identifies trade origin, so a buyer need not inspect each product and a producer can profit from maintaining quality.

2. State the principal criticisms of intellectual property and the answers the system gives. Four criticisms. Deadweight loss: because an additional copy costs almost nothing to make, any price above almost nothing excludes buyers who value the product more than the cost of supplying them, and those transactions simply do not occur, so the loss is not transferred to the right holder but destroyed. The anticommons: cumulative innovation requires the use of earlier work, and where many rights cover one product the cost of assembling licences can prevent the product being made at all, a problem acute in biotechnology and telecommunications. The unproven incentive: the claim that protection increases creation is empirical, and the evidence supports it strongly where copying is trivial and development expensive, as in pharmaceuticals, but weakly elsewhere, where lead time and complexity already provide protection. And the international wealth transfer: a country that consumes more protected knowledge than it produces pays more in royalties than it receives, which described almost every developing country in 1994. The system answers each with a limitation: the term is limited so the deadweight loss ends; exceptions and compulsory licensing under TRIPS Articles 30 and 31 answer the anticommons; protection is varied by subject matter, with different terms, tests and exclusions; and transitional periods and technology transfer obligations under TRIPS Articles 65, 66 and 67 answer the transfer of wealth.

munotes.in44

The Functions of an Intellectual Property System, and the Case Against It

3. Why is the gene patent example a good test of the whole argument? Because every function and every objection is present in one fact pattern and they point in opposite directions. The incentive function is genuinely engaged, since identifying the association between a sequence and a disease takes years and money and a competitor could offer the resulting test at once. The disclosure function is engaged, since the specification publishes the sequence and the association for the world's researchers to read. But the anticommons objection is equally engaged, because a researcher wishing to develop a better test, or a panel testing twenty markers at once, must now obtain licences from every holder, and where the markers are dispersed among many owners the improved test may never be made at all. And the deadweight loss is measurable rather than theoretical, since the marginal cost of running a diagnostic test is small and the price is set far above it, so patients who would benefit go without. Indian law resolves the conflict by exclusion rather than by balancing: section 3(c) of the Patents Act excludes the mere discovery of a living thing or non living substance occurring in nature, and section 3(j) excludes plants and animals in whole or in part, so a naturally occurring sequence is not patentable in India. That is a policy choice made inside the space Article 27 of TRIPS leaves open, and whether it is the right choice is precisely the argument the question invites.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in45

Chapter Twelve

Intellectual Property as an Asset and a Driver of Development

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Intellectual property is an asset in the ordinary commercial sense: it can be owned, valued, sold, licensed, mortgaged, taxed and put on a balance sheet, and in many modern firms it is worth more than everything physical they own.

In exam wording: intellectual property constitutes an intangible asset capable of independent valuation, transfer and encumbrance, whose contribution to economic development operates through four channels, the direct earning of licence revenue and exports, the attraction of foreign direct investment and technology transfer, the enabling of firm finance against intangible security, and the signalling of quality and origin that permits producers to capture the value of reputation.

Why the law has this at all

Because a right nobody can sell is not much use to a small creator. An inventor who cannot license the invention has to build a factory. An author who cannot assign the copyright has to become a publisher.

Transferability is what turns a right into an asset, and every intellectual property statute in India provides for it: section 68 of the Patents Act for assignment, section 19 of the Copyright Act, sections 37 to 45 of the Trade Marks Act.

Divisibility is what makes it flexible. The same patent can be licensed to one firm for India, another for Africa, a third for a different field of use, and mortgaged to a bank at the same time.

The four channels to development

1. Direct earnings. Royalties, licence fees and exports of protected goods and services. India's software and pharmaceutical exports are the clearest domestic example, and both depend on rights recognised in the importing country, which is why Module II exists.

2. Investment and technology transfer. A firm deciding where to manufacture asks whether its technology will be protected. TRIPS Article 7 names transfer of technology as an objective, and Article 66.2 obliges developed members to provide incentives for the transfer of technology to least developed members. Whether the obligation has produced anything is a fair question and the honest answer is very little.

3. Finance. Intangible assets can secure a loan. Section 68 assignments can be by way of mortgage; a trade mark can be charged; a film's future receipts can be assigned. In an economy where a software firm has no land, this can be the only security available.

4. Reputation and quality. A geographical indication lets producers in a region capture a premium that the region's reputation earns, which is the whole economic case for the Geographical Indications Act 1999 and for Darjeeling tea being registered as the first Indian indication.

How an intangible is valued

Three approaches, and an examiner is entitled to expect them named.

The cost approach asks what it cost to create the asset, or what it would cost to recreate it. Simple, and usually wrong, because cost has no necessary relation to value.

munotes.in46

Intellectual Property as an Asset and a Driver of Development

The market approach asks what comparable rights have sold for. Reliable when comparables exist, which for a patent is rarely.

The income approach asks what future income the right will produce, discounted to present value. This is the method actually used, and its two hard variables are the royalty rate and the discount rate.

A rule of thumb the profession uses, and it should be stated as a rule of thumb rather than as law, is the twenty five per cent rule: a licensee expects to keep about three quarters of the profit attributable to the licensed technology.

A worked example

Sanjay Bhat's firm in Coimbatore holds one patent on a water pump seal, a registered design for the pump housing, a trade mark, and a secret list of two hundred distributors.

The bank will not lend against the pump factory alone, which is leased.

Valuing the patent on the income approach. The pump sells 40,000 units a year. The seal permits a price 60 rupees higher than an unpatented pump, so the attributable profit is 24 lakh rupees a year. Twelve years of the patent term remain. Discounted at 15 per cent, the present value of that stream is roughly 1.3 crore rupees.

Valuing the trade mark. It has no term limit, so the stream is longer but the discount and the risk of the brand fading make the tail worth little; the practice is to value ten to fifteen years and add a terminal value.

Valuing the distributor list. Almost nothing on a balance sheet, because it can be destroyed by a single disclosure and cannot be insured against that.

What Sanjay actually does. He licenses the patent to a Gujarat manufacturer for a 5 per cent royalty on net sales, retains the trade mark, mortgages the patent to the bank subject to the licence, and keeps the list secret because registration would publish it.

One firm, four rights, four different commercial treatments. That is what "asset" means in this subject.

The evidence, stated honestly

The claim that intellectual property boosts development is contested. Cross country studies find a positive association between protection and growth in middle and high income countries and little or none in the poorest.

The mechanism matters more than the level. A strong system with no capacity to use it produces royalty outflows and nothing else, which is the argument developing countries made throughout the Uruguay Round.

India's own record supports a qualified answer. The generic pharmaceutical industry was built under a weak patent regime between 1970 and 2005 and now exports to more than two hundred countries; the software industry grew under copyright, which India already had.

munotes.in47

Intellectual Property as an Asset and a Driver of Development

What it does NOT mean

It does not mean stronger protection always produces more development. The relationship is not linear, and the evidence does not support the claim.

It does not mean an intellectual property right has an objective value. It has a value to a particular holder in a particular market at a particular time.

A trade secret is not a worthless asset. It is an unbankable one, which is different.

Quick revision

  • Intellectual property is an asset because it is transferable (section 68 Patents Act, section 19 Copyright Act, sections 37 to 45 Trade Marks Act) and divisible by territory, field and period.
  • Four channels to development: direct earnings and exports; investment and technology transfer (TRIPS Articles 7 and 66.2); finance, since intangibles can secure a loan; and reputation, which is the case for geographical indications.
  • Three valuation approaches: cost, market, income. The income approach is the one used; its variables are the royalty rate and the discount rate. The twenty five per cent rule is a rule of thumb, not law.
  • The evidence is mixed: a positive association in middle and high income countries, little in the poorest. Capacity matters more than the level of protection.
  • A trade secret is valuable but unbankable, because a single disclosure destroys it.

Test yourself

1. In what sense is intellectual property an asset? In the ordinary commercial sense: it can be owned, identified, valued, sold, licensed, mortgaged, inherited, taxed and recorded on a balance sheet. Two features of the statutes make this possible. Transferability, provided for by section 68 of the Patents Act 1970, section 19 of the Copyright Act 1957 and sections 37 to 45 of the Trade Marks Act 1999, each of which requires an assignment to be in writing because there is no delivery to mark the transfer. And divisibility, which allows one right to be split by territory, by field of use and by period, so that a single patent can be licensed exclusively to one firm for India, non exclusively to another for Africa, licensed for a different application to a third, and simultaneously mortgaged to a bank subject to those licences. That combination is what turns a legal power to exclude into a tradable asset, and it is the reason a small inventor need not build a factory and a small author need not become a publisher.

2. Through what channels does intellectual property contribute to economic development, and how strong is the evidence? Four channels. Direct earnings, through royalties, licence fees and exports of protected goods and services, of which India's software services and pharmaceutical exports are the domestic examples and both depend on recognition in the importing country. Investment and technology transfer, since a firm deciding where to manufacture asks whether its technology will be protected, and TRIPS names transfer of technology as an objective in Article 7 and obliges developed members to provide incentives for transfer to least developed members in Article 66.2. Finance, since intangible assets can secure lending in an economy where a knowledge firm may own no land. And reputation, since a geographical indication allows producers in a region to capture the premium their region's reputation earns, which is the economic case for the Geographical Indications Act 1999. The evidence is mixed and should be stated as such. Cross country studies find a positive association between the strength of protection and growth in middle and high income economies and little or none in the poorest, and the reason usually given is capacity: a strong system in an economy with little ability to generate protected subject matter produces royalty outflows and little else, which is the argument developing countries pressed throughout the Uruguay Round.

munotes.in48

Intellectual Property as an Asset and a Driver of Development

3. How is an intangible asset valued? By one of three approaches. The cost approach asks what the asset cost to create, or what it would cost to recreate, and is simple but usually misleading, because what something cost has no necessary relation to what it is worth. The market approach asks what comparable rights have changed hands for, and is reliable where comparables exist, which for trade marks in an active sector they sometimes do and for a specific patent they almost never do. The income approach asks what future income is attributable to the right and discounts it to present value, and this is the method actually used in practice. It has two difficult variables, the royalty rate that can be attributed to the right rather than to everything else the business does, and the discount rate that reflects the risk that the income will not arrive, including the risk that the right is invalidated. A rule of thumb widely used in negotiation, and it should be quoted as a rule of thumb rather than as law, is that a licensee expects to retain about three quarters of the profit attributable to the licensed technology, leaving about a quarter as the royalty. A trade mark presents an additional problem, because its term is indefinite, so practice values a defined period and adds a terminal value; and a trade secret presents the opposite problem, since a single disclosure destroys it entirely, which makes it valuable but very difficult to finance against.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in49

Chapter Thirteen

A Short History: Venice 1474 to the Statute of Anne

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Patents began as royal favours in fifteenth century Italy, copyright began as a printers' monopoly in England, trade marks began as guild marks, and each became a right of the creator only when a legislature said so.

In exam wording: the modern law of intellectual property developed from the Venetian patent decree of 1474 and the English Statute of Monopolies 1624 in the case of patents, from the Stationers' Company monopoly and the Statute of Anne 1710 in the case of copyright, and from mediaeval guild and merchants' marks in the case of trade marks, national systems being harmonised internationally only from 1883.

Patents

1421, Florence. Filippo Brunelleschi is granted a three year monopoly on a barge for carrying marble, on condition that he disclose how it worked. The bargain is already there.

1474, Venice. The Senate decrees that any person who makes a new and ingenious device in the city, reduced to perfection so that it can be used, shall register it and enjoy ten years of exclusivity. This is the first general patent statute: not a favour to one person but a rule for anyone.

Sixteenth century England. The Crown grants patents of monopoly, and abuses them, granting monopolies over salt, starch and playing cards to courtiers. Darcy v Allein in 1602 held a monopoly on playing cards void at common law.

1624, the Statute of Monopolies. Parliament declares monopolies void, but section 6 preserves grants of the sole working of any manner of new manufactures to the true and first inventor, for fourteen years. Fourteen was two apprenticeship terms, so that a monopolist could train two generations of apprentices before the monopoly ended.

1856, India. The first Indian patent legislation, Act VI of 1856, based on the British Act of 1852.

Copyright

1440s, printing. Before movable type there was no copying problem worth legislating about, because copying was as slow as writing.

1557, the Stationers' Company. The English Crown grants the London printers a monopoly on printing in exchange for censorship. The right belonged to the printer, not the author, and it was perpetual.

1710, the Statute of Anne. "An Act for the Encouragement of Learning, by Vesting the Copies of Printed Books in the Authors or Purchasers of such Copies". Two things are new: the author is the first owner, and the term is limited, fourteen years renewable once.

1774, Donaldson v Becket. The House of Lords holds there is no perpetual common law copyright in a published work. The public domain is created.

1791 and 1793, France. The revolutionary decrees on performance and reproduction rights, expressed as the author's property.

1847 and 1914, India. The Indian Copyright Act 1847, then the Act of 1914 applying the British Act of 1911, then the Copyright Act 1957.

munotes.in50

A Short History: Venice 1474 to the Statute of Anne

Trade marks

Marks are older than any of this. Potters' marks, masons' marks and guild marks are found in antiquity, but they were obligations rather than rights: the guild required the mark so that a defective article could be traced to its maker.

The turn to a right. English courts protected marks first as a fraud on the buyer and then, in the nineteenth century, as property in goodwill. Registration arrived with the Trade Marks Registration Act 1875.

1940, India. The Trade Marks Act 1940, replaced by the Trade and Merchandise Marks Act 1958 and then the Trade Marks Act 1999.

Designs and the rest

1787, England. The Designing and Printing of Linens Act, protecting textile patterns. Design law begins in the textile trade and its vocabulary still shows it.

1911, India. The Indian Patents and Designs Act 1911, which governed both until 1970 and 2000 respectively.

Geographical indications, layout designs and plant varieties are all twentieth century, and in India all three arrived in 1999 to 2001 because of TRIPS.

Three lessons the history teaches

1. Every right began as somebody else's monopoly and was turned into the creator's right by statute. The printer became the author; the courtier became the inventor.

2. Every extension followed a technology. Printing produced copyright; photography, sound recording, broadcasting, cable, satellite and the internet each produced a new right or a new treaty. The Brussels Satellite Convention 1974 exists because satellites did.

3. National law came first and international law followed, always. Paris in 1883 harmonised systems that already existed in most industrial countries. This is why the conventions are drafted as minimum standards with national treatment rather than as a code.

A worked example

Why is a patent term twenty years and a copyright term life plus sixty?

The patent term descends from fourteen years in 1624, which was two apprenticeship terms. It became sixteen in Britain, then twenty in most systems by the 1970s, and TRIPS Article 33 fixed twenty from filing for every member.

The copyright term descends from fourteen years renewable once in 1710. It grew to life plus fifty at Berlin in 1908, which Berne Article 7 still sets as the floor, and India gives life plus sixty.

Neither number was calculated. Both are historical accidents that hardened into treaty obligations, and saying so is a legitimate criticism in an answer on the objectives of the system.

What it does NOT mean

The history is not decoration. A candidate asked about the growth of intellectual property rights is being asked for this.

Venice 1474 was not the first patent. It was the first general patent statute. Individual privileges are older.

munotes.in51

A Short History: Venice 1474 to the Statute of Anne

The Statute of Anne did not create copyright. It transferred an existing monopoly from printers to authors and limited it in time, which is a different and more interesting thing.

Quick revision

  • Patents: Brunelleschi's privilege, Florence 1421; the Venetian decree of 1474, the first general patent statute, ten years; Darcy v Allein 1602; the Statute of Monopolies 1624, section 6, fourteen years for the true and first inventor of a new manufacture; India, Act VI of 1856.
  • Copyright: the Stationers' Company monopoly 1557, perpetual and vested in printers; the Statute of Anne 1710, which vested it in authors for a limited term; Donaldson v Becket 1774, no perpetual common law copyright; French decrees 1791 and 1793; India, 1847, 1914, 1957.
  • Trade marks: guild marks were obligations, not rights; protection moved from fraud to property in goodwill; registration from 1875; India 1940, 1958, 1999.
  • Designs: the Designing and Printing of Linens Act 1787; India, the Patents and Designs Act 1911.
  • Three lessons: every right began as somebody else's monopoly; every extension followed a technology; national law always came first and the conventions harmonised it.
  • Terms are historical accidents: fourteen years in 1624 became twenty in TRIPS Article 33; fourteen renewable in 1710 became life plus fifty at Berlin in 1908.

Test yourself

1. Trace the origin of the patent system. It begins with individual privileges rather than with a general law. In 1421 Florence granted Filippo Brunelleschi a three year monopoly over a barge for carrying marble, on condition that he disclose how it worked, so the disclosure bargain is present at the outset. The first general statute is the Venetian decree of 1474, under which any person who made in the city a new and ingenious device, reduced to perfection so that it could be used, was to register it and enjoy ten years of exclusivity; what makes it general is that it laid down a rule for anyone rather than granting a favour to one person. In sixteenth century England the Crown granted patents of monopoly over ordinary commodities such as salt, starch and playing cards, and the courts began to strike them down, holding a monopoly on playing cards void at common law in 1602. Parliament then intervened by the Statute of Monopolies 1624, which declared monopolies generally void but preserved in section 6 grants of the sole working of any manner of new manufactures to the true and first inventor for a term of fourteen years, a figure chosen because it was two apprenticeship terms. Indian patent legislation begins with Act VI of 1856, modelled on the British Act of 1852.

munotes.in52

A Short History: Venice 1474 to the Statute of Anne

2. How did copyright come to belong to authors? By statute, and comparatively late. Before printing there was no copying problem worth legislating about, because copying a manuscript was as slow as writing one. Printing created the problem, and the English answer in 1557 was to grant the Stationers' Company of London printers a monopoly over printing in return for their assistance with censorship. That monopoly was perpetual and it belonged to the printer, not to the author, who had no right at all. The Statute of Anne 1710 changed both features at once. Its long title announced an Act for the encouragement of learning, by vesting the copies of printed books in the authors or purchasers of such copies, so the author became the first owner; and it fixed a term of fourteen years, renewable once for a further fourteen if the author survived, so the right became limited in time. The Stationers argued that a perpetual common law copyright survived the statute, and the House of Lords rejected that in 1774, which is the decision that created the public domain. The French revolutionary decrees of 1791 and 1793 expressed the same right in the language of the author's property, and it is from that tradition that moral rights descend.

3. What does the history teach about how intellectual property law develops? Three things. First, that every right began as somebody else's monopoly and became the creator's right only when a legislature said so: the printer's perpetual privilege became the author's limited copyright in 1710, and the courtier's patent of monopoly became the inventor's fourteen year grant in 1624. That matters because it shows the right is a policy instrument and not a recognition of anything natural. Second, that every extension of the law followed a technology. Printing produced copyright; photography, sound recording, broadcasting, cable and satellite transmission and the internet each produced a new right, a new category or a new treaty, and the Brussels Convention of 1974 exists because satellites did. That explains why the treaty list keeps growing and why the newest instruments concern digital transmission and genetic resources. Third, that national law came first in every case and international law followed. The Paris and Berne Conventions of 1883 and 1886 harmonised systems that already existed in most industrial countries, which is why they are drafted as minimum standards resting on national treatment rather than as a uniform code, and it is why an examiner asking about the international system expects a candidate to know what the national systems looked like before it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in53

Chapter Fourteen

The International Character of Intellectual Property Rights

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Intellectual property rights are national, and everything international about them exists because that fact is inconvenient.

In exam wording: the international character of intellectual property rights denotes the tension between the strictly territorial nature of rights created by national statute and the international movement of goods, services, works and information, a tension resolved not by any world right but by a network of treaties resting on national treatment, minimum standards, priority and international registration procedures.

Why the question is asked

Because the phrase looks like it means the opposite of what it means. A student who reads "international character" as "these rights are international" has already gone wrong. The rights are the least international thing in the subject.

The right answer has two halves. First, why they are not international. Second, what has been built because they are not.

Half one: rights are territorial

A patent granted by the Indian Controller is effective in India. It confers nothing anywhere else. There is no world patent, no world copyright and no world trade mark, and every treaty in Module II says so or assumes it.

Three reasons.

Sovereignty. A right to exclude is an exercise of state power, and no state accepts another's exercise of it inside its own territory.

Different policy choices. Section 3(d) of the Indian Patents Act refuses patents that many countries grant, deliberately. If rights were universal, that choice would be impossible.

Different procedures. Examination standards, opposition systems and evidence rules differ, and a right granted under one cannot simply be honoured under another.

Two consequences follow, and both are examinable.

Independence of rights. Paris Article 4bis provides that patents applied for in different countries of the Union shall be independent of the patents obtained for the same invention in other countries; revocation in one has no effect in another. Paris Article 6(3) says the same for marks.

No universality of reputation. A mark famous everywhere is not for that reason protected in India. That is what the Supreme Court held in the Prius case, worked in [Territoriality and the Independence of Rights].

Half two: what has been built because of it

Five devices, and every treaty in Module II uses one or more.

1. National treatment. Each country must give foreigners from other member countries the same protection it gives its own nationals. Paris Article 2, Berne Article 5(1), TRIPS Article 3. It does not harmonise anything; it only forbids discrimination.

2. Minimum standards. Because national treatment alone would let a country give everybody nothing, the conventions add floors: Berne's life plus fifty in Article 7, TRIPS's twenty year patent term in Article 33.

3. Right of priority. Paris Article 4 lets an applicant who files in one country file in others within twelve months for patents, six for marks and designs, and be treated as though filed on the first date. It does not create a right; it buys time.

munotes.in54

The International Character of Intellectual Property Rights

4. International filing and registration systems. One application producing effects in many countries: the Patent Cooperation Treaty for patents, the Madrid system for marks, the Hague system for designs, the Lisbon system for appellations of origin. None of them grants a right; they administer applications and registrations that remain national in effect.

5. Most favoured nation. New with TRIPS Article 4: any advantage granted to the nationals of one member must be granted to those of all. This had never appeared in an intellectual property treaty before 1994.

A worked example

Rashmi Nair invents a low cost water filter in Kochi and wants protection in India, Kenya, Germany and the United States.

There is no way to get one right covering all four. That is the whole point.

Day 0. She files in India. That is her priority date.

Within twelve months she must either file in the other three, using the Paris Article 4 priority, or file a PCT international application designating them, which extends her decision point to thirty months.

Each country then examines under its own law. Germany refuses on obviousness; Kenya grants; the United States grants with narrower claims; India grants. Four different outcomes on one invention, and Paris Article 4bis says that is exactly right.

Her German refusal does not affect her Indian patent, and her Indian patent does not help her in Germany.

If she also wants a trade mark, one Madrid Protocol application designating the three countries does the work of three, but each designated office may still refuse within eighteen months, and if it does she has a national refusal to fight.

The exceptions that prove the rule

Copyright looks universal but is not. Berne Article 5(1) gives an author in one Union country the rights that country's own nationals get in every other Union country, automatically and with no formality, so copyright behaves as though it were universal. But it is still a bundle of national rights, and Article 5(2) says the extent of protection and the means of redress are governed exclusively by the law of the country where protection is claimed.

Regional rights are a real exception. The European Union trade mark and registered Community design are single rights covering many states. There is no Indian equivalent, and no Asian one.

What it does NOT mean

It does not mean there is an international intellectual property right. There is not one.

It does not mean treaties create rights for individuals. They oblige states, and the individual's right comes from the national statute passed to comply.

munotes.in55

The International Character of Intellectual Property Rights

It does not mean an international registration is an international right. A Madrid international registration is a bundle of national protections administered from Geneva.

Quick revision

  • The international character is the TENSION, not a claim that rights are international. Rights are strictly territorial.
  • Three reasons: sovereignty, different policy choices, different procedures.
  • Two consequences: independence of rights (Paris Article 4bis for patents, Article 6(3) for marks) and no universality of reputation.
  • Five devices built in answer: national treatment (Paris 2, Berne 5(1), TRIPS 3); minimum standards (Berne 7, TRIPS 33); right of priority (Paris 4, twelve months for patents, six for marks and designs); international filing systems (PCT, Madrid, Hague, Lisbon), none of which grants a right; and most favoured nation (TRIPS 4), new in 1994.
  • Berne Article 5(1) makes copyright behave as though universal, but Article 5(2) keeps the extent of protection and the remedies national.
  • Regional unitary rights exist in the European Union and have no Indian counterpart.

Test yourself

1. What is meant by the international character of intellectual property rights? Not that the rights are international, which they are not, but that a strictly national right has to operate in a world of international trade, and that the whole treaty system exists to manage the resulting tension. Every intellectual property right is created by a national statute and is effective only within that statute's territory: an Indian patent confers nothing in Germany, and there is no world patent, world copyright or world trade mark. Three reasons make this so. A right to exclude is an exercise of sovereign power, and no state accepts another's exercise of it within its own borders. States make deliberately different policy choices, so that section 3(d) of the Indian Patents Act refuses patents that other jurisdictions grant, and universality would make that choice impossible. And procedures differ, in examination standards, opposition systems and evidence, so a right granted under one system cannot simply be honoured under another. Two doctrines follow directly: the independence of rights, stated in Article 4bis of the Paris Convention for patents and Article 6(3) for marks, under which revocation in one country has no effect elsewhere; and the absence of any universality of reputation, so that a mark famous throughout the world is not for that reason protected in India.

2. What devices has the international system built to answer territoriality? Five. National treatment, under which each member must give the nationals of other members the protection it gives its own, stated in Paris Article 2, Berne Article 5(1) and TRIPS Article 3; it forbids discrimination but harmonises nothing, so a country giving its own nationals very little satisfies it by giving foreigners very little. Minimum standards, added because of that weakness, such as the life plus fifty term in Berne Article 7 and the twenty year patent term in TRIPS Article 33. The right of priority in Paris Article 4, under which an applicant who files in one member country may file in others within twelve months for patents and utility models and six months for marks and industrial designs and be treated as having filed on the first date; it creates no right and buys time. International filing and registration systems, the Patent Cooperation Treaty for patents, the Madrid Agreement and Protocol for marks, the Hague system for designs and the Lisbon system for appellations of origin, each of which allows one application to produce effects in many countries while the resulting rights remain national. And most favoured nation treatment in TRIPS Article 4, which requires that any advantage granted to the nationals of one member be granted to those of all, and which had never appeared in an intellectual property treaty before 1994.

munotes.in56

The International Character of Intellectual Property Rights

3. Copyright appears to be universal. Explain why it is not. Because what Berne creates is automatic protection in each country under that country's law, not a single right. Article 5(1) provides that authors enjoy, in countries of the Union other than the country of origin, the rights which those countries' laws grant to their own nationals, together with the rights specially granted by the Convention, and Article 5(2) adds that the enjoyment and exercise of those rights are subject to no formality. The practical effect is that an Indian author has protection in every one of the other Union countries from the moment of creation, without registration, deposit or notice, and no other category of intellectual property behaves like that. But the second sentence of Article 5(2) is decisive: apart from the provisions of the Convention itself, the extent of protection and the means of redress afforded to the author are governed exclusively by the laws of the country where protection is claimed. So the term, the exceptions, the remedies and the procedure are the local ones, and an author suing in Germany sues under German law for a German right. What Berne produces is therefore a bundle of national rights that arise simultaneously and automatically, which is a very good imitation of universality and is not the same thing.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in57

Chapter Fifteen

Territoriality and the Independence of Rights

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A right exists only where its statute runs, and a right granted in one country stands or falls on its own without regard to what happened to the same invention or mark anywhere else.

In exam wording: the principle of territoriality provides that an intellectual property right created by the law of a state exists and is enforceable only within that state's territory; the principle of independence, expressed in Article 4bis and Article 6(3) of the Paris Convention, provides that rights obtained in different countries for the same subject matter are independent of one another in grant, validity and duration.

Territoriality

The rule. The existence, scope, validity and remedies for an intellectual property right are governed by the law of the country for which protection is claimed. Lawyers call this the lex loci protectionis, the law of the place of protection.

Berne says it in terms. Article 5(2): apart from the provisions of the Convention, the extent of protection and the means of redress afforded to the author to protect his rights shall be governed exclusively by the laws of the country where protection is claimed.

What follows for a litigant. An Indian court applies Indian law to decide whether an Indian right is infringed in India. It does not decide whether a German patent is valid, and it does not grant relief for acts done in Germany.

Independence

Paris Article 4bis(1): patents applied for in the various countries of the Union by nationals of countries of the Union shall be independent of patents obtained for the same invention in other countries, whether members of the Union or not.

Article 4bis(2) spells out the consequence: independence means without any limitation, particularly in the sense that patents applied for during the period of priority are independent as regards the grounds of nullity and forfeiture, and as regards their normal duration.

Paris Article 6(1) and 6(3) do the same for marks: the conditions for filing and registration are determined by domestic law, and a mark duly registered in one country of the Union is independent of marks registered in other countries, including the country of origin.

The one qualification is Article 6quinquies, the "telle quelle" rule: a mark duly registered in the country of origin shall be accepted for filing and protected as is in other countries of the Union, subject to stated exceptions. That is a limited exception to independence and it is the provision the plain packaging complainants tried to use against Australia.

Why the two principles are not the same thing

Territoriality is about where a right operates. Independence is about whether one right's fate affects another's.

A system could be territorial without being independent. It could provide that a patent revoked in its country of origin lapses everywhere. Paris deliberately says it does not, and the reason is in the history: before 1883 some countries did make the local patent depend on the foreign one, and inventors lost rights through foreign accidents they could not control.

munotes.in58

Territoriality and the Independence of Rights

The worked case

The case is Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha v. Prius Auto Industries Ltd.

Facts. Toyota launched its Prius hybrid car in Japan in 1997 and the mark became known in many countries. It did not sell the car in India until 2010. In 2001 Prius Auto Industries, an Indian maker of car spare parts, adopted the mark PRIUS, and registered it in India in 2002 to 2003. Toyota sued for passing off, relying on the worldwide reputation of the mark, and applied for Indian registration only later and on a proposed to be used basis. The reported citation is (2018) 2 SCC 1; AIR 2018 SC 167.

Held. Toyota's appeals were dismissed. At paragraph 28 the Court held that the overwhelming judicial and academic opinion across the world favours the territoriality principle over the universality doctrine, and that there is no reason why the same should not apply in India. To succeed the claimant must show a spill over of reputation and goodwill into the Indian market, and the Court found that all Toyota's evidence of Indian reputation post dated April 2001, when the defendants adopted the mark.

Why it matters. It is the modern Indian statement of the principle on which the entire Module II treaty system rests. It also draws the line against the other Indian authority on the same principle.

That case is N.R. Dongre v. Whirlpool Corporation, in which an American proprietor whose Indian registration had lapsed obtained an injunction because it could prove that its advertising circulated in India and had produced Indian reputation.

Facts. Whirlpool Corporation had advertised in magazines circulating in India but its Indian registration had lapsed. The defendants registered WHIRLPOOL in India and sold washing machines under it. Whirlpool sued in passing off and obtained an interlocutory injunction, affirmed on appeal. The citation is (1996) 5 SCC 714.

Held. The appeal was dismissed with costs. A passing off action rests on a common law right distinct from the statutory right of a registered proprietor, so an injunction may be granted in an appropriate case even against the owner of a registered mark, and on the material the grant of the interlocutory injunction was a proper exercise of discretion.

The two cases together are the whole doctrine. Reputation abroad is not enough; reputation that has spilled over into India is. Territoriality is not a rule about advertising budgets, it is a rule about where the goodwill actually is.

munotes.in59

Territoriality and the Independence of Rights

A worked example

Hemant Rao holds an Indian patent and a corresponding European patent on a solar inverter.

A German court revokes the European patent for obviousness. His Indian patent is unaffected. Paris Article 4bis(2) says so in terms, and an Indian court would not treat the German judgment as determining Indian validity.

The Indian Controller may nevertheless look at the German decision as evidence. Section 8 of the Patents Act requires an applicant to keep the Controller informed about corresponding foreign applications, and the prior art relied on in Germany can be put before an Indian court. Independence is about legal effect, not about evidence.

Hemant's Indian patent expires twenty years from his Indian filing date, and the German one from its own filing, and they may differ. Article 4bis(2) mentions duration expressly for that reason.

What it does NOT mean

Territoriality does not mean foreign judgments are irrelevant. They have no binding effect and considerable persuasive value.

Independence does not apply to copyright in the same way. Berne makes protection automatic in every Union country, so the rights arise together; but Article 5(2) still makes their content national.

Territoriality is not a defence to infringement of an Indian right by imports. Importing infringes under section 48 of the Patents Act, and the exhaustion question in section 107A(b) is a separate one.

Quick revision

  • Territoriality: existence, scope, validity and remedies are governed by the law of the country where protection is claimed (lex loci protectionis). Berne Article 5(2) states it.
  • Independence: Paris Article 4bis(1) and (2) for patents, covering nullity, forfeiture and duration; Paris Article 6(1) and 6(3) for marks.
  • The qualification is Paris Article 6quinquies, the telle quelle rule for a mark duly registered in its country of origin.
  • Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha v. Prius Auto Industries Ltd: territoriality, not universality; a claimant must prove spill over of reputation into India before the defendant's adoption.
  • N.R. Dongre v. Whirlpool Corporation: spill over proved, so an injunction issued in passing off even against a registered proprietor.
  • Independence is about legal effect, not evidence: section 8 of the Patents Act still requires disclosure of corresponding foreign applications.

Test yourself

1. State and explain the principles of territoriality and independence. Territoriality is the principle that an intellectual property right exists only under the law that created it and only within that law's territory, so that its existence, its scope, its validity and the remedies for its infringement are all governed by the law of the country for which protection is claimed. Article 5(2) of the Berne Convention states it for copyright: apart from the provisions of the Convention itself, the extent of protection and the means of redress afforded to the author are governed exclusively by the laws of the country where protection is claimed. Independence is a different principle, addressed to what happens when the same subject matter is protected in several countries at once. Article 4bis(1) of the Paris Convention provides that patents applied for in the various countries of the Union shall be independent of patents obtained for the same invention in other countries, whether or not those countries are members of the Union, and Article 4bis(2) adds that the independence is without limitation, particularly as regards the grounds of nullity and forfeiture and as regards normal duration. Article 6(1) and 6(3) do the same for marks. The two principles are distinct: territoriality says where a right operates, independence says that one right's fate does not determine another's, and a system could be territorial without being independent, as some were before 1883, with the result that inventors lost domestic rights through foreign accidents.

munotes.in60

Territoriality and the Independence of Rights

2. Work the Prius case and explain what it decided. Toyota launched the Prius hybrid in Japan in 1997 and the mark became known in many markets, but Toyota did not sell the car in India until 2010 and applied for Indian registration only later, on a proposed to be used basis. In 2001 an Indian manufacturer of automobile spare parts adopted PRIUS as its mark and obtained Indian registration in 2002 to 2003. Toyota sued in passing off relying on the worldwide reputation of the mark. The Supreme Court dismissed Toyota's appeals, holding at paragraph 28 that the overwhelming judicial and academic opinion across the world favours the territoriality principle rather than the universality doctrine, and that the same must apply in India. The consequence is that a claimant relying on foreign reputation must prove a spill over of that reputation and goodwill into the Indian market, and must prove it as at the date the defendant adopted the mark. Toyota's evidence of reputation in India all post dated April 2001, so the claim failed. The reported citation is (2018) 2 SCC 1. The decision matters because it is the modern Indian statement of the very principle on which the international treaty system rests, and because it draws the line against the earlier authority in the Whirlpool case, where an American proprietor whose Indian registration had lapsed did obtain an injunction, its advertising having circulated in India and produced Indian reputation.

3. A German court revokes the European counterpart of an Indian patent. What follows in India? Nothing follows as a matter of law. Article 4bis(2) of the Paris Convention provides that patents applied for in different countries are independent as regards the grounds of nullity and forfeiture, so the German revocation does not invalidate the Indian patent, does not bind an Indian court and does not oblige the Indian Controller to do anything. The Indian patent continues in force until it is separately revoked under section 64 of the Patents Act 1970 or lapses for non payment of renewal fees, and its term runs twenty years from the Indian filing date under section 53, which may differ from the German term because Article 4bis(2) mentions normal duration expressly. What does follow is evidential rather than legal. Section 8 of the Patents Act requires an applicant to keep the Controller informed of corresponding applications filed outside India and of their prosecution, and the prior art on which the German court proceeded is available to be put before the Indian Controller or an Indian court in a revocation proceeding or a counter claim. So the German decision has no binding effect and may have considerable persuasive weight, and the distinction between legal effect and evidence is where candidates most often go wrong.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in61

Chapter Sixteen

Acquiring an Intellectual Property Right

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Getting an intellectual property right means filing, being examined, surviving opposition and being granted, except for copyright, where it means writing something down.

In exam wording: the acquisition of rights in intellectual property denotes the procedures by which a right comes into existence, comprising for registrable rights application and examination, both formal and substantive, followed by publication, opposition and grant or registration, and for copyright and unregistered marks the occurrence of the facts that give rise to the right, the whole being governed internationally by Article 62 of TRIPS.

Why the law has this at all

Because a right to exclude the world needs to be knowable by the world. A competitor deciding whether to enter a market must be able to find out what is protected, by whom, and until when. That is what a register is for.

And because a monopoly should not be granted carelessly. Examination exists to keep out inventions that are not new, and opposition exists because the patent office cannot know everything the industry knows.

Copyright is the exception and it proves the point. Berne Article 5(2) forbids formalities, so there is no register, and the price is that ownership and subsistence are frequently disputed in litigation instead.

The stages, for a patent

1. The application. A provisional or complete specification under section 7 of the Patents Act. The date of filing is the priority date, which fixes what counts as prior art.

2. Publication. Section 11A: after eighteen months from the priority date the application is published. This is not optional and it is what makes the disclosure bargain real.

3. Request for examination. Section 11B. In India examination happens only on request, within the prescribed period, and if no request is made the application is deemed withdrawn.

4. Examination and objections. The examiner searches the prior art and issues a first examination report. The applicant amends and answers.

5. Pre grant opposition. Section 25(1): any person may oppose before grant, on eleven grounds.

6. Grant and sealing. The patent is granted and entered in the Register of Patents.

7. Post grant opposition. Section 25(2): any interested person may oppose within twelve months of publication of grant.

The stages, for a trade mark

Application, examination for absolute grounds under section 9 and relative grounds under section 11, publication in the Trade Marks Journal, opposition within four months under section 21, and registration under section 23.

The stages, for a design and a geographical indication

A design is examined for novelty and for whether it is a design at all, but not for inventiveness, and there is no pre registration opposition; cancellation under section 19 comes afterwards.

A geographical indication is examined, published, opposed within three months under section 14, and registered in Part A, with authorised users entered in Part B.

munotes.in62

Acquiring an Intellectual Property Right

What TRIPS requires

Article 62 is the international rule and it has five paragraphs.

62.1 permits members to require compliance with reasonable procedures and formalities as a condition of acquisition or maintenance.

62.2 is the substantive discipline: where acquisition is subject to grant or registration, members shall ensure that the procedures permit granting or registration within a reasonable period of time so as to avoid unwarranted curtailment of the period of protection. This matters because a patent term runs from filing, so examination backlog is protection lost.

62.3 applies Paris Article 4, the right of priority, mutatis mutandis to service marks, which Paris itself does not cover.

62.4 requires acquisition and maintenance procedures, and administrative revocation and inter partes procedures such as opposition, revocation and cancellation, to be governed by the general principles of Article 41.2 and 41.3: fair, equitable, not unnecessarily complicated or costly, and decided in writing on the evidence.

62.5 requires final administrative decisions to be subject to review by a judicial or quasi-judicial authority, with one exception: there is no obligation to provide review of decisions in cases of unsuccessful opposition or administrative revocation, provided the grounds may be raised in invalidation proceedings.

The international route

The right of priority, Paris Article 4: twelve months for patents and utility models, six months for industrial designs and trade marks. It does not create a right; it treats a later filing as though made on the earlier date.

The filing systems. One application in place of many: the Patent Cooperation Treaty, the Madrid Protocol, the Hague Geneva Act, the Lisbon Geneva Act. Each is worked in its own chapter in Module II.

A worked example

Farida Qureshi, in Ahmedabad, has invented a cotton dyeing process that uses a third less water, and a brand name for the cloth.

Day 0. She files a provisional specification. Priority secured.

Month 12. She files the complete specification with claims, and separately a trade mark application in class 24 for textiles.

Month 12 also. Her Paris Article 4 patent priority expires, so she must file abroad now or file a PCT application, which she does, designating thirty countries and buying eighteen more months.

Month 18. Section 11A publication of the patent application. Anyone can now read her process.

Month 20. Her mark is advertised in the Trade Marks Journal. A rival opposes within four months under section 21.

Month 30. PCT national phase entry in the six countries that turned out to be worth it.

Year 4. Indian patent granted after two examination reports and a pre grant opposition under section 25(1) that failed.

munotes.in63

Acquiring an Intellectual Property Right

Year 5. Twelve months from publication of grant expire without a post grant opposition, so the patent is now much harder to attack except by revocation under section 64.

Fifteen of the twenty years remain, which is exactly the mischief TRIPS Article 62.2 is aimed at.

What it does NOT mean

Registration does not prove validity. A granted patent can be revoked; a registered mark can be rectified.

Copyright registration is not acquisition. Section 45 registration in India is voluntary and evidentiary; the right arose on creation.

Opposition is not litigation. It is an administrative procedure before the office, and TRIPS Article 62.5 expressly does not require judicial review of an unsuccessful opposition.

Quick revision

  • Registrable rights are acquired by application, examination, publication, opposition and grant; copyright is acquired by creation, because Berne Article 5(2) forbids formalities.
  • Indian patent stages: section 7 filing, 11A publication at eighteen months, 11B request for examination, 25(1) pre grant opposition, grant, 25(2) post grant opposition within twelve months, 64 revocation.
  • Trade mark: sections 9 and 11 examination, Journal advertisement, section 21 opposition within four months, section 23 registration.
  • TRIPS Article 62: 62.1 reasonable formalities; 62.2 grant within a reasonable period so as to avoid unwarranted curtailment of protection; 62.3 priority extended to service marks; 62.4 the Article 41.2 and 41.3 principles; 62.5 judicial or quasi-judicial review, except of an unsuccessful opposition or administrative revocation.
  • Paris Article 4 priority: twelve months for patents, six for designs and marks.

Test yourself

1. Describe the acquisition of a patent in India and the international rule that governs it. An application is filed under section 7 of the Patents Act 1970, with a provisional or a complete specification, and the filing date becomes the priority date against which novelty is judged. Under section 11A the application is published after eighteen months from priority, which is what makes the disclosure bargain real. Examination occurs only on request under section 11B, and an application for which no request is made within the prescribed period is deemed withdrawn. The examiner searches the prior art and issues a first examination report, to which the applicant replies and which may require amendment of the claims. Before grant, any person may oppose under section 25(1) on any of the grounds there listed. After grant the patent is entered in the Register, and any interested person may oppose within twelve months of publication of the grant under section 25(2); after that a challenge lies by revocation under section 64 or by counter claim in an infringement suit.

Internationally the governing rule is Article 62 of TRIPS, which permits reasonable procedures and formalities, requires grant within a reasonable period of time so as to avoid unwarranted curtailment of the period of protection, applies the Paris priority to service marks, subjects the procedures to the fairness principles of Article 41.2 and 41.3, and requires review of final administrative decisions by a judicial or quasi-judicial authority, except in cases of unsuccessful opposition or administrative revocation.

munotes.in64

Acquiring an Intellectual Property Right

2. Why does Article 62.2 of TRIPS matter commercially? Because a patent term runs from the date of filing and not from the date of grant. Article 33 of TRIPS requires a term of not less than twenty years counted from the filing date, and section 53 of the Indian Patents Act says the same, so every year the application spends in the examination queue is a year of enforceable exclusivity lost. An applicant whose patent is granted five years after filing has fifteen years of protection, not twenty. Article 62.2 answers that by obliging members, where acquisition of the right is subject to grant or registration, to ensure that the procedures for grant or registration permit the granting or registration of the right within a reasonable period of time so as to avoid unwarranted curtailment of the period of protection. It is a discipline on administrative delay expressed as a substantive obligation, and it is the reason patent office backlogs are a treaty question and not merely a management question. Some jurisdictions answer the same problem by granting patent term extension or adjustment for regulatory or examination delay; India does not, so in India the whole of the answer lies in the speed of the office.

3. Copyright requires no registration. What is gained and what is lost? What is gained is universality without formality. Article 5(2) of the Berne Convention provides that the enjoyment and exercise of the rights it protects shall not be subject to any formality, so an author acquires protection in every Union country from the moment the work is created, with no application, fee, deposit or notice, and no possibility of losing the right by failing to comply with a procedure. For an author with no money and no lawyer that is a very large advantage, and it is the reason copyright is the most accessible of all the rights in this subject. What is lost is the certainty a register provides. There is no public record of who owns what, from when, and for how long, so a person who wishes to license a work may be unable to find the owner, a problem serious enough to have its own name, the orphan works problem. Ownership, subsistence and the date of creation all have to be proved in litigation from evidence rather than read off a register. India offers voluntary registration under section 45 of the Copyright Act 1957, and the Register is prima facie evidence of the particulars entered, but registration is not a condition of the right and cannot be, because that would breach Article 5(2).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in65

Chapter Seventeen

Maintaining an Intellectual Property Right

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A right you have obtained can be lost by not paying, not using, or not working it, and each kind of intellectual property loses it in a different way.

In exam wording: the maintenance of intellectual property rights denotes the acts required after grant or registration to keep the right in force, comprising the payment of renewal or annuity fees, compliance with working and use requirements, the filing of statements of working, and defence against revocation, cancellation, rectification and removal, the international framework being Article 62 of TRIPS with Articles 5 and 5bis of the Paris Convention.

Why the law has this at all

Because a monopoly nobody is using is a monopoly for nothing. The public gave up the right to copy in exchange for a benefit. If the benefit is not delivered, the bargain has failed.

And because registers fill up with dead rights. A register that lists thousands of marks nobody uses is a register that blocks new traders for no reason. Removal for non use clears it.

So maintenance obligations are not administrative housekeeping. They are the mechanism by which the public's side of the bargain is enforced.

The four maintenance obligations

1. Fees. A patent requires annual renewal fees from the third year under section 53(2) of the Patents Act; failure means the patent ceases. A trade mark is renewable every ten years under section 25. A design is renewed once, for five years, under section 11(2).

Paris Article 5bis is the safeguard. It requires a period of grace of not less than six months for the payment of maintenance fees, and permits restoration of a lapsed patent. Section 53(4) and rule 80 of the Indian Patents Rules give that grace; section 60 permits restoration within eighteen months of cesser.

2. Use, for trade marks. Section 47 permits removal where the mark has not been used for a continuous period of five years from the date of registration and three months before the application for removal.

3. Working, for patents. Section 146 of the Patents Act requires the patentee and every licensee to furnish a statement of the extent to which the patented invention has been worked commercially in India, filed in Form 27. Failure is punishable under section 122.

4. Defence against attack. Revocation under section 64, post grant opposition under section 25(2), rectification of the trade marks register under section 57, cancellation of a design under section 19.

The working requirement and the treaties

This is where a maintenance question becomes a treaty question, and MU's paper is about treaties.

Paris Article 5A(1) provides that importation of articles manufactured in another country of the Union shall not entail forfeiture of the patent.

munotes.in66

Maintaining an Intellectual Property Right

Paris Article 5A(2) permits each country to provide for the grant of compulsory licences to prevent the abuses which might result from the exercise of the exclusive rights, for example failure to work.

Paris Article 5A(3) forbids forfeiture except where a compulsory licence would be insufficient, and forbids proceedings for forfeiture before two years from the grant of the first compulsory licence.

Paris Article 5A(4) sets the earliest date for a compulsory licence application for failure to work: four years from filing or three years from grant, whichever expires last, and permits refusal if the patentee justifies inaction by legitimate reasons.

Section 84 of the Indian Patents Act tracks that, allowing an application after three years from grant on three grounds, one of which is that the patented invention is not worked in the territory of India.

And whether importation can count as working has never been decided at the WTO. The United States challenged Brazil's local working requirement in Brazil: Measures Affecting Patent Protection.

Facts. The United States requested consultations on 30 May 2000 about Brazil's industrial property law of 1996, under which a patent became subject to compulsory licensing if the subject matter was not manufactured in Brazil, importation not being sufficient. A panel was established on 1 February 2001. The dispute is WT/DS199.

Held. Nothing was held. The parties notified a mutually satisfactory solution on 5 July 2001 and the case ended without findings.

Why it matters. Section 84(1)(c) of the Indian Patents Act makes failure to work the patented invention in the territory of India a ground for a compulsory licence, and that ground was one of the three on which Natco succeeded against Bayer. Whether such a provision is consistent with TRIPS Article 27.1, which forbids discrimination as to whether products are imported or locally produced, is therefore an open question and a candidate should say so rather than assert an answer.

A worked example

Vinod Shetty holds an Indian patent granted in 2018 on a machine for sorting cashew nuts, and a registered trade mark.

2020 onwards. Renewal fees fall due each year. He pays them.

Each financial year. He files Form 27 under section 146 stating the extent of working. He has licensed the machine to two firms and states their sales.

2023. He stops using the trade mark because he switches to a different brand.

2028. A competitor applies under section 47 to remove the mark for five years of non use. Vinod has no answer, and the mark goes.

2024. A competitor applies under section 84 for a compulsory licence over the patent, saying the reasonable requirements of the public are not satisfied because Vinod supplies only Kerala. The Form 27 statements are the evidence on both sides.

munotes.in67

Maintaining an Intellectual Property Right

2026. Vinod misses a renewal fee. Section 53(4) gives a grace period, which Paris Article 5bis requires; he pays late with the additional fee and the patent survives. Had he missed it entirely, section 60 would allow restoration within eighteen months on proof that the failure was unintentional.

What it does NOT mean

Maintenance is not the same as enforcement. Enforcement is stopping infringers. Maintenance is keeping the right alive.

Non use does not automatically remove a mark. Somebody has to apply, and section 47 has a proviso protecting special circumstances in the trade.

A patent is not forfeited for non working in India. It becomes liable to a compulsory licence, which is a different and lesser consequence, and Paris Article 5A(3) is why.

Quick revision

  • Four obligations: fees, use (marks), working (patents), and defence against revocation and rectification.
  • Fees: patent annual renewal from year three, section 53(2); mark every ten years, section 25; design one renewal of five years, section 11(2). Paris Article 5bis requires a grace period of at least six months and permits restoration; sections 53(4) and 60.
  • Non use: section 47, five continuous years and three months.
  • Working: section 146 statement in Form 27, penalty in section 122.
  • Paris Article 5A: importation shall not entail forfeiture (5A(1)); compulsory licences permitted against abuse (5A(2)); forfeiture only if a compulsory licence is insufficient and not before two years from the first licence (5A(3)); earliest application four years from filing or three from grant, whichever is later (5A(4)).
  • Brazil: Measures Affecting Patent Protection, WT/DS199, produced no findings: the parties settled. Whether a local working requirement is TRIPS consistent is undecided.

Test yourself

1. What must a right holder do to maintain an intellectual property right? Four things, and they differ by right. Pay the fees: a patent requires annual renewal fees from the third year under section 53(2) of the Patents Act 1970, a trade mark is renewable every ten years under section 25 of the Trade Marks Act 1999, and a design may be renewed once for a further five years under section 11(2) of the Designs Act 2000. Use the mark: section 47 of the Trade Marks Act permits removal where there has been no bona fide use for a continuous period of five years from the date of registration and three months before the application. Work the patent, or at least account for working: section 146 obliges the patentee and every licensee to furnish a statement of the extent to which the invention has been worked commercially in India, filed in Form 27, and section 122 penalises failure. And defend the right: a patent may be revoked under section 64 or opposed after grant under section 25(2), a trade mark rectified under section 57, and a design cancelled under section 19.

munotes.in68

Maintaining an Intellectual Property Right

2. What does the Paris Convention say about working requirements? Article 5A of the Paris Convention is a carefully balanced provision in four paragraphs. Paragraph 1 provides that importation by the patentee into a country of the Union of articles manufactured in another country of the Union shall not entail forfeiture of the patent. Paragraph 2 permits each country of the Union to take legislative measures providing for the grant of compulsory licences to prevent the abuses which might result from the exercise of the exclusive rights conferred by the patent, for example failure to work. Paragraph 3 provides that forfeiture of the patent shall not be provided for except in cases where the grant of compulsory licences would be insufficient to prevent the abuses, and that no proceedings for forfeiture or revocation may be instituted before the expiration of two years from the grant of the first compulsory licence. Paragraph 4 fixes the earliest date on which a compulsory licence may be applied for on the ground of failure to work or insufficient working, namely four years from the date of filing of the application or three years from the date of grant, whichever period expires last, and permits refusal if the patentee justifies inaction by legitimate reasons. Section 84 of the Indian Patents Act follows that structure, allowing an application after three years from the grant.

3. Is a local working requirement consistent with TRIPS? The honest answer is that nobody knows, because the question has never been decided. The argument against such a requirement is Article 27.1 of TRIPS, whose last sentence provides that patents shall be available and patent rights enjoyable without discrimination as to the place of invention, the field of technology, and whether products are imported or locally produced. On that reading a provision that treats a patentee who imports less favourably than one who manufactures locally discriminates on the very ground the Article forbids. The argument in favour is that Article 5A of the Paris Convention, incorporated by TRIPS Article 2.1, expressly contemplates compulsory licensing for failure to work, and that Articles 7, 8 and 31 leave members room to require that the technology actually reach the territory. The United States brought the point against Brazil in WT/DS199, complaining of the local working requirement in Brazil's industrial property law of 1996. A panel was established on 1 February 2001, but the parties notified a mutually agreed solution on 5 July 2001 and the panel made no findings. The question therefore remains open, and it matters directly to India, because section 84(1)(c) of the Patents Act makes failure to work the invention in the territory of India a ground for a compulsory licence and it was one of the three grounds on which Natco succeeded against Bayer.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in69

Chapter Eighteen

Commercial Exploitation: Assignment and Transmission

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

An assignment is a sale of the right itself, so the assignee becomes the owner and the assignor keeps nothing.

In exam wording: an assignment is a transfer of the ownership of an intellectual property right, whether in whole or in part, absolutely or by way of mortgage, which must be in writing and duly executed, and which upon registration where required vests in the assignee the title, the right to sue and the right to further assign.

Why the law has this at all

Because the creator is rarely the best exploiter. A university laboratory does not manufacture. A novelist does not print, distribute and sell.

Because there is no delivery. With a chattel, handing it over transfers it. With an intangible there is nothing to hand over, so the law substitutes a formality: writing, signed, and usually registered.

The requirements

Writing, signed. Section 68 of the Patents Act: an assignment of a patent is not valid unless it is in writing and the agreement between the parties is reduced to the form of a document embodying all the terms and conditions governing their rights and obligations and duly executed. Section 19 of the Copyright Act: no assignment is valid unless it is in writing signed by the assignor or by a duly authorised agent.

Registration, and what it does. Section 69 of the Patents Act requires application to the Controller to register the title; section 45 of the Trade Marks Act requires the assignee to apply to the Registrar. Section 69(5) provides that a document in respect of which no entry has been made in the register shall not be admitted in evidence in any court in proof of title except by leave of the court.

Particulars, for copyright. Section 19(2) to (7) is unusually detailed: the assignment must identify the work, specify the rights assigned, the duration and the territorial extent, and specify the amount of royalty or consideration payable. If the period is not stated it is deemed five years; if the territorial extent is not stated it is presumed to extend within India.

The 2012 additions. Section 19(8), (9) and (10) make void an assignment contrary to the terms of a copyright society's assignment, and preserve the author's right to royalties for uses of a literary or musical work in a film other than by exhibition in a cinema hall. These are the provisions that grew out of the Indian Performing Right Society case, worked in [Copyright and Related Rights].

Partial assignment

By right. A patent may be assigned for some claims and not others, though in practice this is rare and difficult.

By territory. Indian rights to one assignee, foreign to another.

munotes.in70

Commercial Exploitation: Assignment and Transmission

By time. Section 19(5) of the Copyright Act contemplates a period, and if none is stated five years is deemed.

By field of use. Broadcast rights separately from print rights.

A trade mark is different. Section 40 of the Trade Marks Act restricts assignment that would create exclusive rights in more than one person for the same or similar goods, because a mark that indicates two different origins deceives, and the Registrar may refuse.

Assignment compared with licence

AssignmentLicence
What passesOwnershipPermission
Assignor or licensor keepsNothing in what is assignedOwnership
Right to sue infringersPasses to the assigneeStays with the owner, subject to the terms
FormWriting, executed, registrableWriting usually required; some may be oral
Effect of the grantor's insolvencyNothing, the right has goneThe licence may be at risk
Can be revokedNoAccording to its terms

A worked example

Dr Anjali Rao, a scientist at a Pune institute, patents a diagnostic method. A Bengaluru company offers to buy the patent for 60 lakh rupees.

The document must be in writing and embody all the terms. Section 68 of the Patents Act is not satisfied by a receipt or a memorandum of understanding.

They register the assignment with the Controller. Without registration, section 69(5) prevents the company from proving its title in court except by leave.

She reserves a right to use the invention for academic research. That reservation makes the assignment partial, and it must be stated in the document.

She also assigns copyright in the training manual. Under section 19(5) and (6) they state the period as the full term and the territory as worldwide, because otherwise the statutory defaults of five years and India only would apply.

Two years later the company sues an infringer. As assignee it is the patentee and sues in its own name. Anjali has no standing at all, which is what she sold.

What it does NOT mean

An assignment is not a licence. A candidate who runs them together loses the marks for the whole question.

Registration is not a condition of validity for a patent assignment. It is a condition of proving title in court, which is close to the same thing in practice but is not the same in law.

An author cannot assign the moral right. Section 57 rights are independent of the copyright and survive its assignment.

Quick revision

  • Assignment transfers ownership; the assignor keeps nothing in what is assigned.
  • Form: section 68 of the Patents Act, writing, embodying all terms, duly executed; section 19 of the Copyright Act, writing signed by the assignor.
  • Registration: section 69 Patents Act, and 69(5) makes an unregistered document inadmissible to prove title except by leave; section 45 Trade Marks Act.
  • Copyright defaults: no period stated means five years; no territory stated means India. Section 19(5) and (6).
  • 2012 amendments: sections 19(8), (9) and (10) preserve authors' royalty shares for non cinema uses of works in films.
  • Assignment may be partial: by right, territory, time or field of use. Section 40 of the Trade Marks Act restricts assignments that would produce two origins for the same goods.
  • Moral rights under section 57 are not assignable.
munotes.in71

Commercial Exploitation: Assignment and Transmission

Test yourself

1. What is an assignment and what formalities does Indian law require? An assignment is a transfer of the ownership of an intellectual property right, in whole or in part, so that the assignee becomes the proprietor and the assignor retains nothing in what has been assigned. Because there is no physical thing to deliver, the law substitutes formalities. Section 68 of the Patents Act 1970 provides that an assignment of a patent or of a share in a patent is not valid unless it is in writing and the agreement between the parties is reduced to the form of a document embodying all the terms and conditions governing their rights and obligations, and duly executed. Section 19 of the Copyright Act 1957 requires an assignment to be in writing signed by the assignor or a duly authorised agent, and section 19(2) to (7) further requires the assignment to identify the work, specify the rights assigned, the duration and the territorial extent, and specify the royalty or other consideration, with statutory defaults of five years and of India if the period or the territory is not stated. For trade marks, sections 37 to 45 of the Trade Marks Act 1999 govern, and section 45 requires the assignee to apply to the Registrar to register title.

2. What is the effect of failing to register an assignment? It differs by statute and the difference matters. For patents, section 69 of the Patents Act requires a person who becomes entitled by assignment to apply to the Controller to register title, and section 69(5) provides that a document in respect of which no entry has been made in the register shall not be admitted in any court as evidence of the title of any person to a patent, except by leave of the court and for reasons to be recorded. So non registration does not invalidate the assignment as between the parties; it disables the assignee from proving title in litigation unless the court permits, which in practice is close to the same thing when an infringement suit has to be brought. For trade marks, section 45 of the Trade Marks Act requires the assignee to apply to the Registrar, and until the entry is made the assignee is not entitled to have the assignment admitted in evidence of title. For copyright there is no compulsory registration at all, consistently with Article 5(2) of the Berne Convention, and the assignment operates on execution.

munotes.in72

Commercial Exploitation: Assignment and Transmission

3. Distinguish an assignment from a licence and explain why the distinction matters in litigation. An assignment transfers ownership; a licence grants permission while ownership remains with the licensor. That single difference produces most of the consequences. The assignee becomes the proprietor and may sue infringers in its own name, further assign, and license others; the assignor retains no interest and no standing to sue. A licensee has only the rights its licence gives it, and whether it may sue at all depends on the statute and the terms: an exclusive licensee under section 109 of the Patents Act may institute proceedings, and section 61 of the Copyright Act requires the owner to be made a party where an exclusive licensee sues. An assignment survives the assignor's insolvency because the right has already gone; a licence may not. An assignment cannot be revoked, while a licence may be terminated according to its terms. And the formalities differ, an assignment requiring writing and registration for proof of title while a licence, though usually written, is subject to lighter requirements. In litigation the distinction decides who the plaintiff is, and a suit brought by the wrong party is liable to fail on that ground alone.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in73

Chapter Nineteen

Commercial Exploitation: Licensing

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A licence is permission to do what would otherwise infringe, given by the owner who stays the owner, or given by the state when the owner will not.

In exam wording: a licence is a grant of permission by the proprietor of an intellectual property right, or by operation of law, authorising the licensee to do acts that would otherwise infringe, and may be voluntary or compulsory, and if voluntary may be exclusive, sole or non exclusive, the whole being subject to competition law and to the disciplines of Articles 31 and 40 of TRIPS.

The three kinds of voluntary licence

Exclusive. The licensee alone may work the right, and the licensor may not work it either. Section 2(1)(f) of the Patents Act defines an exclusive licence as one conferring on the licensee, or on the licensee and persons authorised by it, to the exclusion of all other persons including the patentee, any right in respect of the patented invention.

Sole. The licensee is the only licensee, but the licensor may still work the right itself. Indian statutes do not define this; it is a creature of contract and it must be drafted expressly.

Non exclusive. The licensor may license as many others as it likes.

Why the distinction matters procedurally. Section 109 of the Patents Act gives an exclusive licensee the like right as the patentee to institute a suit for infringement, and requires the patentee to be added as a defendant if it will not join as a plaintiff. Section 61 of the Copyright Act requires the owner of the copyright to be made a party where an exclusive licensee sues.

Compulsory licences

The idea. The state authorises a third party to work the right without the owner's consent, on terms the state fixes, because the public interest requires it.

The treaty basis. Paris Article 5A(2) permits compulsory licences to prevent abuses resulting from the exercise of the exclusive rights, for example failure to work. TRIPS Article 31 then imposes twelve conditions on any such use, and Article 31bis, inserted by the Protocol in force on 23 January 2017, adds an export mechanism. Both are worked in Module III.

In India. Section 84 of the Patents Act, on application after three years from grant, on any of three grounds: that the reasonable requirements of the public have not been satisfied; that the patented invention is not available to the public at a reasonably affordable price; or that it is not worked in the territory of India. Section 92 permits the Central Government to notify circumstances of national emergency, extreme urgency or public non commercial use. Section 92A permits an export licence for a country with insufficient manufacturing capacity, which is India's Article 31bis provision.

munotes.in74

Commercial Exploitation: Licensing

In copyright. Section 31 of the Copyright Act permits a compulsory licence where the owner has refused to allow the work to be communicated to the public on terms the complainant considers reasonable. That provision was construed in Entertainment Network (India) Ltd v. Super Cassettes Industries Ltd.

Facts. A private FM radio broadcaster sought a compulsory licence under section 31 to broadcast sound recordings whose owner had refused a licence on the terms offered. The jurisdiction of the Copyright Board to grant such a licence, and the terms on which it could do so, were in issue. The citation is (2008) 13 SCC 30; AIR 2009 SC 1006.

Held. The Board has jurisdiction under section 31 where the owner has refused to allow communication to the public on reasonable terms; the owner's refusal is not conclusive; and the public interest in dissemination must be balanced against the owner's monopoly. The matter was remitted for the terms to be fixed.

Why it matters. It shows that the public interest limits in the international system, which for copyright come through Berne Article 11bis(2) and Article 13 as carried in by TRIPS Article 9.1, are real and are actually used in India.

Statutory licences

A statutory licence differs from a compulsory licence in that the right to use arises from the statute itself on payment of a fixed or fixable royalty, without an application and an adjudication.

Section 31D of the Copyright Act is the Indian example: any broadcasting organisation desirous of communicating a published work by broadcast may do so on giving prior notice and paying royalties at the rate fixed by the Board.

Restrictions on what a licence may contain

Competition law. Section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002 exempts reasonable conditions imposed to protect intellectual property rights from the prohibition on anti competitive agreements. The word is reasonable, so an unreasonable condition is not saved.

Section 140 of the Patents Act voids certain conditions outright, including tie ins requiring the purchase of unpatented materials, restrictions on using articles supplied by others, and coercive package licensing.

TRIPS Article 40 recognises that some licensing practices restrain competition and may impede transfer of technology, and permits members to specify practices constituting an abuse, mentioning exclusive grantback conditions, conditions preventing challenges to validity, and coercive package licensing. It is worked in [TRIPS Article 40: Anti-Competitive Practices in Licences].

A worked example

Tanvi Sarode holds a patent on a rainwater filter and licenses it three ways.

To a Maharashtra firm, exclusively for Maharashtra. That firm may sue infringers in Maharashtra under section 109, joining Tanvi.

To a Tamil Nadu firm, non exclusively. She licenses two more firms in the same state. None of them can sue.

munotes.in75

Commercial Exploitation: Licensing

To a Kenyan firm. Her Indian patent does nothing in Kenya, so what she is really licensing there is know how and the trade mark, and the agreement has to say so.

She includes a clause requiring licensees to buy filter cartridges from her. Section 140(1)(a) of the Patents Act voids it, and the clause is not saved by section 3(5) of the Competition Act because it is not a reasonable condition for protecting the patent.

In year four a rival applies under section 84, saying the filter is priced beyond the reach of the rural households it was designed for. The three grounds and the Article 31 conditions then decide the case, which is [TRIPS Article 31: Other Use Without Authorisation] and [Compulsory Licensing in India].

What it does NOT mean

An exclusive licence is not an assignment. The licensor remains the proprietor and the licence ends.

A compulsory licence is not expropriation. The right survives, the patentee is paid, and the licence is non exclusive and non assignable.

A licence is not always in writing. Section 30 of the Copyright Act requires a licence to be in writing signed, but a bare permission not to sue can be implied.

Quick revision

  • Voluntary licences: exclusive (section 2(1)(f) Patents Act, excludes even the patentee), sole (contractual only), non exclusive.
  • Standing: section 109 Patents Act lets an exclusive licensee sue, joining the patentee; section 61 Copyright Act requires the owner to be a party.
  • Compulsory licence: Paris Article 5A(2); TRIPS Article 31 conditions and Article 31bis exports; India, sections 84, 92 and 92A of the Patents Act and section 31 of the Copyright Act.
  • Statutory licence: arises from the statute on payment, no adjudication. Section 31D of the Copyright Act for broadcasting.
  • Limits on terms: section 140 Patents Act voids tie ins and coercive packages; section 3(5) Competition Act saves only reasonable conditions; TRIPS Article 40 lets members specify abusive practices.
  • Entertainment Network (India) Ltd v. Super Cassettes Industries Ltd: the Copyright Board has jurisdiction under section 31, the owner's refusal is not conclusive, and public interest is weighed against the monopoly.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish exclusive, sole and non exclusive licences, and explain why the distinction matters. An exclusive licence confers on the licensee, to the exclusion of all other persons including the proprietor, the right to do the acts licensed; section 2(1)(f) of the Patents Act 1970 defines it in those terms, and the significant feature is that the licensor excludes itself. A sole licence gives the licensee the assurance that no other licence will be granted while leaving the licensor free to work the right itself; Indian statutes do not define it and it exists only if the agreement creates it expressly, which is why sloppy drafting frequently produces litigation about whether a licence is sole or exclusive. A non exclusive licence leaves the licensor free both to work the right and to license others without limit. The distinction matters commercially, because an exclusive licensee will pay far more for the certainty of being alone in the market, and it matters procedurally, because standing to sue depends on it: section 109 of the Patents Act gives an exclusive licensee the like right as the patentee to institute a suit for infringement, requiring the patentee to be joined, and section 61 of the Copyright Act requires the owner of the copyright to be made a party where an exclusive licensee sues, while a non exclusive licensee has no right to sue at all.

munotes.in76

Commercial Exploitation: Licensing

2. What is a compulsory licence and where does the power to grant one come from? A compulsory licence is an authorisation given by the state to a person other than the right holder to work the right without the holder's consent, on terms including remuneration fixed by the state. Its treaty foundation is Article 5A(2) of the Paris Convention, which permits each country of the Union to provide for the grant of compulsory licences to prevent the abuses which might result from the exercise of the exclusive rights conferred by a patent, for example failure to work, subject to the limits in Article 5A(3) and (4). TRIPS then regulates the practice rather than forbidding it: Article 31 permits other use without the authorisation of the right holder subject to twelve conditions, including prior negotiation on reasonable commercial terms, predominant supply of the domestic market, non exclusivity, non assignability, adequate remuneration and judicial review, with waivers of some conditions in a national emergency or for public non commercial use; and Article 31bis, inserted by the Protocol which entered into force on 23 January 2017, permits production for export to members with insufficient manufacturing capacity. In India the powers are in section 84 of the Patents Act on three grounds after three years from grant, section 92 for national emergency, extreme urgency or public non commercial use, section 92A for export, and section 31 of the Copyright Act for works withheld from the public.

3. What limits does the law place on the terms of a voluntary licence? Three sets. Statutory avoidance: section 140 of the Patents Act 1970 makes certain conditions void in themselves, including a condition requiring the purchaser or licensee to acquire from the licensor articles other than the patented article, a condition prohibiting the use of articles supplied by any person other than the licensor, and a condition requiring the licensee to take a licence of another patent it does not want, which is coercive package licensing. Competition law: section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002 exempts from the prohibition on anti competitive agreements the imposition of reasonable conditions as may be necessary for protecting intellectual property rights, so the exemption is not a blanket one and an unreasonable condition falls outside it and is judged like any other agreement. And the international discipline: Article 40 of TRIPS records the members' agreement that some licensing practices or conditions pertaining to intellectual property rights which restrain competition may have adverse effects on trade and may impede the transfer and dissemination of technology, and permits members to specify in their legislation practices or conditions that may in particular cases constitute an abuse, mentioning exclusive grantback conditions, conditions preventing challenges to validity, and coercive package licensing.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in77

Chapter Twenty

Commercial Exploitation: Franchising, Merchandising, Technology Transfer and Pools

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Franchising, merchandising, technology transfer and patent pools are all licences with something extra bolted on, and the extra is what makes each of them a distinct commercial form.

In exam wording: beyond assignment and simple licensing, intellectual property is commercially exploited through franchising, in which a bundle of rights is licensed together with a business system; through merchandising, in which a mark or character is licensed for goods unrelated to the original business; through technology transfer, in which patents, know how and technical assistance move together; and through patent pools and cross licensing, in which several holders license each other or a common vehicle.

Franchising

What it is. A franchisor licenses a bundle: the trade mark, the trade dress, the know how, the manuals, the software, the recipes, and requires the franchisee to run the business according to a system, in exchange for an initial fee and continuing royalties.

Why the mark is central. The franchisee trades under the franchisor's mark, so to the public the outlets are one business. That makes quality control not merely commercially prudent but legally necessary: a mark used by a licensee whose quality the proprietor does not control ceases to indicate a single trade origin and becomes liable to be attacked.

The Indian mechanism. Section 48 to 55 of the Trade Marks Act 1999 provide for registered users and for permitted use, and section 2(1)(r) defines permitted use to include use by an unregistered licensee with the proprietor's consent under a written agreement, provided the proprietor has control. Section 49 governs registration as a registered user.

What franchising is not. It is not an agency, because the franchisee trades on its own account, and it is not a partnership.

Merchandising

What it is. Licensing a mark, a character, a personality or a design for goods that have nothing to do with the licensor's own trade: a cricket team's name on a lunchbox, a film character on a school bag.

The legal difficulty. A mark protects the goods and services it is registered for. Merchandising by definition crosses into other classes, so the licensor must either register defensively across many classes, or rely on being a well known mark under sections 11(6) to 11(9) of the Trade Marks Act, which is India's enactment of Paris Article 6bis as extended by TRIPS Article 16.3.

Character merchandising also raises copyright, because a drawn character is an artistic work, and personality rights, which Indian courts have developed without a statute.

Technology transfer

What it is. The movement of the capacity to make something, not merely the right to make it. A patent licence alone transfers the right; a technology transfer agreement adds know how, drawings, training, technical assistance, and frequently the supply of equipment.

munotes.in78

Commercial Exploitation: Franchising, Merchandising, Technology Transfer and Pools

Why the treaties care. TRIPS Article 7 names the transfer and dissemination of technology as an objective. Article 66.2 obliges developed country members to provide incentives to enterprises and institutions in their territories for the purpose of promoting and encouraging technology transfer to least developed country members. Article 67 requires technical cooperation on request.

Whether Article 66.2 has produced anything is a fair question, and the honest answer is that reporting has been irregular and the results modest, which is what least developed members have said repeatedly in the Council for TRIPS.

Indian regulation. Technology transfer agreements have historically been subject to exchange control and to conditions on royalty rates. The current position under the Foreign Exchange Management Act 1999 permits royalty payments on the automatic route, which is a considerable liberalisation from the pre 1991 position where limits were fixed administratively.

Patent pools and cross licensing

Cross licensing. Two holders license each other, usually because each blocks the other. Section 91 of the Patents Act deals with the related problem of a dependent patent by permitting a licence.

A patent pool. Several holders put patents into a common vehicle that licenses them as a package, usually at a single rate.

The efficiency argument. Where a standard requires hundreds of patents held by dozens of firms, a pool reduces the transaction cost from impossible to manageable, which is the anticommons answer.

The competition objection. A pool of substitutes rather than complements is a price fixing cartel wearing a technical costume, and competition authorities examine pools on exactly that line.

A worked example

Nikhil Bhatia owns a chain of four South Indian restaurants in Mumbai under the mark UPPU, with a distinctive interior, a recipe book and a training system.

He franchises. Each franchisee gets the mark, the trade dress, the manual and the recipes, pays an entry fee and a royalty on turnover, and agrees to buy the spice blend from him and to submit to inspection.

The spice tie in is the risk. In a patent licence it would be void under section 140 of the Patents Act. In a trade mark franchise it is defensible as a quality control measure, which is the reason it is included; but if it is really a device to extract a margin on spices rather than to preserve consistency, it is exposed under section 3 of the Competition Act.

He registers the franchisees as registered users under section 49, or at least documents permitted use with control under section 2(1)(r), so that their use accrues to him and does not weaken his own title.

He merchandises. A film company wants UPPU printed on merchandise. His registration is in class 43 for restaurant services, so he must register in the merchandise classes or show that UPPU is a well known mark.

munotes.in79

Commercial Exploitation: Franchising, Merchandising, Technology Transfer and Pools

He transfers technology. A Dubai company wants to make his spice blend locally. The agreement licenses the trade mark, transfers the formula as confidential know how, sends two of his cooks for three months, and provides for royalties remitted under the Foreign Exchange Management Act. Only the last of these is a licence of a registered right; the rest is contract.

What it does NOT mean

Franchising is not a separate intellectual property right. There is no franchise statute in India, and a franchise is a bundle of licences and contractual obligations.

Technology transfer is not the same as licensing. A licence transfers permission; a transfer moves capability.

A patent pool is not automatically lawful. It is judged by what is in it.

Quick revision

  • Franchising: a bundle of the mark, trade dress, know how and system, with quality control, which is legally necessary because a mark used without control ceases to indicate one origin. Sections 48 to 55 and 2(1)(r) of the Trade Marks Act, registered users under section 49.
  • Merchandising: licensing across classes, so it needs defensive registration or well known mark status under sections 11(6) to 11(9), India's Paris Article 6bis and TRIPS Article 16.3 provision.
  • Technology transfer: patents plus know how, drawings, training and assistance. TRIPS Article 7 objective, Article 66.2 obligation on developed members towards least developed members, Article 67 technical cooperation. Results under 66.2 have been modest.
  • Cross licensing answers blocking patents; section 91 deals with dependent patents. Patent pools answer the anticommons and are judged by whether they pool complements or substitutes.
  • Tie ins: void in a patent licence under section 140; defensible as quality control in a franchise, but exposed under section 3 of the Competition Act if they are really a margin device.

Test yourself

1. What is franchising, and why is quality control a legal rather than merely a commercial requirement? Franchising is the licensing of a bundle of rights together with a business system: the trade mark, the trade dress, the know how, the manuals and often software and recipes, licensed on terms requiring the franchisee to operate in a prescribed way, in exchange for an entry fee and continuing royalties on turnover. It is not a separate intellectual property right and there is no franchise statute in India; it is a composite of licences and contractual obligations. Quality control is a legal requirement because the franchisee trades under the franchisor's mark, so that the public sees one business, and a trade mark used by a licensee whose goods or services the proprietor does not control ceases to perform its function of indicating a single trade origin and becomes vulnerable to attack. Indian law recognises this in the definition of permitted use in section 2(1)(r) of the Trade Marks Act 1999, which requires the use to be by a person other than the registered proprietor in relation to goods or services with which the proprietor is connected in the course of trade, subject to any conditions or limitations to which the registration is subject and with the consent of the proprietor in a written agreement. Sections 48 to 55 provide the registered user machinery, and use by a permitted user is deemed to be use by the proprietor for the purposes of maintaining the registration.

munotes.in80

Commercial Exploitation: Franchising, Merchandising, Technology Transfer and Pools

2. What is technology transfer, and what do the treaties say about it? Technology transfer is the movement of the capability to make or do something, and it is distinguished from a bare licence by what accompanies the right. A patent licence transfers permission to work claims that are already published; a technology transfer agreement adds the know how that the specification does not disclose, the drawings, the process parameters, the training of personnel, the continuing technical assistance and frequently the supply of equipment, and it is these that determine whether the transferee can actually manufacture. The treaties treat it as an objective rather than as a right. Article 7 of TRIPS provides that protection and enforcement should contribute to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users. Article 66.2 obliges developed country members to provide incentives to enterprises and institutions in their territories for the purpose of promoting and encouraging technology transfer to least developed country members, so as to enable them to create a sound and viable technological base. Article 67 requires developed members to provide, on request and on mutually agreed terms and conditions, technical and financial cooperation in favour of developing and least developed members. The honest assessment of Article 66.2 is that reporting has been irregular and the results modest, which is what least developed members have said repeatedly in the Council for TRIPS.

3. Explain patent pools and the competition objection to them. A patent pool is an arrangement under which several proprietors place patents into a common vehicle which licenses them as a package, usually at a single published rate, and distributes the revenue among the contributors. Its efficiency justification is transaction cost. Where a technical standard requires hundreds of patents held by dozens of firms, a manufacturer that had to negotiate separately with each would face costs and hold up risks that could prevent the product being made at all, which is the anticommons problem, and a pool converts an impossible negotiation into a single licence at a known price. The competition objection turns on what is in the pool. Where the pooled patents are complements, each necessary to practise the standard and none a substitute for another, the pool reduces the total royalty and increases output, and competition authorities have generally accepted it. Where the pooled patents are substitutes, so that a licensee could have taken one instead of another and played the holders off against each other, the pool eliminates that competition and fixes the price of the technology, and it is then a cartel in technical dress. The other objections examined in practice are whether the pool includes patents that are not essential, whether it forecloses licensing outside the pool, whether grantback obligations extend to improvements the pool has no claim to, and whether the licence forbids challenges to the validity of the pooled patents, a condition TRIPS Article 40.2 mentions in terms.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in81

Chapter Twenty-One

Intellectual Property as Security, and How an Intangible Is Valued

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

An intangible right can be mortgaged, charged or pledged like anything else you own, and the hard part is not the law but the valuation.

In exam wording: intellectual property may be given as security for credit by way of mortgage, charge, hypothecation or assignment by way of security, the Indian statutes expressly contemplating assignment by way of mortgage, the principal practical obstacles being valuation, the absence of a unified security register and the risk that the right is invalidated during the term of the loan.

Why this matters at all

Because for many knowledge firms it is the only security they have. A software company leases its office and owns nothing but code, contracts and a brand.

Because a large share of corporate value is now intangible. A lender who will not take intangible security cannot lend to a modern firm at all.

And because the law already allows it, so the obstacles are practical.

What the statutes say

Patents. Section 68 of the Patents Act 1970 refers to an assignment, a mortgage, a licence or the creation of any other interest, so a mortgage of a patent is expressly contemplated. Section 69 requires registration of the title or interest with the Controller, and section 69(5) makes an unregistered document inadmissible to prove title except by leave.

Copyright. Section 18 permits assignment of the copyright either wholly or partially, and section 30 permits licences. An assignment by way of security is an assignment.

Trade marks. Sections 37 to 45 govern assignment and transmission, and section 45 requires the assignee to apply to the Registrar.

Company charges. Section 77 of the Companies Act 2013 requires a company creating a charge on its property, including intangible property, to register it with the Registrar of Companies within thirty days; section 77(3) provides that an unregistered charge shall not be taken into account by a liquidator or any other creditor.

Secured transactions generally. The Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act 2002 covers a security interest in intangible assets including intellectual property, so enforcement machinery exists.

The three valuation approaches

The cost approach. What did it cost to create, or what would it cost to recreate. Easy to compute and usually a poor guide, because a cheap invention may be worth a fortune and an expensive one nothing.

The market approach. What have comparable rights sold for. Good where an active market in comparable rights exists, which is true of some trade marks and almost never true of a specific patent.

The income approach. What income is attributable to the right, discounted to present value. This is the method actually used, and its two difficult inputs are the attributable royalty rate and the discount rate.

munotes.in82

Intellectual Property as Security, and How an Intangible Is Valued

A rule of thumb, and it is a rule of thumb. The twenty five per cent rule: a licensee expects to retain about three quarters of the profit attributable to the licensed technology, leaving a quarter as royalty.

The four obstacles a lender actually faces

1. Valuation is contested. Two competent valuers will produce different figures for the same patent, and the range can be wide.

2. There is no single register of security interests. A lender must check the patent register, the trade mark register, the design register, the Registrar of Companies and the Central Registry under the 2002 Act. A single unified filing system, of the kind some countries have, does not exist in India.

3. The right can die during the loan. A patent can be revoked under section 64, a mark rectified under section 57, a design cancelled under section 19. A mortgage over a right that is later held invalid secures nothing, and there is no title insurance market in India for this.

4. Enforcement is slow and the market is thin. Selling a seized patent requires a buyer who wants that technology, and there may not be one.

A worked example

Priyanka Joshi's firm makes agricultural drones. It holds two patents, a registered design, a trade mark and copyright in the flight control software. It needs four crore rupees and has no land.

The bank instructs a valuer. The income approach values the two patents at 2.6 crore on projected licence income over the eleven remaining years, discounted at 18 per cent for technology risk.

The trade mark is valued separately on a relief from royalty basis, and because its term is indefinite the valuer takes twelve years and adds a terminal value.

The software copyright is valued at almost nothing on its own, because without the firm's engineers it cannot be maintained. That is a real and common result.

The security package. An assignment of the patents by way of mortgage under section 68, registered under section 69; a charge over the trade mark registered under section 45 and with the Registrar of Companies under section 77; and an assignment of the copyright by way of security under section 18.

The covenant that matters most is not about money: it requires Priyanka to pay every renewal fee, file every Form 27, and notify the bank of any revocation petition. A lender's real risk is the borrower letting the asset lapse.

What it does NOT mean

Security is not a licence. The lender does not work the right; it holds an interest in it.

Registration of a charge does not validate the right. It records an interest in whatever the right turns out to be worth.

munotes.in83

Intellectual Property as Security, and How an Intangible Is Valued

A trade secret cannot practically be given as security. It has no register, no term and no existence once disclosed, so no lender will take it alone.

Quick revision

  • Indian statutes expressly contemplate security: section 68 of the Patents Act mentions mortgage; section 18 of the Copyright Act permits assignment; sections 37 to 45 of the Trade Marks Act govern transmission.
  • Registration: section 69 Patents Act (and 69(5) on admissibility), section 45 Trade Marks Act, and section 77 of the Companies Act 2013 for a company charge, unregistered charges being disregarded in liquidation under section 77(3).
  • Enforcement machinery: the SARFAESI Act 2002 reaches a security interest in intangible assets.
  • Three valuation approaches: cost, market, income, the last being the one used. The twenty five per cent rule is a negotiating convention.
  • Four obstacles: contested valuation; no unified security register; the right may be invalidated during the loan; and a thin resale market.
  • The critical loan covenant is maintenance: renewal fees, Form 27, and notice of any challenge.

Test yourself

1. Can intellectual property be given as security in India, and under what provisions? Yes, and the statutes say so. Section 68 of the Patents Act 1970 speaks of an assignment, a mortgage, a licence or the creation of any other interest in a patent, requires the document to be in writing embodying all the terms and to be duly executed, and section 69 requires the person becoming entitled to apply to the Controller to register the title or interest, section 69(5) making an unregistered document inadmissible in court to prove title except by leave. Section 18 of the Copyright Act 1957 permits assignment of copyright wholly or partially and generally or subject to limitations, which is wide enough for an assignment by way of security, and section 19 supplies the formalities. Sections 37 to 45 of the Trade Marks Act 1999 govern assignment and transmission and section 45 requires registration of title. Where the borrower is a company, section 77 of the Companies Act 2013 requires registration of a charge on any property, including intangible property, with the Registrar of Companies, and section 77(3) provides that a charge not so registered shall not be taken into account by a liquidator or any other creditor. Enforcement is available under the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act 2002, which covers a security interest in intangible assets.

2. Why do lenders find intellectual property difficult security despite the law permitting it? Four practical obstacles, none of them legal. Valuation is contested: two competent valuers applying the income approach to the same patent will differ, because the attributable royalty rate and the discount rate are both judgments, and a lender lending against a number it cannot verify will discount it heavily. There is no unified register of security interests, so a lender must search the patent register, the trade mark register, the design register, the records of the Registrar of Companies and the Central Registry under the 2002 Act, and a search that has to be run in five places is a search that sometimes misses something. The asset can die during the term of the loan: a patent may be revoked under section 64 of the Patents Act, a mark rectified under section 57 of the Trade Marks Act and a design cancelled under section 19 of the Designs Act, and a mortgage over an invalidated right secures nothing, with no market in title insurance to absorb the risk. And realisation is slow and uncertain, because selling a seized patent requires a buyer who wants that particular technology and there may not be one, so the recovery value is far below the going concern value. The practical answer lenders adopt is to take the intellectual property as part of a wider package and to impose maintenance covenants rather than to lend against the intangible alone.

munotes.in84

Intellectual Property as Security, and How an Intangible Is Valued

3. How is an intangible valued for the purposes of a security transaction? By one of three approaches, of which only the third is generally usable. The cost approach asks what the asset cost to create or what it would cost to recreate; it is simple and usually misleading, because expenditure has no necessary relation to value and a cheap discovery may be worth a great deal while an expensive programme may be worth nothing. The market approach asks what comparable rights have changed hands for; it is reliable where a market in comparables exists, which is sometimes true of trade marks in an active sector and almost never true of a particular patent, since the whole point of a patent is that it is unique. The income approach asks what future income is attributable to the right and discounts it to present value; it is the method used in practice, and its two difficult inputs are the share of profit properly attributable to the right rather than to manufacturing, distribution and reputation, and the discount rate, which must reflect the risk that the income will not arrive and the risk that the right will be invalidated. A widely used negotiating convention, which should be quoted as a convention rather than as law, is the twenty five per cent rule, under which a licensee expects to retain about three quarters of the profit attributable to the licensed technology.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in85

Chapter Twenty-Two

Abuse of Intellectual Property Rights

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Abuse of an intellectual property right means using a lawful monopoly to obtain something the monopoly was never granted for.

In exam wording: abuse of intellectual property rights denotes conduct by a right holder which, while formally within the scope of the right, defeats the purposes for which the right was granted, and which the international system addresses through Article 5A of the Paris Convention, Articles 8.2, 31 and 40 of TRIPS, and in India through sections 84, 92 and 140 of the Patents Act and section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002.

Why "abuse" is a difficult word here

Because the right IS a monopoly. Charging a high price is not abuse; it is the point. Refusing to license is not abuse; exclusivity is what was granted.

So abuse cannot mean using the right. It has to mean something narrower, and there are three coherent senses.

Sense one: using the right to obtain a monopoly the state did not grant. Tying an unpatented product to a patented one extends the monopoly beyond the claims.

Sense two: exercising the right so as to defeat the purpose of the grant. A patent granted to encourage working in India, used only to block imports and to keep the technology out, defeats the section 83 purpose.

Sense three: procedural abuse. Filing a chain of trivial patents to extend an expiring monopoly, or bringing groundless infringement threats to frighten competitors out of the market.

What the treaties permit

Paris Article 5A(2): each country of the Union may provide for the grant of compulsory licences to prevent the abuses which might result from the exercise of the exclusive rights conferred by the patent, for example failure to work. The word "abuse" is the treaty's own.

TRIPS Article 8.2: appropriate measures, provided they are consistent with the Agreement, may be needed to prevent the abuse of intellectual property rights by right holders or the resort to practices which unreasonably restrain trade or adversely affect the international transfer of technology.

TRIPS Article 40.1: members agree that some licensing practices or conditions pertaining to intellectual property rights which restrain competition may have adverse effects on trade and may impede the transfer and dissemination of technology. Article 40.2 permits members to specify in their legislation practices which may constitute an abuse having an adverse effect on competition, and names three: exclusive grantback conditions, conditions preventing challenges to validity, and coercive package licensing.

The forms abuse takes

Tying and bundling. Requiring the purchase of an unpatented product as a condition of a licence. Section 140(1)(a) of the Patents Act voids it.

Coercive package licensing. Requiring a licence of patents the licensee does not want. Section 140(1)(c) voids it, and TRIPS Article 40.2 names it.

munotes.in86

Abuse of Intellectual Property Rights

Exclusive grantback. Requiring the licensee to assign back its own improvements exclusively. Named in Article 40.2.

No challenge clauses. Forbidding the licensee to question validity. Named in Article 40.2.

Excessive pricing amounting to non availability. Not abuse in competition law in most systems, but a ground for a compulsory licence under section 84(1)(b) of the Patents Act, which speaks of the patented invention not being available to the public at a reasonably affordable price.

Refusal to license. Generally lawful. It becomes actionable only in narrow circumstances, and Indian law addresses the consequence rather than the conduct, through section 84.

Non working. Section 84(1)(c), and Paris Article 5A(2) names failure to work as an example of abuse.

Evergreening. Filing successive patents on trivial variants to extend the effective monopoly. Section 3(d) of the Patents Act is India's structural answer, and the Novartis case is where it was construed.

Groundless threats. Section 106 of the Patents Act gives a remedy to a person threatened with infringement proceedings by a person who does not follow them up.

A worked example

A company holds a patent on a machine and licenses it on four conditions.

One: the licensee must buy consumables only from the licensor. Void under section 140(1)(a).

Two: the licensee must take a licence of two other patents it does not need. Void under section 140(1)(c), and named in TRIPS Article 40.2 as coercive package licensing.

Three: the licensee must assign back any improvement, exclusively and without payment. An exclusive grantback, named in Article 40.2, and examinable under section 3(4) of the Competition Act as a vertical restraint.

Four: the licensee must not challenge the validity of the patent. A no challenge clause, named in Article 40.2. It has a further vice: it insulates a possibly invalid monopoly from the only people with the knowledge and the incentive to attack it.

And a fifth fact. The machine is not made in India at all and the price is four times the price in the country of manufacture. That is not a licence term but it is the section 84 case, and the first three grounds in section 84(1) are all engaged.

What it does NOT mean

Abuse is not the same as infringement. Infringement is what others do to the right holder.

A high price is not abuse in itself. It is a ground for a compulsory licence under section 84(1)(b) if the price makes the invention unavailable, which is a different test.

Abuse is not always a competition law question. Section 140 voids conditions without any market analysis at all, and section 84 asks about public requirements rather than about market power.

munotes.in87

Abuse of Intellectual Property Rights

Quick revision

  • Abuse means using a lawful monopoly to obtain what it was not granted for: extending it beyond the claims, defeating the purpose of the grant, or procedural abuse.
  • Treaty basis: Paris Article 5A(2) uses the word and names failure to work; TRIPS Article 8.2 permits measures to prevent abuse; TRIPS Article 40.1 and 40.2 permit members to specify abusive licensing practices and name exclusive grantbacks, no challenge clauses and coercive package licensing.
  • Indian provisions: section 140 of the Patents Act voids tie ins, restrictions on other suppliers and coercive packages; section 84 gives a compulsory licence on three grounds; section 92 covers emergency and public non commercial use; section 106 gives a remedy for groundless threats; section 3(d) answers evergreening.
  • Section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002 saves only reasonable conditions necessary to protect the right.
  • High price is not abuse in itself; it is a section 84(1)(b) ground. Refusal to license is generally lawful.

Test yourself

1. What does abuse of an intellectual property right mean, given that the right is itself a monopoly? It cannot mean the exercise of the right, because exclusivity is exactly what was granted, and charging a high price or refusing to license are ordinary incidents of exclusivity. Abuse must therefore mean something narrower, and three senses are coherent. The first is using the right to obtain a monopoly the state never granted: tying the sale of an unpatented consumable to a patented machine extends the exclusivity beyond the claims that were examined and allowed, and section 140(1)(a) of the Patents Act 1970 voids such a condition outright. The second is exercising the right so as to defeat the purpose for which it was granted: section 83 declares that patents are granted to encourage inventions and to secure that they are worked in India on a commercial scale, and that they are not granted merely to enable patentees to enjoy a monopoly for the importation of the patented article, so a patentee who imports and refuses to supply defeats the statutory purpose and section 84 responds. The third is procedural abuse: filing successive patents on trivial variants to extend an expiring monopoly, which section 3(d) answers, or making groundless threats of infringement proceedings, for which section 106 gives a remedy.

2. What do the treaties say about abuse? Three provisions, and the word is the treaties' own. Article 5A(2) of the Paris Convention permits each country of the Union to take legislative measures providing for the grant of compulsory licences to prevent the abuses which might result from the exercise of the exclusive rights conferred by the patent, and gives failure to work as its example; the balance of Article 5A then limits how far a country may go, forbidding forfeiture unless a compulsory licence would be insufficient and fixing the earliest date for an application. Article 8.2 of TRIPS provides that appropriate measures, provided they are consistent with the Agreement, may be needed to prevent the abuse of intellectual property rights by right holders or the resort to practices which unreasonably restrain trade or adversely affect the international transfer of technology. And Article 40 addresses licensing specifically: Article 40.1 records the members' agreement that some licensing practices or conditions which restrain competition may have adverse effects on trade and may impede the transfer and dissemination of technology, and Article 40.2 permits a member to specify in its legislation licensing practices or conditions that may in particular cases constitute an abuse having an adversely affecting competition, naming exclusive grantback conditions, conditions preventing challenges to validity and coercive package licensing.

munotes.in88

Abuse of Intellectual Property Rights

3. Identify the abusive terms in a licence and the provisions that answer each. Take a patent licence containing four conditions. A requirement that the licensee buy consumables only from the licensor is a tie in, void under section 140(1)(a) of the Patents Act, which prohibits a condition requiring the purchaser or licensee to acquire from the licensor any article other than the patented article. A requirement that the licensee take a licence of other patents it does not want is coercive package licensing, void under section 140(1)(c) and named in TRIPS Article 40.2. A requirement that the licensee assign its own improvements back exclusively and without payment is an exclusive grantback, named in Article 40.2 and examinable in India as a vertical restraint under section 3(4) of the Competition Act 2002, subject to the qualified exemption in section 3(5) for reasonable conditions necessary to protect the right. A requirement that the licensee not challenge the validity of the patent is a no challenge clause, also named in Article 40.2, and its particular vice is that it insulates a possibly invalid monopoly from the very people with the knowledge and the incentive to test it. Conduct outside the licence terms is dealt with separately: if the invention is not worked in India, or is priced so that it is not available to the public at a reasonably affordable price, section 84 permits a compulsory licence on those grounds after three years from grant.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in89

Chapter Twenty-Three

Anti-Competitive Practices in Intellectual Property Licensing

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Competition law and intellectual property law pull in opposite directions on the surface and in the same direction underneath, and the whole subject is about where the surface conflict is real.

In exam wording: the relationship between intellectual property and competition law is governed in India by section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002, which exempts reasonable conditions necessary to protect intellectual property rights from the prohibition on anti competitive agreements, and by section 4, which contains no such exemption for abuse of dominance, the international framework being Articles 8.2 and 40 of TRIPS.

The apparent conflict, and why it is only apparent

The surface conflict. Competition law attacks monopoly. Intellectual property law creates it.

The reason that is too quick. A patent is a legal right to exclude in respect of a defined invention. It is not market power. There may be five alternative technologies, in which case the patentee has a monopoly in law and none in fact.

The deeper agreement. Both bodies of law aim at consumer welfare through innovation. Competition law promotes it by keeping markets contestable; intellectual property promotes it by making investment recoverable. They differ about method, not about object.

Where the conflict is real. When the right is used as a lever to obtain power in a market the right does not cover, or when the right is essential to a standard so that no alternative exists.

Indian law

Section 3(1) and 3(3) of the Competition Act 2002 prohibit agreements causing an appreciable adverse effect on competition, and presume horizontal agreements on prices, output, markets and bid rigging to do so.

Section 3(4) covers vertical agreements: tie in arrangements, exclusive supply, exclusive distribution, refusal to deal and resale price maintenance, each judged by whether it causes an appreciable adverse effect.

Section 3(5) is the exemption, and its wording is the whole question. Nothing in section 3 shall restrict the right of any person to restrain any infringement of, or to impose reasonable conditions as may be necessary for protecting any of his rights under the seven listed statutes.

Three consequences follow from that wording.

It protects conditions, not conduct at large. Enforcing the right is expressly protected; imposing conditions is protected only if they are reasonable and necessary for protection.

It is an exemption from section 3 only. Section 4, abuse of dominant position, has no equivalent exemption, so a dominant holder's conduct is judged on ordinary principles.

It lists the statutes. The Copyright Act, the Patents Act, the Trade and Merchandise Marks Act and the Trade Marks Act, the Geographical Indications Act, the Designs Act and the Semiconductor Act. A right outside the list gets no exemption at all.

munotes.in90

Anti-Competitive Practices in Intellectual Property Licensing

The practices most often examined

Tying. Void under section 140 of the Patents Act regardless of market effect, and separately examinable under section 3(4)(a).

Excessive pricing. Not an offence under section 3, since it is unilateral, but capable of being an abuse of dominance under section 4(2)(a)(ii), and independently a ground for a compulsory licence under section 84(1)(b).

Refusal to license. Ordinarily lawful. Under section 4 it can amount to a denial of market access in the narrow case where the right is an essential facility, and Indian jurisprudence on that is thin.

Standard essential patents. Where a patent is essential to an industry standard, the holder has committed to license on fair, reasonable and non discriminatory terms, and the question is what those terms are. This is where competition authorities and courts have been most active worldwide.

Patent pools. Lawful where the pooled patents are complements, suspect where they are substitutes, as worked in [Commercial Exploitation: Franchising, Merchandising, Technology Transfer and Pools].

What TRIPS permits and requires

Article 8.2 permits appropriate measures to prevent abuse of rights or practices unreasonably restraining trade or adversely affecting technology transfer, provided they are consistent with the Agreement.

Article 40.1 and 40.2 permit members to specify abusive licensing practices, naming exclusive grantbacks, no challenge clauses and coercive package licensing.

Article 40.3 and 40.4 create a consultation procedure between members about a national's practices. It has never been used.

Article 31(k) removes two of the Article 31 conditions where the compulsory licence is granted to remedy a practice determined after judicial or administrative process to be anti competitive: the requirement of prior negotiation is waived, and the need for adequate remuneration may take account of the need to correct the practice.

A worked example

A pharmaceutical company holds a patent on a drug and a separate patent on the inhaler that delivers it.

It licenses the drug patent only to firms that also take the inhaler licence. That is coercive package licensing, void under section 140(1)(c) of the Patents Act, named in TRIPS Article 40.2, and examinable under section 3(4)(a).

It refuses to license at all in India and imports at four times the price elsewhere. Section 3 does not reach unilateral refusal. Section 4 reaches it only if the firm is dominant in a properly defined market. Section 84 of the Patents Act reaches it directly, on the price ground and on the working ground, and does not require any finding of dominance at all.

That last point is the practical lesson. In India, the intellectual property statute frequently gets to the result faster than the competition statute, and a candidate who reaches only for the Competition Act has missed the tool the system actually uses.

munotes.in91

Anti-Competitive Practices in Intellectual Property Licensing

What it does NOT mean

A patent is not a dominant position. Dominance requires a market definition and an assessment, and a patented product with substitutes confers no dominance.

Section 3(5) is not a blanket immunity. It saves reasonable conditions necessary for protection, and nothing else.

Section 3(5) does not apply to section 4. Abuse of dominance is judged without any intellectual property exemption.

Quick revision

  • The conflict is apparent, not real: both bodies of law aim at consumer welfare through innovation and differ about method. A patent is a legal monopoly, not necessarily market power.
  • Section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002 exempts the right to restrain infringement and reasonable conditions necessary for protecting rights under seven named statutes.
  • Three consequences: it protects conditions, not conduct at large; it does not apply to section 4 abuse of dominance; and it protects only rights under the listed statutes.
  • Practices: tying (section 140 Patents Act and section 3(4)(a)); excessive pricing (section 4(2)(a)(ii) and section 84(1)(b)); refusal to license (ordinarily lawful); standard essential patents and the fair, reasonable and non discriminatory commitment; patent pools.
  • TRIPS: Article 8.2 permits measures against abuse; Article 40.2 names three abusive practices; Article 40.3 and 40.4 create a consultation procedure that has never been used; Article 31(k) relaxes two conditions where the licence remedies an anti competitive practice.

Test yourself

1. Is there a conflict between competition law and intellectual property law? On the surface there appears to be one, because competition law exists to attack monopoly and intellectual property law exists to create it. The appearance is misleading for two reasons. First, an intellectual property right is a monopoly in law and not necessarily in fact: a patent confers the right to exclude others from a defined invention, but if five alternative technologies achieve the same result the patentee has no market power at all, and dominance in competition law requires a defined market and an assessment of power within it, not merely the existence of a right. Second, the two bodies of law share an objective. Competition law promotes consumer welfare by keeping markets contestable, and intellectual property law promotes it by making the investment in innovation recoverable; they disagree about method rather than about purpose, and Article 7 of TRIPS states the intellectual property objective in consequentialist terms that a competition lawyer would recognise. The conflict becomes real in two situations: where the right is used as a lever to obtain power in a market that the right does not cover, which is what tying does, and where the right is essential to an industry standard so that no substitute exists by definition, which is the standard essential patent problem.

munotes.in92

Anti-Competitive Practices in Intellectual Property Licensing

2. Explain section 3(5) of the Competition Act 2002 and its limits. Section 3(5) provides that nothing in section 3 shall restrict the right of any person to restrain any infringement of, or to impose reasonable conditions as may be necessary for protecting any of his rights conferred upon him under seven named statutes, being the Copyright Act 1957, the Patents Act 1970, the Trade and Merchandise Marks Act 1958 or the Trade Marks Act 1999, the Geographical Indications of Goods Act 1999, the Designs Act 2000 and the Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000. Three limits are built into that wording. It protects the enforcement of the right and the imposition of conditions, and the conditions are protected only if they are both reasonable and necessary for protecting the right, so a condition that goes further than protection requires falls outside and is judged like any other agreement. It is an exemption from section 3 alone, and there is no corresponding exemption in section 4, so the conduct of a dominant right holder is assessed for abuse of dominance without any intellectual property immunity. And it is confined to rights under the listed statutes, so a right protected only at common law, such as a trade secret or unregistered goodwill, receives no exemption.

3. What does TRIPS say about anti competitive practices? Four provisions. Article 8.2, among the Principles, provides that appropriate measures, provided that they are consistent with the provisions of the Agreement, may be needed to prevent the abuse of intellectual property rights by right holders or the resort to practices which unreasonably restrain trade or adversely affect the international transfer of technology. Article 40.1 records the members' agreement that some licensing practices or conditions pertaining to intellectual property rights which restrain competition may have adverse effects on trade and may impede the transfer and dissemination of technology. Article 40.2 permits a member to specify in its legislation licensing practices or conditions that may in particular cases constitute an abuse of intellectual property rights having an adverse effect on competition in the relevant market, and to adopt appropriate measures to prevent or control them, naming as examples exclusive grantback conditions, conditions preventing challenges to validity, and coercive package licensing. Articles 40.3 and 40.4 establish a consultation procedure under which a member may request consultations with another about the practices of a right holder who is a national or domiciliary of the other, and that procedure has never been used. Finally, Article 31(k) relaxes two of the conditions on compulsory licensing where the licence is granted to remedy a practice determined after judicial or administrative process to be anti competitive.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in93

Chapter Twenty-Four

Unfair Trade Practices Touching Intellectual Property in India

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Unfair trade practices touching intellectual property are answered in India by five different machineries, and the question asks which one to use.

In exam wording: unfair trade practices relating to intellectual property comprise passing off, counterfeiting and piracy, false and misleading representations as to origin or quality, comparative advertising that denigrates, and misuse of geographical indications, and are curbed in India by civil actions, criminal provisions, customs recordation, consumer protection machinery and administrative action, the international obligation being Article 10bis of the Paris Convention as carried into TRIPS by Article 2.1.

The international obligation first

Paris Article 10bis(1): the countries of the Union are bound to assure to nationals of such countries effective protection against unfair competition.

Article 10bis(2): any act of competition contrary to honest practices in industrial or commercial matters constitutes an act of unfair competition.

Article 10bis(3) names three: acts creating confusion with a competitor's establishment, goods or activities; false allegations discrediting a competitor; and indications or allegations liable to mislead the public as to the nature, manufacturing process, characteristics, suitability or quantity of goods.

Paris Article 10ter requires appropriate legal remedies and requires members to permit federations and associations of interested parties to take action.

TRIPS Article 2.1 carries Articles 1 to 12 of Paris in, so Article 10bis binds every WTO member, and TRIPS Article 39.1 expressly says that in the course of ensuring effective protection against unfair competition as provided in Article 10bis, members shall protect undisclosed information.

India has no unfair competition statute. That is the point a good answer makes: the obligation is discharged through several separate machineries rather than one.

The five means

1. The civil action

Passing off for unregistered marks and get up, preserved by section 27(2) of the Trade Marks Act.

Infringement under section 29 for registered marks, section 48 of the Patents Act, section 51 of the Copyright Act, section 22 of the Designs Act.

Section 22 of the Geographical Indications Act for infringement of a registered geographical indication, including use that constitutes unfair competition within Article 10bis, which the Indian Act reproduces in its own explanation.

Remedies: injunction, damages or an account of profits, delivery up, and in practice the Anton Piller style order for search and seizure, which is the Indian answer to TRIPS Article 50.

2. The criminal provisions

Sections 103 and 104 of the Trade Marks Act punish applying a false trade mark and selling goods with a false trade mark or false trade description; section 115(4) requires a search warrant to be obtained by an officer not below the rank of Deputy Superintendent of Police, after obtaining the Registrar's opinion.

Section 63 of the Copyright Act punishes infringement knowingly.

munotes.in94

Unfair Trade Practices Touching Intellectual Property in India

Section 39 of the Geographical Indications Act punishes falsely applying a geographical indication.

TRIPS Article 61 requires criminal procedures for wilful trademark counterfeiting and copyright piracy on a commercial scale.

3. Customs recordation

The Intellectual Property Rights (Imported Goods) Enforcement Rules 2007, made under sections 11 and 156 of the Customs Act 1962, let a right holder record a right with customs, after which infringing imports may be suspended.

This is India's TRIPS Section 4 provision, giving effect to Articles 51 to 60.

An important limit. The Rules were amended in 2018 to remove patents from their scope, so patent owners cannot use customs recordation in India; trade marks, copyright, designs and geographical indications remain.

4. Consumer protection

The Consumer Protection Act 2019 defines unfair trade practice in section 2(47) and includes making a false representation that goods are of a particular standard, quality or grade, or that they have sponsorship or approval they do not have.

The Central Consumer Protection Authority under section 10 may inquire into unfair trade practices on its own motion, order recall and impose penalties, which is a machinery no other statute here provides.

5. Administrative and self regulatory

The Advertising Standards Council of India code on comparative advertising, and the rules on misleading advertisements under the Consumer Protection Act, cover denigration, which is Paris Article 10bis(3)(2).

The Legal Metrology Act 2009 and the Food Safety and Standards Act 2006 carry labelling obligations that catch false statements of origin.

A worked example

A Delhi trader sells cheap sarees labelled "Handloom Banarasi" with a mark deceptively similar to a well known brand and a claim of an award the goods never won.

Passing off and infringement against the mark, under sections 27(2) and 29 of the Trade Marks Act.

Geographical indication infringement under section 22 of the Geographical Indications Act, Banarasi sarees being a registered indication.

Criminal complaint under sections 103 and 104 of the Trade Marks Act, with a search warrant under section 115(4).

Customs recordation if the goods are imported, under the 2007 Rules.

Complaint to the Central Consumer Protection Authority about the false award claim, under sections 2(47) and 10 of the Consumer Protection Act 2019.

Five machineries, one set of facts. That is what MU's question about the means is asking for.

What it does NOT mean

India has no tort of unfair competition as such. Attempts to plead one generally fail; the plaintiff must find a recognised cause of action.

Passing off is not a statutory action. It is preserved by section 27(2), not created by it.

Customs recordation does not cover patents in India since the 2018 amendment, which is a point of detail that distinguishes a good answer.

munotes.in95

Unfair Trade Practices Touching Intellectual Property in India

Quick revision

  • International obligation: Paris Article 10bis, effective protection against unfair competition, with three named acts in 10bis(3): confusion, discrediting allegations, misleading indications. Article 10ter requires remedies and standing for associations. Carried in by TRIPS Article 2.1, and referred to in TRIPS Article 39.1.
  • India has no unfair competition statute. Five machineries instead.
  • Civil: passing off (section 27(2) Trade Marks Act), infringement (section 29), and section 22 of the Geographical Indications Act. Remedies include injunction, damages or account, delivery up.
  • Criminal: sections 103, 104 and 115(4) of the Trade Marks Act; section 63 of the Copyright Act; section 39 of the Geographical Indications Act. TRIPS Article 61 requires them.
  • Customs: the Intellectual Property Rights (Imported Goods) Enforcement Rules 2007, India's TRIPS Articles 51 to 60 provision. Note that patents were removed from their scope in 2018.
  • Consumer: section 2(47) and section 10 of the Consumer Protection Act 2019, and the Central Consumer Protection Authority's suo motu powers.

Test yourself

1. What is the international obligation about unfair competition, and how does India discharge it? The obligation is in Article 10bis of the Paris Convention, which binds the countries of the Union to assure to nationals of the other countries effective protection against unfair competition, defines an act of unfair competition as any act of competition contrary to honest practices in industrial or commercial matters, and prohibits in particular three classes of act: all acts of such a nature as to create confusion by any means whatever with the establishment, the goods or the industrial or commercial activities of a competitor; false allegations in the course of trade of such a nature as to discredit the establishment, the goods or the activities of a competitor; and indications or allegations the use of which in the course of trade is liable to mislead the public as to the nature, the manufacturing process, the characteristics, the suitability for their purpose or the quantity of the goods. Article 10ter requires appropriate legal remedies and requires members to permit federations and associations of interested parties to take action.

TRIPS Article 2.1 incorporates Articles 1 to 12 of Paris, so the obligation binds every WTO member. India has no unfair competition statute, and discharges the obligation through several separate machineries: the civil actions of passing off and statutory infringement, criminal provisions in the trade mark, copyright and geographical indication statutes, customs recordation, the consumer protection system, and administrative and self regulatory controls on advertising and labelling.

2. What are the means available in India to curb unfair trade practices relating to intellectual property? Five. Civil proceedings: passing off, preserved by section 27(2) of the Trade Marks Act 1999 and available for unregistered marks and get up; infringement under section 29 of that Act, section 48 of the Patents Act, section 51 of the Copyright Act, section 22 of the Designs Act and section 22 of the Geographical Indications Act; with remedies of injunction, damages or account of profits, and delivery up, together with search and seizure orders that answer TRIPS Article 50. Criminal proceedings: sections 103 and 104 of the Trade Marks Act for applying or selling under a false trade mark or trade description, with the safeguard in section 115(4) that a search warrant be obtained by an officer not below the rank of Deputy Superintendent of Police after the Registrar's opinion; section 63 of the Copyright Act; section 39 of the Geographical Indications Act; all answering TRIPS Article 61. Customs recordation under the Intellectual Property Rights (Imported Goods) Enforcement Rules 2007, India's provision for TRIPS Articles 51 to 60, from whose scope patents were removed by amendment in 2018. Consumer protection: section 2(47) of the Consumer Protection Act 2019 defines unfair trade practice to include false representations about standard, quality, grade, sponsorship or approval, and the Central Consumer Protection Authority may act on its own motion under section 10, order recall and impose penalties. And administrative and self regulatory control of misleading and denigrating advertising, and of labelling under the Legal Metrology Act 2009 and the Food Safety and Standards Act 2006.

munotes.in96

Unfair Trade Practices Touching Intellectual Property in India

3. Why does it matter that India has no unfair competition statute? Because it changes how the answer has to be constructed, and because it exposes a real gap. Article 10bis of the Paris Convention obliges India to assure effective protection against unfair competition, and Indian courts have repeatedly said that there is no general tort of unfair competition in Indian law, so a plaintiff cannot simply plead that the defendant has behaved dishonestly. The plaintiff must find a recognised cause of action: passing off if there is goodwill and a misrepresentation, infringement if there is a registered right, breach of confidence if there is confidential information, defamation or malicious falsehood if there is a discrediting allegation, or a statutory complaint under the consumer protection machinery. The consequence is that conduct plainly within Article 10bis can fall between the causes of action, and the clearest example is slavish imitation of a product's appearance where the plaintiff has no design registration and cannot prove goodwill in the shape. Whether that gap places India in breach is arguable, since Article 10bis requires effective protection without prescribing its form, and India's answer is that the aggregate of its machineries is effective. A candidate who states the position that way has given a better answer than one who asserts either that India complies fully or that it does not comply at all.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in97

Chapter Twenty-Five

The Challenges of the Current Era

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Four technologies are testing the assumptions intellectual property law was built on, and in each case the difficulty is that the law asks a question the technology cannot answer.

In exam wording: contemporary challenges to intellectual property arise principally from artificial intelligence, which unsettles the requirements of human authorship and inventorship and raises questions about training data; from digital networks, which make copying costless and enforcement transnational; from additive manufacturing, which does the same for physical objects; and from biotechnology and genetic resources, which test the boundaries of patentable subject matter and the ownership of traditional knowledge.

1. Artificial intelligence

Three separate questions, and candidates run them together.

Who is the author of a machine generated work? Section 2(d)(vi) of the Copyright Act 1957 defines the author of a computer generated literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work as the person who causes the work to be created. That was drafted for computer assisted works, and whether it fits a generative model is untested in India.

Who is the inventor of a machine generated invention? The DABUS applications, filed worldwide naming an artificial intelligence system as inventor, were refused in almost every jurisdiction on the ground that an inventor must be a natural person. Section 6 of the Indian Patents Act permits an application by any person claiming to be the true and first inventor, and section 2(1)(y) defines the true and first inventor to exclude the first importer and a person to whom an invention was communicated from outside India, which assumes a person.

Is training a model on protected works an infringement? This is the live question everywhere. It engages the reproduction right, and any defence must satisfy the three step test in TRIPS Article 13, so a national fair dealing provision that permitted wholesale copying for training would be exposed.

The treaty position is silent, because no instrument in Module II was drafted with this in mind, and the newest, the GRATK Treaty of 2024, addresses genetic resources rather than machines.

2. Digital networks

Copying became free and instantaneous, which was the problem the WIPO Copyright Treaty and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty of 1996 were made to answer.

Their answer had three parts: a right of communication to the public including on demand availability, protection of technological protection measures, and protection of rights management information. India enacted the last two as sections 65A and 65B of the Copyright Act in 2012 and acceded to both treaties in 2018.

What remains unsolved is enforcement. An infringing server can sit anywhere, and territoriality means an Indian injunction binds nobody abroad. Indian courts have responded with dynamic injunctions against websites and their future mirrors, which is judicial improvisation rather than treaty law.

munotes.in98

The Challenges of the Current Era

Intermediary liability is governed in India by section 79 of the Information Technology Act 2000 and its rules, which is Group III Paper VI's subject and not this one.

3. Additive manufacturing

Three dimensional printing does to objects what the internet did to files. A design file can be sent anywhere and printed at home.

The legal difficulty is that the file is not the object. A design registration protects the appearance of an article; a patent protects a product or process. Whether transmitting a file that will become an infringing article is itself an infringement is not clearly answered by section 22 of the Designs Act or section 48 of the Patents Act.

And private, non commercial printing may escape entirely, because section 22 of the Designs Act speaks of piracy for the purposes of sale, and infringement remedies are practically unavailable against households.

4. Biotechnology and genetic resources

Patentable subject matter is contested. India excludes plants and animals in whole or in part under section 3(j) and the discovery of a living thing occurring in nature under section 3(c), while other members grant such patents; TRIPS Article 27.3(b) allows both positions.

Gene editing sharpens it. A sequence edited by a technique is neither a discovery nor obviously a plant, and the classification decides everything.

Access and benefit sharing is now a treaty obligation. The Convention on Biological Diversity, the Nagoya Protocol and, since 2024, the WIPO GRATK Treaty require disclosure or consent in defined circumstances, and India already requires disclosure of the source and geographical origin of biological material under section 10(4)(ii)(D) of the Patents Act and approval of the National Biodiversity Authority under section 6 of the Biological Diversity Act 2002.

Two further pressures worth naming

Traditional knowledge, which no category fits, worked in [Traditional Knowledge: Why Patent Law Cannot See It].

Standard essential patents and interoperability, where the right is by definition unavoidable and the whole question is the licence rate.

A worked example

A start up trains an image model on ten million photographs scraped from the internet, and sells prints of the outputs.

Training. Copies were made of protected photographs. Section 52 of the Copyright Act does not obviously permit it, and any exception India enacted would have to satisfy TRIPS Article 13.

Authorship of the output. Section 2(d)(vi) points to the person who caused the work to be created, which on one reading is the user who typed the prompt and on another the developer.

Originality of the output. Indian copyright requires originality, which is understood as the application of skill and judgment by a human author. If nobody applied it, there may be no copyright at all, and the print may be in the public domain.

munotes.in99

The Challenges of the Current Era

A photographer sues. The claim is on the training copies, not the outputs, and the answer will decide the economics of an industry.

Nothing in Module II answers any of this, and saying so is the correct examination answer, followed by an account of which instrument would have to be amended.

What it does NOT mean

These are not reasons to abolish the system. They are places where the existing categories give no clear answer.

Artificial intelligence is not a new category of intellectual property. It is a fact pattern that the existing categories must be applied to.

The internet did not make copyright unenforceable. It made enforcement expensive and transnational, which is a different problem.

Quick revision

  • Artificial intelligence: three questions, authorship (section 2(d)(vi) Copyright Act, the person who causes the work to be created), inventorship (the DABUS refusals; section 2(1)(y) Patents Act assumes a person), and training data, where any exception must pass the TRIPS Article 13 three step test.
  • Digital networks: answered by the WCT and WPPT 1996, with the communication right, technological protection measures and rights management information; India enacted sections 65A and 65B in 2012 and acceded in 2018. Enforcement across borders remains unsolved; Indian courts use dynamic injunctions.
  • 3D printing: the file is not the object, so whether transmitting it infringes is unclear under section 22 of the Designs Act and section 48 of the Patents Act, and private printing may escape.
  • Biotechnology: sections 3(c) and 3(j) of the Patents Act, TRIPS Article 27.3(b), and disclosure of source under section 10(4)(ii)(D) with approval under section 6 of the Biological Diversity Act 2002.
  • Also: traditional knowledge and standard essential patents.
  • No instrument in Module II was drafted for any of this.

Test yourself

1. What challenges does artificial intelligence pose to intellectual property law? Three, and they must be kept separate. The first is authorship: copyright in most systems presupposes a human author, and section 2(d)(vi) of the Indian Copyright Act 1957 defines the author of a computer generated literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work as the person who causes the work to be created, a formula drafted for computer assisted creation whose application to a generative model is untested in India. If no human contributed the skill and judgment that originality requires, the output may attract no copyright at all and fall into the public domain, which is an answer with large commercial consequences. The second is inventorship: applications naming an artificial intelligence system as the inventor have been refused in almost every jurisdiction on the ground that an inventor must be a natural person, and the Indian definition of the true and first inventor in section 2(1)(y) of the Patents Act, which excludes the first importer and a person to whom the invention was communicated from outside India, assumes a person throughout. The third is training: building a model requires copying protected works, which engages the reproduction right, and any national exception permitting it would have to satisfy the three step test in Article 13 of TRIPS, so a broad exception would be exposed to challenge. No instrument in the international system was drafted with any of this in view.

munotes.in100

The Challenges of the Current Era

2. How did the international system answer the challenge of digital networks, and what remains unanswered? It answered with the two treaties of 1996, the WIPO Copyright Treaty and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty, negotiated precisely because digital transmission made copying costless and made the existing rights uncertain. Their answer had three parts. A right of communication to the public, including the making available of works in such a way that members of the public may access them from a place and at a time individually chosen by them, which is the on demand right the internet required. An obligation to provide adequate legal protection and effective legal remedies against the circumvention of effective technological measures used by authors to restrict acts not authorised by them. And an obligation to protect electronic rights management information against removal or alteration. India enacted the second and third as sections 65A and 65B of the Copyright Act by the amendment of 2012 and acceded to both treaties in 2018. What remains unanswered is enforcement. An infringing server may sit in any jurisdiction, and territoriality means an Indian injunction binds nobody abroad, so Indian courts have developed dynamic injunctions reaching websites and their future mirrors, which is judicial improvisation and not treaty law.

3. Why do biotechnology and genetic resources present a challenge, and what has been done about it? Because the categories do not fit and the ownership question is contested. Patentable subject matter is genuinely uncertain at the boundary: India excludes the mere discovery of a living thing or non living substance occurring in nature under section 3(c) of the Patents Act and plants and animals in whole or in part under section 3(j), while other members grant patents over isolated sequences and over transgenic organisms, and Article 27.3(b) of TRIPS permits both positions, so there is no international standard to appeal to. Gene editing sharpens the difficulty, because an edited sequence is neither obviously a discovery nor obviously a plant, and the classification decides the outcome. Beside patentability lies the ownership of the underlying material and knowledge. The Convention on Biological Diversity of 1992 asserted sovereign rights over genetic resources and required access on prior informed consent and mutually agreed terms; the Nagoya Protocol of 2010 turned that into enforceable compliance obligations; and the WIPO Treaty on Intellectual Property, Genetic Resources and Associated Traditional Knowledge of 2024 introduced a disclosure requirement into patent law itself. India had already moved: section 10(4)(ii)(D) of the Patents Act requires disclosure of the source and geographical origin of biological material used in an invention, and section 6 of the Biological Diversity Act 2002 requires the approval of the National Biodiversity Authority before applying for a right over an invention based on Indian biological resources.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in101

Chapter Twenty-Six

The Indian Intellectual Property System

Syllabus topic 1, "Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

India has eight intellectual property statutes, three registries under one Controller General, one authority for plant varieties, and since 2021 no specialist appellate tribunal at all.

In exam wording: the Indian intellectual property system comprises eight statutes administered principally by the Office of the Controller General of Patents, Designs and Trade Marks under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade, together with the Copyright Office, the Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Authority and the National Biodiversity Authority, appeals lying since the Tribunals Reforms Act 2021 to the High Courts.

The eight statutes

The Patents Act 1970, as amended in 1999, 2002 and 2005 to give effect to TRIPS.

The Copyright Act 1957, as amended in 1994, 1999 and substantially in 2012.

The Trade Marks Act 1999, replacing the Trade and Merchandise Marks Act 1958.

The Designs Act 2000, replacing the designs half of the Indian Patents and Designs Act 1911.

The Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration and Protection) Act 1999, enacted for TRIPS Articles 22 to 24.

The Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Act 2000, for TRIPS Articles 35 to 38.

The Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act 2001, India's sui generis system under TRIPS Article 27.3(b).

The Biological Diversity Act 2002, amended in 2023, giving effect to the Convention on Biological Diversity and the Nagoya Protocol.

Undisclosed information has no statute, and that is a fact worth stating.

The offices

The Office of the Controller General of Patents, Designs and Trade Marks, at Mumbai, under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade in the Ministry of Commerce and Industry. It runs the Patent Office, the Trade Marks Registry, the Design Office and the Geographical Indications Registry at Chennai.

Patent offices at Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai and Kolkata, jurisdiction depending on the applicant's address or place of business. Kolkata is the head office.

The Copyright Office, under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade since 2016, having previously been under the Ministry of Human Resource Development.

The Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Authority at New Delhi, under the Ministry of Agriculture.

The National Biodiversity Authority at Chennai, under the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change.

The Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Registry under the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology.

The appellate structure, and the change of 2021

Until 2003 appeals from the Controller and the Registrar went to the High Courts.

The Intellectual Property Appellate Board began functioning in 2003 for trade marks and geographical indications and was given patent jurisdiction in 2007. It is the body that dismissed Novartis's appeal, and the body that heard Bayer's appeal against the Natco compulsory licence.

munotes.in102

The Indian Intellectual Property System

The Tribunals Reforms Act 2021 abolished it, along with several other tribunals, and transferred its jurisdiction back to the High Courts.

This is why MU's syllabus needs a footnote. Every one of the four intellectual property papers in Group III prints "Appellate Tribunal" or "Appellate Tribunals" as a topic, and the Board no longer exists. The honest treatment is to teach what is examinable, which is the current position, and to record what MU printed. The chapter does both.

The Delhi High Court created an Intellectual Property Division in 2021 with its own rules, which is the practical successor, though it is a division of a court and not a tribunal.

The international memberships

Paris Convention: India acceded with effect from 7 December 1998.

Patent Cooperation Treaty: 7 December 1998.

Berne Convention: India has been a party since 1928.

TRIPS: as a founding member of the World Trade Organization from 1 January 1995.

Madrid Protocol: 8 July 2013. Not the Madrid Agreement.

WIPO Copyright Treaty and WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty: 2018.

Marrakesh VIP Treaty: India was the first country to ratify, on 30 June 2014.

Not a party to: the Hague Agreement, the Lisbon Agreement, UPOV, the Patent Law Treaty, the Rome Convention, or the Brussels Satellite Convention.

A worked example

Where does a dispute go?

Refusal of a patent by the Controller. Appeal to the High Court under section 117A of the Patents Act, since 2021.

Infringement of a patent. Suit in a District Court, or in a High Court exercising ordinary original civil jurisdiction; if the defendant counter claims for revocation, section 104 requires the suit to be transferred to the High Court.

Rectification of the trade marks register. The High Court under section 57, since 2021.

A compulsory licence application. The Controller under section 84, with an appeal to the High Court.

A dispute about access to biological resources. The National Biodiversity Authority, with appeals to the National Green Tribunal under section 52A of the Biological Diversity Act.

What it does NOT mean

There is no single Indian intellectual property statute and no single office.

The Intellectual Property Appellate Board no longer exists. A candidate who describes its jurisdiction in the present tense is describing a body abolished in 2021.

Copyright registration is not compulsory, and the Copyright Office's role is therefore quite different from a patent office's.

Quick revision

  • Eight statutes: Patents 1970, Copyright 1957, Trade Marks 1999, Designs 2000, Geographical Indications 1999, Semiconductor Layout-Design 2000, Plant Varieties 2001, Biological Diversity 2002. Undisclosed information has none.
  • Offices: the Controller General of Patents, Designs and Trade Marks at Mumbai under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade, running the Patent Office (four branches, head office Kolkata), the Trade Marks Registry, the Design Office and the Geographical Indications Registry at Chennai; the Copyright Office; the Plant Varieties Authority; the National Biodiversity Authority.
  • Appeals: the Intellectual Property Appellate Board ran from 2003, took patents in 2007, and was abolished by the Tribunals Reforms Act 2021; jurisdiction is now with the High Courts, and the Delhi High Court has an Intellectual Property Division.
  • MU's syllabus prints "Appellate Tribunal" in all four intellectual property papers of this group, and that body no longer exists.
  • India is party to: Paris and the PCT (both 7 December 1998), Berne (1928), TRIPS (1995), the Madrid Protocol (8 July 2013), the WCT and WPPT (2018), and the Marrakesh VIP Treaty (first to ratify, 30 June 2014).
  • India is not party to: Hague, Lisbon, UPOV, the Patent Law Treaty, Rome, or Brussels.
munotes.in103

The Indian Intellectual Property System

Test yourself

1. Describe the institutional structure of the Indian intellectual property system. Eight statutes are administered by four principal institutions. The Office of the Controller General of Patents, Designs and Trade Marks, based at Mumbai under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade in the Ministry of Commerce and Industry, administers the Patents Act 1970 through patent offices at Kolkata, Delhi, Mumbai and Chennai with Kolkata as the head office and jurisdiction determined by the applicant's address or place of business; the Trade Marks Act 1999 through the Trade Marks Registry; the Designs Act 2000 through the Design Office; and the Geographical Indications Act 1999 through the Geographical Indications Registry at Chennai. The Copyright Office, transferred to the same Department in 2016, maintains the voluntary register under section 45 of the Copyright Act 1957. The Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Authority at New Delhi, under the Ministry of Agriculture, administers the Act of 2001. The National Biodiversity Authority at Chennai, under the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, administers the Biological Diversity Act 2002 and gives or withholds the approval that section 6 requires before an intellectual property right is sought over an invention based on Indian biological resources. The Semiconductor Integrated Circuits Layout-Design Registry sits under the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology.

2. What happened to the Intellectual Property Appellate Board, and why does it matter for this paper? It was abolished. The Board was constituted under the Trade Marks Act 1999 and began functioning in 2003 with jurisdiction over appeals and rectification in trade marks and geographical indications, and it received patent jurisdiction in 2007, in which capacity it dismissed Novartis's appeal against the refusal of the Glivec patent and heard Bayer's appeal against the compulsory licence granted to Natco. The Tribunals Reforms Act 2021 abolished it along with several other tribunals, and its jurisdiction was transferred back to the High Courts, so that an appeal from the Controller now lies to a High Court under section 117A of the Patents Act and rectification of the trade marks register is sought under section 57 in a High Court. The Delhi High Court constituted an Intellectual Property Division with its own rules, which is the practical successor although it is a division of a court rather than a tribunal. It matters for this paper because the University's printed syllabus for all four intellectual property papers of Group III lists Appellate Tribunal or Appellate Tribunals as a topic, and the body no longer exists, so the correct treatment is to teach the position as it now stands and to record what the syllabus printed, rather than either to repeat the syllabus silently or to correct it silently.

munotes.in104

The Indian Intellectual Property System

3. Which international instruments is India a party to, and which is it not? India is a party to the Berne Convention, having been bound since 1928; to the Paris Convention and to the Patent Cooperation Treaty, both with effect from 7 December 1998; to the TRIPS Agreement as a founding member of the World Trade Organization from 1 January 1995; to the Protocol relating to the Madrid Agreement concerning the international registration of marks, with effect from 8 July 2013, though not to the Madrid Agreement itself; to the WIPO Copyright Treaty and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty, both in 2018; to the Budapest Treaty; to the Convention on Biological Diversity and the Nagoya Protocol; and to the Marrakesh Treaty for the visually impaired, which India was the first country in the world to ratify, on 30 June 2014. India is not a party to the Hague Agreement on the international registration of industrial designs, to the Lisbon Agreement on appellations of origin, to the International Convention for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants, to the Patent Law Treaty, to the Rome Convention on performers, producers of phonograms and broadcasting organisations, or to the Brussels Satellite Convention. Each absence has a reason, and the reasons are examinable: India protects plant varieties by its own sui generis statute rather than by UPOV because of farmers' rights, and it protects performers and broadcasters under the Copyright Act without acceding to Rome.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in105

Module II

International Organisations and the Treaties They Administer

munotes.in

Chapter Twenty-Seven

International Organisations and Agreements: What This Module Is

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The University's printed heading for this module is an unfinished sentence, and what completes it is the paper's own title: the international organisations are WIPO and the World Trade Organization, and the agreements are the treaties they administer.

In exam wording: Module II covers the international organisations concerned with intellectual property, principally the World Intellectual Property Organization established by the Convention of 1967 and the World Trade Organization established by the Marrakesh Agreement of 1994, together with the twenty eight treaties WIPO administers and the further instruments that bear on intellectual property, including the UPOV Convention and the Convention on Biological Diversity.

What the University prints, exactly

The syllabus for this paper is Circular UG/165 of 2016-17, page 16. Under the heading GROUP III LAW OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY, and under "Paper I, Intellectual Property and International Organisations and Agreements", the four modules are printed with one numbered topic each.

Module II reads, in full: "2. International Organisation and".

That is the whole line. There is nothing after the word "and", and the module has no other topic. The transcription is in the authority base for this book so that a reader can check it.

This is not a parsing failure. The same four lines with the same break are what the published syllabus page renders, because both were cut from the same page of the same circular.

What completes the sentence, and on what authority

Three sources, and none of them is our own preference.

1. The paper's own printed title. MU heads the paper "Intellectual Property and International Organisations and Agreements". The word missing after "and" is therefore "Agreements", and the module is about organisations and agreements.

2. The eight papers the University has actually set. Across them she has asked for the objectives, functions, organs, scope, limitations and membership of WIPO on seven papers; for the origin, functions, structure, rounds and accession process of the World Trade Organization on eight; and by name for the Madrid Agreement three times, the Patent Cooperation Treaty twice, the Budapest Agreement, the Lisbon Agreement, the Rome Convention, the Paris Convention, the Berne Convention and copyright and related treaties.

3. WIPO's own statement of what it administers. WIPO states that it administers twenty eight treaties including the WIPO Convention, and names each of them.

So the module is not guessed. Its boundary is declared once, in this book's coverage contract, and every treaty in it is proved article by article against its own text before a single chapter is written.

What this module contains

Two organisations, taught as organisations. WIPO: why it was needed, what it does, how a State joins, what its organs are, and what it cannot do. The World Trade Organization: where it came from, what it does, how a State joins, and how a TRIPS dispute travels through it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in106

The rest of this chapter

Module one is free. The rest of this chapter comes with the LL.M. Intellectual Property and Information Technology Semester 1 notes.

You are reading a chapter from a later module. Everything in module one of every subject stays free, and so does every question paper and the syllabus.

Notes + Solved papers: ₹798 Already bought it? Sign in

Or notes only: ₹499
Or solved papers only: ₹499

Free either way: question papers, the syllabus, and module one of every subject.

Chapter Twenty-Eight

Why an International System Became Necessary: Vienna, 1873

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

An international exhibition in Vienna in 1873 could not attract foreign inventors, because showing an invention abroad destroyed the chance of patenting it there, and the machinery of Module II grew out of that one practical problem.

In exam wording: the international system for the protection of intellectual property originated in the recognition that the strictly territorial character of national rights obstructed international trade and exhibition, the immediate occasion being the Vienna World Exhibition of 1873, from which followed the Vienna Congress of 1873, the Paris Congress of 1878 and the Paris Convention of 1883.

The problem, in 1873

Rights were territorial then as now, but there was no priority period, no national treatment obligation and no way to file abroad without doing it at once.

Three practical consequences.

Publication destroyed novelty everywhere. An inventor who exhibited a machine in Vienna had published it, so a patent could no longer be obtained in any country that had not already granted one.

Foreigners were treated worse than nationals, deliberately. Many countries either refused patents to foreigners or imposed extra conditions.

Filing abroad had to be simultaneous. With no priority period, an inventor who filed in France on Monday and in Belgium on Friday could be defeated by the Monday publication of the French application.

And the incident that made it political. The Austro-Hungarian government invited the world to the Vienna World Exhibition of 1873, and foreign exhibitors, particularly from the United States, refused to come because their inventions would be unprotected.

What was done about it

Austria passed a temporary law giving foreign exhibitors protection for their inventions, trade marks and designs shown at the exhibition. That is the direct ancestor of Article 11 of the Paris Convention, which requires countries of the Union to grant temporary protection to patentable inventions, utility models, industrial designs and marks in respect of goods exhibited at official or officially recognised international exhibitions.

The Congress of Vienna for Patent Reform, 1873. It resolved that the protection of inventions should be guaranteed by the laws of all civilised nations, and it called for an international understanding.

The International Congress on Industrial Property, Paris, 1878. It resolved that an international union should be created and asked the French government to convene a diplomatic conference.

A draft was prepared in 1880 and the diplomatic conference of 1883 adopted it. The Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property was signed on 20 March 1883 by eleven States and entered into force on 7 July 1884.

Copyright followed the same road three years later. The Association Littéraire et Artistique Internationale, founded in 1878 with Victor Hugo as its president, pressed for a convention, and the Berne Convention was concluded on 9 September 1886.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in110

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Twenty-Nine

The Paris Convention 1883: The Union It Creates

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Paris Convention creates a Union of States that agree to treat each other's nationals as their own in industrial property, and its first article defines industrial property much more widely than the name suggests.

In exam wording: the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property of 20 March 1883, last revised at Stockholm on 14 July 1967 and amended on 28 September 1979, constitutes the countries to which it applies into a Union for the protection of industrial property, Article 1 defining the objects of that protection and Articles 19 to 30 governing special agreements, ratification, accession, territories, denunciation, disputes and transitional matters.

Article 1: the Union and what it covers

Article 1(1): the countries to which this Convention applies constitute a Union for the protection of industrial property.

Article 1(2) is the definition, and it is wider than the phrase suggests. The protection of industrial property has as its object patents, utility models, industrial designs, trademarks, service marks, trade names, indications of source or appellations of origin, and the repression of unfair competition.

Two things in that list surprise students. Trade names are there, and they need no registration under Article 8. And the repression of unfair competition is there, which is why Article 10bis exists and why TRIPS Article 39 on trade secrets can be built on it.

Article 1(3) is the widening clause: industrial property shall be understood in the broadest sense, and shall apply not only to industry and commerce proper but likewise to agricultural and extractive industries and to all manufactured or natural products, for example wines, grain, tobacco leaf, fruit, cattle, minerals, mineral waters, beer, flowers and flour.

Article 1(4): patents include the various kinds of industrial patents recognised by the laws of the countries of the Union, such as patents of importation, patents of improvement, patents and certificates of addition.

Article 19: special agreements

Article 19: it is understood that the countries of the Union reserve the right to make separately between themselves special agreements for the protection of industrial property, in so far as these agreements do not contravene the provisions of this Convention.

This one sentence is the constitutional basis of most of Module II. The Madrid Agreement, the Madrid Protocol, the Hague Agreement, the Nice Agreement, the Patent Cooperation Treaty, the Budapest Treaty, the Trademark Law Treaty and the Patent Law Treaty are all special agreements within Article 19.

Berne has its own equivalent in Article 20, and it is the basis of the WIPO Copyright Treaty.

Articles 20 to 24: joining and territory

Article 20: ratification or accession by countries of the Union, and entry into force three months after notification, subject to declarations.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in114

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty

Paris: National Treatment, Articles 2 and 3

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

National treatment means a country must give the nationals of other member countries exactly what it gives its own, no more and no less.

In exam wording: national treatment, established by Article 2 of the Paris Convention and extended by Article 3, requires each country of the Union to grant to nationals of other countries of the Union the same protection and the same legal remedy against infringement as it grants to its own nationals, without any condition of domicile or establishment, subject only to the express reservation of national provisions on judicial and administrative procedure, jurisdiction and the designation of an address for service.

Article 2, clause by clause

Article 2(1): nationals of any country of the Union shall, as regards the protection of industrial property, enjoy in all the other countries of the Union the advantages that their respective laws now grant, or may hereafter grant, to nationals; all without prejudice to the rights specially provided for by this Convention. Consequently, they shall have the same protection as nationals, and the same legal remedy against any infringement of their rights, provided that the conditions and formalities imposed upon nationals are complied with.

Read that sentence twice, because three things are in it.

"The advantages that their respective laws now grant, or may hereafter grant": the obligation is dynamic, so an improvement a country makes for its own nationals must be extended to foreigners automatically.

"Without prejudice to the rights specially provided for by this Convention": national treatment is a floor and the Convention's own minimum rules sit on top of it.

"Provided that the conditions and formalities imposed upon nationals are complied with": a foreigner must follow the same rules, so no exemption from fees, deadlines or forms.

Article 2(2) is the provision that made the obligation real: no requirement as to domicile or establishment in the country where protection is claimed may be imposed upon nationals of countries of the Union for the enjoyment of any industrial property rights.

Why that mattered in 1883. Several countries required a foreign applicant to have a domicile or a business establishment locally, which for a small inventor was a prohibition dressed as a formality. Article 2(2) removed it.

Article 2(3) is the reservation, and it must be quoted with the rule. The provisions of the laws of each of the countries of the Union relating to judicial and administrative procedure and to jurisdiction, and to the designation of an address for service or the appointment of an agent, which may be required by the laws on industrial property, are expressly reserved.

So a country may require a foreigner to appoint a local agent and to give an address for service, and India does: rule 5 of the Patents Rules requires an address for service in India.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in118

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-One

Paris: The Right of Priority, Article 4

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Filing in one member country buys you twelve months, or six for marks and designs, in which to file in all the others and be treated as though you had filed everywhere on the first day.

In exam wording: the right of priority under Article 4 of the Paris Convention entitles a person who has duly filed an application for a patent, a utility model, an industrial design or a trademark in one country of the Union, or that person's successor in title, to file in the other countries of the Union within twelve months for patents and utility models and six months for industrial designs and trademarks, such subsequent filing being treated as if it had been made on the date of the first filing.

Why the law has this at all

Because without it, filing abroad had to be simultaneous. An inventor who filed in France on Monday and Belgium on Friday could be defeated in Belgium by the publication of the French application, or by a third party who filed in Belgium on Wednesday.

And because deciding where to file costs money and takes time. Translations, foreign agents, official fees. Twelve months is time to raise the money, find a licensee, or discover that the invention is worthless.

It is the reason the Vienna problem of 1873 was solved, and it is the single provision practitioners use most often.

The provision, article by article

Article 4A(1): any person who has duly filed an application for a patent, or for the registration of a utility model, or of an industrial design, or of a trademark, in one of the countries of the Union, or his successor in title, shall enjoy, for the purpose of filing in the other countries, a right of priority during the periods hereinafter fixed.

Article 4A(2): any filing that is equivalent to a regular national filing under the domestic legislation of any country of the Union or under bilateral or multilateral treaties concluded between countries of the Union shall be recognised as giving rise to the right of priority. This is what makes a Patent Cooperation Treaty international application a priority founding filing.

Article 4A(3): a regular national filing means any filing that is adequate to establish the date on which the application was filed in the country concerned, whatever may be the subsequent fate of the application. So an application that is later abandoned or refused still founds priority.

Article 4C(1): the periods are twelve months for patents and utility models and six months for industrial designs and trademarks.

Article 4C(2): the periods start from the date of filing of the first application, and the day of filing is not included.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in122

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Two

Paris: Independence of Patents, Working and Compulsory Licences, Articles 4bis, 5 and 6

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

A patent granted in one country is legally unconnected to a patent for the same invention anywhere else, and a country may attack a patentee who does not work the invention but may not simply take the patent away.

In exam wording: Article 4bis establishes the independence of patents obtained in different countries of the Union as regards grounds of nullity, forfeiture and duration; Article 5 governs importation, working, compulsory licences, the grace period for maintenance fees, industrial designs, marks and the marking of goods; and Article 6 establishes the independence of marks and the freedom of each country to fix its own conditions of filing and registration.

Article 4bis: independence of patents

Article 4bis(1): patents applied for in the various countries of the Union by nationals of countries of the Union shall be independent of patents obtained for the same invention in other countries, whether members of the Union or not.

Article 4bis(2): the foregoing provision is to be understood in an unrestricted sense, in particular in the sense that patents applied for during the period of priority are independent, both as regards the grounds for nullity and forfeiture, and as regards their normal duration.

Article 4bis(3): it applies to all patents existing at the time when it comes into effect.

Article 4bis(4): it applies in the case of accession, to patents existing on either side at the time of accession.

Article 4bis(5): patents obtained with the benefit of priority shall, in the various countries of the Union, have a duration equal to that which they would have had if applied for or granted without the benefit of priority. So the priority claim does not shorten the term.

Why this matters. Before 1883 some countries provided that a domestic patent lapsed when the foreign patent for the same invention lapsed, so an inventor lost a domestic right through a foreign accident. Article 4bis abolished that.

Article 5: the balance between the patentee and the State

Article 5A(1): importation by the patentee into the country where the patent has been granted of articles manufactured in any of the countries of the Union shall not entail forfeiture of the patent.

Article 5A(2): each country of the Union shall have the right to take legislative measures providing for the grant of compulsory licences to prevent the abuses which might result from the exercise of the exclusive rights conferred by the patent, for example failure to work.

Article 5A(3): forfeiture of the patent shall not be provided for except in cases where the grant of compulsory licences would not have been sufficient to prevent the abuses, and no proceedings for forfeiture or revocation may be instituted before the expiration of two years from the grant of the first compulsory licence.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in127

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Three

Paris: Well Known Marks, State Emblems and the Special Marks, Articles 6bis to 9

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

A mark can be protected in a country where it was never registered if it is well known there, State emblems and official signs are protected without any registration at all, and a trade name needs no filing anywhere.

In exam wording: Articles 6bis to 9 of the Paris Convention require the protection of well known marks against reproduction, imitation or translation liable to create confusion; the refusal and invalidation of marks reproducing State emblems, official signs and the emblems of intergovernmental organisations under Article 6ter; the protection of the proprietor against an agent registering the mark in its own name under Article 6septies; the protection of trade names without registration under Article 8; and the seizure of goods unlawfully bearing a mark or trade name under Article 9.

Article 6bis: well known marks

Article 6bis(1): the countries of the Union undertake, ex officio if their legislation so permits, or at the request of an interested party, to refuse or to cancel the registration, and to prohibit the use, of a trademark which constitutes a reproduction, an imitation, or a translation, liable to create confusion, of a mark considered by the competent authority of the country of registration or use to be well known in that country as being already the mark of a person entitled to the benefits of this Convention and used for identical or similar goods.

Three features of that sentence.

Registration is not required in the protecting country. The mark must be well known there, not registered there. This is the single largest departure from territoriality in the Convention.

"Reproduction, imitation or translation". The translation limb matters in India, where a mark may be transliterated into another script.

"Identical or similar goods". Paris confines Article 6bis to similar goods; TRIPS Article 16.3 extends it to dissimilar goods, provided use would indicate a connection and the interests of the owner would be damaged.

Article 6bis(2): a period of at least five years from the date of registration shall be allowed for requesting cancellation, and countries may fix a period for prohibiting use.

Article 6bis(3): no time limit shall be fixed for requesting the cancellation or the prohibition of the use of marks registered or used in bad faith.

Indian enactment. Sections 11(6) to 11(9) of the Trade Marks Act 1999 set out the factors for determining whether a mark is well known and, in section 11(9), the conditions that may not be required: that the mark has been used in India, that it has been registered, that an application has been filed in India, that it is well known in any jurisdiction other than India, or that it is well known to the public at large in India.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in132

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Four

Paris: False Indications and Unfair Competition, Articles 10 to 12

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Convention closes with the obligations that are not about registered rights at all: it forbids false indications of source, requires effective protection against unfair competition, and requires every member to run a patent office.

In exam wording: Articles 10 to 12 of the Paris Convention require seizure of goods bearing a false indication of source or of the identity of the producer, effective protection against unfair competition as defined in Article 10bis, appropriate legal remedies and standing for interested associations under Article 10ter, temporary protection for goods exhibited at official international exhibitions under Article 11, and the establishment by each country of a special industrial property service and a central office under Article 12.

Article 10: false indications of source

Article 10(1): the provisions of Article 9 shall apply in cases of direct or indirect use of a false indication of the source of the goods or the identity of the producer, manufacturer or merchant.

Article 10(2): any producer, manufacturer or merchant engaged in the production, manufacture or trade in such goods and established either in the locality falsely indicated as the source, or in the region where that locality is situated, or in the country falsely indicated, or in the country where the false indication of source is used, shall in any case be deemed an interested party.

Why it matters here. This is the seed from which the whole law of geographical indications grew, through the Madrid Agreement on false indications of 1891, the Lisbon Agreement of 1958, and finally TRIPS Articles 22 to 24.

Article 10bis: unfair competition

Article 10bis(1): the countries of the Union are bound to assure to nationals of such countries effective protection against unfair competition.

Article 10bis(2): any act of competition contrary to honest practices in industrial or commercial matters constitutes an act of unfair competition.

Article 10bis(3): the following in particular shall be prohibited:

(1) all acts of such a nature as to create confusion by any means whatever with the establishment, the goods, or the industrial or commercial activities of a competitor;

(2) false allegations in the course of trade of such a nature as to discredit the establishment, the goods, or the industrial or commercial activities of a competitor;

(3) indications or allegations the use of which in the course of trade is liable to mislead the public as to the nature, the manufacturing process, the characteristics, the suitability for their purpose, or the quantity, of the goods.

Two things follow that a candidate should say.

The list is illustrative, not exhaustive. The words "in particular" mean that any act contrary to honest practices qualifies, and the three named classes are examples.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in138

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Five

Paris: How the Union Is Administered, Articles 13 to 18

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Paris Union has an Assembly of its members, an Executive Committee, and a secretariat that is the International Bureau of WIPO, and the administrative articles can be amended by the Assembly while the substantive ones can be changed only by a diplomatic conference.

In exam wording: Articles 13 to 17 of the Paris Convention establish the Assembly of the Union, the Executive Committee, the International Bureau and the finances of the Union, and provide for amendment of Articles 13 to 17 by the Assembly, Article 18 reserving revision of Articles 1 to 12 and 18 to 30 to a conference of representatives of the countries of the Union.

Why the Convention has these articles at all

Because a Union needs a body that can act. Somebody has to publish, to collect contributions, to convene conferences and to keep the register of accessions.

And because the substantive articles were unamendable in practice. Every revision of Articles 1 to 12 needed a diplomatic conference and unanimity, and the last one was at Stockholm in 1967. The Stockholm Act created a machinery that could adapt without one, and the amendment of 1979 used it.

Article 13: the Assembly

Article 13(1)(a): the Union shall have an Assembly consisting of those countries of the Union which are bound by Articles 13 to 17.

Article 13(2)(a) sets out the tasks. The Assembly deals with all matters concerning the maintenance and development of the Union and the implementation of the Convention; gives directions to the International Bureau concerning revision conferences; reviews and approves the reports and activities of the Director General concerning the Union; elects the members of the Executive Committee; reviews and approves the Executive Committee's reports; determines the programme and adopts the biennial budget of the Union and approves its final accounts; adopts the financial regulations; establishes such committees and working groups as it considers appropriate; determines which countries not members of the Union and which intergovernmental and international non governmental organisations shall be admitted as observers; adopts amendments to Articles 13 to 17; takes any other appropriate action designed to further the objectives of the Union; and performs such other functions as are appropriate under the Convention.

Article 13(3): each country has one vote.

Article 13(4): the Assembly meets in ordinary session once every two years, convened by the Director General, and in extraordinary session on the request of the Executive Committee or of one fourth of the member countries.

Article 13(5): one half of the countries members of the Assembly constitutes a quorum, with a mechanism allowing decisions taken with a smaller quorum to become effective if enough countries later communicate their vote in writing.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in143

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Six

The Berne Convention 1886: The Union and Its Acts

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Berne Convention creates a Union of States that protect each other's authors automatically, without registration, and it has been revised seven times since 1886.

In exam wording: the Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works of 9 September 1886, last revised at Paris on 24 July 1971 and amended on 28 September 1979, constitutes the countries to which it applies into a Union for the protection of the rights of authors in their literary and artistic works, Article 1 establishing the Union and Articles 27 to 38 governing revision, acceptance of Acts, denunciation, disputes and transitional matters.

Article 1 and the shape of the Convention

Article 1: the countries to which this Convention applies constitute a Union for the protection of the rights of authors in their literary and artistic works.

Note what is different from Paris. Paris Article 1(1) speaks of the protection of industrial property; Berne Article 1 speaks of the protection of the rights of authors. The subject of the Berne Union is a person, not a category of property, and that difference runs through the whole instrument and produces moral rights.

The seven Acts, and why they matter

Berne 1886, the original.

Paris Additional Act 1896.

Berlin 1908, which introduced the rule against formalities and the term of life plus fifty.

Berne Additional Protocol 1914.

Rome 1928, which introduced moral rights in Article 6bis. India was bound from this Act.

Brussels 1948.

Stockholm 1967, whose substantive provisions never came into force, its Protocol Regarding Developing Countries having been rejected.

Paris 1971, the Act now in force, which replaced the Stockholm Protocol with the Appendix.

Amended 28 September 1979.

Why the Stockholm failure matters. The Protocol Regarding Developing Countries would have permitted much wider compulsory licensing for translation and reproduction. The industrialised countries would not accept it, and the compromise reached at Paris in 1971 is the Appendix, whose conditions are so demanding that almost nobody has used it. That is worked in [Berne: The Appendix for Developing Countries, Article 21 and Articles I to VI].

Articles 27 to 32: revision and the relationship between Acts

Article 27(1): this Convention shall be submitted to revision with a view to the introduction of amendments designed to improve the system of the Union.

Article 27(2): for this purpose, conferences shall be held successively in one of the countries of the Union among the delegates of the said countries.

Article 27(3): amendments to Articles 22 to 26, the administrative articles, are governed by Article 26, and revision of the rest requires unanimity of the votes cast.

Unanimity, not a majority. That is why Berne has not been revised since 1971, and why the WIPO Copyright Treaty of 1996 had to be made as a special agreement under Article 20 instead.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in148

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Berne: Protected Works and the Points of Attachment, Articles 2 to 5

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Berne protects every production in the literary, scientific and artistic domain whatever its form, gives an author of one member country the same protection in every other, and forbids any registration requirement.

In exam wording: Articles 2 to 5 of the Berne Convention define the protected works, permit certain optional exclusions, establish the points of attachment by which an author becomes entitled to protection, and lay down the principles of national treatment, automatic protection and independence of protection, Article 5(2) providing that the enjoyment and exercise of the rights shall not be subject to any formality.

Article 2: what is protected

Article 2(1) is one of the most quoted sentences in international law. The expression literary and artistic works shall include every production in the literary, scientific and artistic domain, whatever may be the mode or form of its expression, such as books, pamphlets and other writings; lectures, addresses, sermons and other works of the same nature; dramatic or dramatico musical works; choreographic works and entertainments in dumb show; musical compositions with or without words; cinematographic works to which are assimilated works expressed by a process analogous to cinematography; works of drawing, painting, architecture, sculpture, engraving and lithography; photographic works to which are assimilated works expressed by a process analogous to photography; works of applied art; illustrations, maps, plans, sketches and three dimensional works relative to geography, topography, architecture or science.

"Every production" and "whatever may be the mode or form" make the list illustrative. That is why computer programs could be protected as literary works without amending the Convention, and TRIPS Article 10.1 says so expressly.

Article 2(2) is optional: it is a matter for legislation in the countries of the Union to prescribe that works in general, or any specified categories, shall not be protected unless they have been fixed in some material form. India requires fixation for some categories and not for others.

Article 2(3): translations, adaptations, arrangements of music and other alterations of a literary or artistic work shall be protected as original works without prejudice to the copyright in the original work.

Article 2(4): it is a matter for legislation to determine the protection to be granted to official texts of a legislative, administrative and legal nature, and to official translations of them. This is the provision that permits section 52(1)(q) of the Indian Copyright Act, which is what makes it lawful for this book to reproduce statutes and judgments.

Article 2(5): collections of literary or artistic works which by reason of the selection and arrangement of their contents constitute intellectual creations shall be protected as such, without prejudice to the copyright in each of the works. TRIPS Article 10.2 extends the same to compilations of data.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in152

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Eight

Berne: Moral Rights and the Term of Protection, Articles 6bis and 7

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

An author keeps the right to be named as author and to object to mutilation of the work even after selling the copyright, and the minimum term everywhere is the author's life and fifty years.

In exam wording: Article 6bis of the Berne Convention confers on the author, independently of the economic rights and even after their transfer, the right to claim authorship of the work and to object to any distortion, mutilation or other modification of, or other derogatory action in relation to, the work which would be prejudicial to his honour or reputation; and Article 7 fixes the minimum term of protection at the life of the author and fifty years after his death, with special rules for cinematographic, anonymous, pseudonymous, photographic and applied art works.

Article 6: works of nationals of countries outside the Union

Article 6(1) is the retaliation provision, and it is easy to confuse with 6bis. Where a country outside the Union fails to protect in an adequate manner the works of authors who are nationals of a country of the Union, the latter country may restrict the protection given to works whose authors are, at the date of first publication, nationals of the other country and are not habitually resident in a country of the Union.

Article 6(2): no such restriction shall affect rights acquired in respect of a work published before the restriction came into force.

Article 6(3): countries restricting protection shall notify the Director General, who shall communicate the fact to all countries of the Union.

Article 6bis: moral rights

Article 6bis(1): independently of the author's economic rights, and even after the transfer of the said rights, the author shall have the right to claim authorship of the work and to object to any distortion, mutilation or other modification of, or other derogatory action in relation to, the said work, which would be prejudicial to his honour or reputation.

Two rights, and both must be named. The right of attribution or paternity, and the right of integrity.

Article 6bis(2): the rights shall, after the author's death, be maintained at least until the expiry of the economic rights and shall be exercisable by the persons or institutions authorised by national legislation. A country whose legislation at the time of ratification did not provide for post mortem protection of all those rights may provide that some cease on death.

Article 6bis(3): the means of redress are governed by the legislation of the country where protection is claimed.

Where it came from. Moral rights entered the Convention at the Rome revision of 1928, under the influence of the French and German droit moral tradition, and they are the clearest sign that Berne protects an author rather than a category of property.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in157

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Nine

Berne: The Economic Rights, Articles 8 to 14ter

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Berne gives an author the rights of translation, reproduction, public performance, broadcasting, recitation, adaptation and cinematographic exploitation, and lets each country carve out narrow exceptions on conditions that became the three step test.

In exam wording: Articles 8 to 14ter of the Berne Convention confer the exclusive rights of translation, reproduction, public performance, broadcasting and communication to the public, public recitation, adaptation and arrangement, and cinematographic adaptation and reproduction, together with the resale right in Article 14ter, subject to the exceptions those articles permit and to the general condition in Article 9(2).

Article 8: translation

Article 8: authors of literary and artistic works protected by this Convention shall enjoy the exclusive right of making and of authorising the translation of their works throughout the term of protection of their rights in the original works.

Why it is first. Translation was the first right that international copyright had to address, because a book crossing a border arrives in another language, and the earliest bilateral treaties of the nineteenth century were about translation.

Article 9: reproduction, and the three step test

Article 9(1): authors shall have the exclusive right of authorising the reproduction of these works, in any manner or form.

Article 9(2) is the most important sentence in international copyright limitations. It shall be a matter for legislation in the countries of the Union to permit the reproduction of such works in certain special cases, provided that such reproduction does not conflict with a normal exploitation of the work and does not unreasonably prejudice the legitimate interests of the author.

Three steps, and they are cumulative. Certain special cases. No conflict with normal exploitation. No unreasonable prejudice to legitimate interests.

Article 9(3): any sound or visual recording shall be considered as a reproduction.

What TRIPS did with it. TRIPS Article 13 generalises the three conditions from the reproduction right to all exclusive rights and all works, and the WTO panel in United States: Section 110(5) of US Copyright Act is the leading interpretation.

Facts. Section 110(5) of the United States Copyright Act exempted small businesses from paying royalties for playing radio and television music on their premises. The European Communities complained that the exemption breached TRIPS Article 9.1 read with Berne Articles 11bis(1)(iii) and 11(1)(ii). The dispute is WT/DS160.

Held. The panel report was circulated on 15 June 2000 and adopted on 27 July 2000. Applying the three step test in TRIPS Article 13, the panel found the business exemption in subparagraph (B) inconsistent with it, while the narrower homestyle exemption in subparagraph (A) satisfied the test.

Why it matters. Every national exception, including the whole of section 52 of the Indian Copyright Act, has to fit inside those three conditions, and this is the only case that has construed them.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in162

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty

Berne: Redress, Seizure, Retroactivity and Special Agreements, Articles 15 to 20

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

An author whose name appears on a work is presumed to be the author, infringing copies may be seized, a country may not use morality as a cover for censorship of foreign works alone, and works still protected somewhere when a country joins do not fall into the public domain by the joining.

In exam wording: Articles 15 to 20 of the Berne Convention establish presumptions as to authorship and as to the maker of a cinematographic work, require the seizure of infringing copies, preserve national powers of control over circulation on grounds of public order, apply the Convention to works not yet in the public domain at its entry into force, permit greater protection under national law, and reserve the right of countries to make special agreements.

Article 15: presumptions

Article 15(1): in order that the author of a literary or artistic work protected by this Convention shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be regarded as such and consequently be entitled to institute infringement proceedings, it shall be sufficient for his name to appear on the work in the usual manner. This applies even if the name is a pseudonym, where the pseudonym adopted leaves no doubt as to identity.

Why it matters. Because there is no register, an author would otherwise have to prove authorship from scratch in every case. The presumption is what makes copyright litigation practicable, and section 55(2) of the Indian Copyright Act is the domestic equivalent.

Article 15(2): the person whose name appears on a cinematographic work in the usual manner shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be the maker.

Article 15(3): for anonymous and pseudonymous works other than those in 15(1), the publisher whose name appears on the work shall be deemed to represent the author and to be entitled to protect and enforce the author's rights, the presumption ceasing when the author reveals his identity.

Article 15(4) is the folklore provision, and it matters for Module IV. For unpublished works where the identity of the author is unknown but there is every ground to presume that he is a national of a country of the Union, that country may designate a competent authority to represent the author and to protect and enforce his rights, and shall notify the Director General.

Article 16: seizure

Article 16(1): infringing copies of a work shall be liable to seizure in any country of the Union where the work enjoys legal protection.

Article 16(2): the provisions of paragraph 1 shall also apply to reproductions coming from a country where the work is not protected, or has ceased to be protected.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in167

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-One

Berne: The Appendix for Developing Countries, Article 21 and Articles I to VI

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Berne Appendix lets a developing country grant compulsory licences to translate and to reproduce foreign works for teaching and research, on conditions so demanding that the machinery has been used almost never.

In exam wording: Article 21 of the Berne Convention brings in an Appendix which forms an integral part of the Convention and which permits a country regarded as a developing country in conformity with the practice of the General Assembly of the United Nations to substitute, by declaration, compulsory licences for the exclusive rights of translation under Article II and of reproduction under Article III, subject to the conditions in Articles I to VI.

Why this Appendix exists

Because of the failure of the Stockholm Protocol. At the Stockholm revision conference of 1967 the developing countries obtained a Protocol Regarding Developing Countries which would have permitted wide compulsory licensing for translation and reproduction, shorter terms and broad teaching exceptions.

The industrialised countries refused to ratify. The result was that the substantive provisions of the Stockholm Act never entered into force at all, and the Union faced the prospect of a split.

The Paris revision of 1971 was the compromise. The Protocol was withdrawn and replaced by this Appendix, which grants the same kinds of licence but hedges them with conditions.

And the immediate context was the alternative forum. UNESCO administered the Universal Copyright Convention, to which many developing countries were party, and there was a real prospect of countries leaving Berne for it. The Appendix and the parallel amendment of the Universal Copyright Convention in 1971 were negotiated together.

The Appendix, article by article

Article I(1): any country regarded as a developing country in conformity with the established practice of the General Assembly of the United Nations may, by a notification deposited with the Director General at the time of ratification or accession or at any later time, declare that it will avail itself of the faculty provided for in Article II, in Article III, or in both.

Article I(2): any such declaration is effective for ten years from the entry into force of the Paris Act, or for the balance of that period, and is renewable for further ten year periods.

Article I(3) and I(5): a country that ceases to be regarded as a developing country loses the faculty, but a declaration remains effective for a defined transitional period.

Article II is the translation licence. Any country that has declared under Article I may substitute for the exclusive right of translation in Article 8 a system of non exclusive and non transferable licences, granted by the competent authority, to translate a work into a language in general use in that country and to publish the translation in printed or analogous forms of reproduction, for the purpose of teaching, scholarship or research.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in172

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Two

Berne: How the Union Is Administered, Articles 22 to 26

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Berne Union has the same administrative machinery as the Paris Union, run by the same International Bureau, and its administrative articles can be amended by its Assembly while its substantive articles cannot.

In exam wording: Articles 22 to 26 of the Berne Convention establish the Assembly of the Union, the Executive Committee, the International Bureau, the finances of the Union and the procedure for amending Articles 22 to 26, the substantive provisions being revisable only by a conference under Article 27 and only by unanimity.

The design point first

The Stockholm Act of 1967 gave Berne and Paris identical machinery on purpose, so that one Organization could serve both Unions. The chapter on the administration of the Paris Convention sets that machinery out article by article. This chapter therefore states what Berne has, names the three places where the wording differs, and does not repeat the Paris text.

Articles 22 to 26 in outline

Article 22, the Assembly, consisting of those countries of the Union bound by Articles 22 to 26, each with one vote, meeting in ordinary session once every second calendar year, with a quorum of one half and decisions by a two thirds majority of the votes cast. Its tasks are those of the Paris Assembly: the maintenance and development of the Union and the implementation of the Convention, directions to the International Bureau on revision conferences, review and approval of the Director General's reports, election of and review of the Executive Committee, the programme and biennial budget and final accounts, the financial regulations, committees of experts and working groups, admission of observers, amendment of Articles 22 to 26, and any other appropriate action.

Article 23, the Executive Committee, elected by the Assembly from among its members, with the country hosting the Organization holding an ex officio seat, its number corresponding to one fourth of the members of the Assembly, elected with due regard to equitable geographical distribution and to the representation of countries party to the special agreements made in relation with the Union. It prepares the Assembly's draft agenda, submits proposals on the draft programme and budget, submits periodical reports and accounts, and takes the measures necessary to execute the programme, meeting once a year, preferably alongside the Coordination Committee.

Article 24, the International Bureau, performing the administrative tasks, providing the secretariat of the organs of the Union, with the Director General as chief executive; assembling and publishing information on the protection of copyright, each country communicating its new laws promptly; publishing a monthly periodical; furnishing information on request; and conducting studies and providing services.

Article 25, finance, with the contribution classes running from class I at twenty five units to class VII at one unit at the time of the Paris Act, each country choosing its class on accession and free to change it, contributions due on the first of January, and a country whose arrears equal or exceed two full years' contributions losing its vote unless the organ is satisfied that the delay results from exceptional and unavoidable circumstances.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in177

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Three

BIRPI and the Road to Stockholm

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Paris and Berne Conventions each created a small bureau, the two were merged in 1893, the merged office moved from Berne to Geneva in 1960, and in 1967 it became the World Intellectual Property Organization.

In exam wording: the World Intellectual Property Organization is the institutional successor of the Bureaux established by the Paris Convention of 1883 and the Berne Convention of 1886, which were united in 1893 as the United International Bureaux for the Protection of Intellectual Property, known by the French abbreviation BIRPI, and which were transformed by the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization, signed at Stockholm on 14 July 1967 and in force from 26 April 1970.

The two bureaux

Paris 1883 created a bureau. Article 13 of the original Convention provided for an International Office under the high authority of the Swiss government.

Berne 1886 created another. The same arrangement, in Berne, under the same Swiss supervision.

Both were tiny. Their work was to publish a periodical, to receive notifications of accession, to collect and distribute national laws, and to prepare revision conferences. In their first years each had a handful of staff.

Why Switzerland. Because it was neutral, because it was central, and because neither France nor Germany would accept the other as the depositary of the other Union's bureau.

The union of 1893

The two offices were combined into a single administration in 1893, under the name that in French is Bureaux Internationaux Réunis pour la Protection de la Propriété Intellectuelle, abbreviated BIRPI.

It stayed in Berne until 1960, when it moved to Geneva, to be near the United Nations and the specialised agencies.

What BIRPI could and could not do. It could administer, publish and convene. It could not decide anything, could not enforce anything, and had no membership of its own separate from the two Unions.

Why an organisation was needed

Four reasons, and each is examinable.

1. There were two Unions and one secretariat, and no single body could speak for both. A country could be a member of Paris, of Berne, of both, or of neither, and there was no forum in which intellectual property as a whole could be discussed.

2. The special agreements had multiplied. Madrid 1891, Madrid Protocol on false indications 1891, Hague 1925, Nice 1957, Lisbon 1958. Each had its own union, its own assembly and its own membership, all administered by the same office.

3. The United Nations system had been created and BIRPI was outside it. UNESCO administered the Universal Copyright Convention of 1952 and was making a claim to the copyright field; the International Labour Organization had an interest in performers. Without a proper organisation, intellectual property risked being absorbed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in182

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Four

The Convention Establishing WIPO, 1967

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Convention Establishing WIPO creates an organisation to promote the protection of intellectual property throughout the world and to ensure administrative cooperation among the Unions, and its own definition of intellectual property is the widest in international law.

In exam wording: the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization, signed at Stockholm on 14 July 1967 and amended on 28 September 1979, establishes by Article 1 the World Intellectual Property Organization, defines in Article 2 the terms used including intellectual property in Article 2(viii), and provides in Articles 20 and 21 for ratification, accession and entry into force, the Convention having entered into force on 26 April 1970.

Article 1: establishment

Article 1: the World Intellectual Property Organization is hereby established.

Four words, and everything else follows from them. Until 1967 there was no organisation, only two Unions and a joint secretariat.

Article 2: the definitions

Article 2 defines nine terms, and three of them are worth quoting.

Article 2(i): "Organization" shall mean the World Intellectual Property Organization.

Article 2(iii): "Paris Union" shall mean the Union established by the Paris Convention. Article 2(iv): "Berne Union" shall mean the Union established by the Berne Convention.

Article 2(v): "Unions" shall mean the Paris Union, the Special Unions and Agreements established in relation with that Union, the Berne Union, and any other international agreement designed to promote the protection of intellectual property whose administration is assumed by the Organization according to Article 4(iii).

Article 2(viii) is the definition that matters. "Intellectual property" shall include the rights relating to:

literary, artistic and scientific works;

performances of performing artists, phonograms, and broadcasts;

inventions in all fields of human endeavour;

scientific discoveries;

industrial designs;

trademarks, service marks, and commercial names and designations;

protection against unfair competition;

and all other rights resulting from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary or artistic fields.

Three observations a good answer makes.

It is open ended. The last limb means a right that does not yet exist can fall inside the definition, and the GRATK Treaty of 2024 is an illustration.

It includes scientific discoveries, which no national patent law protects and which section 3(c) of the Indian Patents Act expressly excludes. The Geneva Treaty on the International Recording of Scientific Discoveries of 1978 was made to give them a home and it never entered into force.

It includes protection against unfair competition, which is not a right in anybody but an obligation on States, carried over from Paris Article 1(2).

Articles 20 and 21: joining and entry into force

Article 20(1): the Convention shall be ratified by signatory States and shall be open to accession.

Article 21 sets out the entry into force scheme, which required ratifications or accessions by ten member States of the Paris Union and seven of the Berne Union.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in187

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Five

WIPO: Aims and Functions, Articles 3 and 4

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO has two objectives, to promote the protection of intellectual property throughout the world and to ensure administrative cooperation among the Unions, and six functions by which it pursues them.

In exam wording: Article 3 of the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization states the objectives of the Organization as being to promote the protection of intellectual property throughout the world through cooperation among States and, where appropriate, in collaboration with any other international organisation, and to ensure administrative cooperation among the Unions; and Article 4 sets out the functions by which the Organization is to attain those objectives.

Article 3: the objectives

Article 3: the objectives of the Organization are:

(i) to promote the protection of intellectual property throughout the world through cooperation among States and, where appropriate, in collaboration with any other international organization;

(ii) to ensure administrative cooperation among the Unions.

Two objectives, and they are of very different kinds. The first is substantive and open ended: promoting protection worldwide, by cooperation, and in collaboration with other organisations where appropriate. The second is administrative and closed: making the existing Unions work together.

Three phrases in the first objective repay attention.

"Throughout the world" is why WIPO's membership is wider than any Union's, and why Article 5(2) admits States that belong to no Union at all.

"Through cooperation among States" is the limit. WIPO promotes; it does not compel. There is no obligation on a member to protect anything by virtue of Article 3.

"In collaboration with any other international organization" is the authority for the agreement with the United Nations in 1974, the agreement with the World Trade Organization in 1995, and the joint administration of the Rome Convention with the International Labour Organization and UNESCO.

Article 4: the functions

Article 4 provides that in order to attain the objectives described in Article 3, the Organization, through its appropriate organs and subject to the competence of each of the Unions, shall:

(i) promote the development of measures designed to facilitate the efficient protection of intellectual property throughout the world and to harmonize national legislation in this field;

(ii) perform the administrative tasks of the Paris Union, the Special Unions established in relation with that Union, and the Berne Union;

(iii) may agree to assume, or participate in, the administration of any other international agreement designed to promote the protection of intellectual property;

(iv) encourage the conclusion of international agreements designed to promote the protection of intellectual property;

(v) offer its cooperation to States requesting legal technical assistance in the field of intellectual property;

(vi) assemble and disseminate information concerning the protection of intellectual property, carry out and promote studies in this field, and publish the results of such studies;

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in191

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Six

WIPO: Membership and How a State Joins, Articles 5, 14, 15 and 16

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Any State that belongs to one of the Unions may join WIPO, and so may a State that belongs to none, provided it belongs to the United Nations system or is invited.

In exam wording: Article 5 of the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization provides that membership is open to any State which is a member of any of the Unions, and to any other State satisfying one of four alternative conditions, Articles 14 and 15 governing the manner of becoming party and the entry into force of the Convention for a State, and Article 16 excluding reservations.

Article 5: who may become a member

Article 5(1): membership in the Organization shall be open to any State which is a member of any of the Unions as defined in Article 2(v).

Article 5(2): membership shall be equally open to any State not a member of any of the Unions, provided that:

(i) it is a member of the United Nations, of any of the Specialized Agencies brought into relationship with the United Nations, or of the International Atomic Energy Agency, or is a party to the Statute of the International Court of Justice, or

(ii) it is invited by the General Assembly of the Organization to become a party to this Convention.

Read the structure, because that is what the question tests. There are two routes and the second has two limbs. A Union member joins as of right. A non Union State joins if it satisfies a United Nations system criterion, or if the General Assembly invites it.

Only States may be members. There is no provision for an intergovernmental organisation to accede, which distinguishes WIPO from the World Trade Organization, whose Article XI admits separate customs territories and whose Article XII permits accession by them too. The European Union is a member of the WTO and is not a member of WIPO, though it is a party to several WIPO treaties.

Articles 14 and 15: the manner of becoming a party

Article 14(1): States referred to in Article 5 may become party to this Convention and member of the Organization by signature followed by deposit of an instrument of ratification, or deposit of an instrument of accession.

Article 14(2) deals with the position of a State that is a member of a Union: it may become party to the Convention only if it has previously ratified or acceded to at least the administrative and final clauses of the Stockholm Act of the Paris Convention or of the Berne Convention, or has simultaneously done so.

Why that condition exists. The whole point of the 1967 design was that the Unions and the Organization share machinery, and a Union member still bound only by an older Act would not have the Assembly that plugs into the Organization.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in195

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Seven

WIPO: The Organs, Articles 6 to 10, 12 and 13

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO has four organs, the General Assembly, the Conference, the Coordination Committee and the International Bureau, and each Union keeps its own assembly beside them.

In exam wording: Articles 6 to 9 of the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization establish the General Assembly, the Conference, the Coordination Committee and the International Bureau headed by the Director General, Article 10 governs the headquarters, and Articles 12 and 13 the legal status of the Organization and its relations with other organisations.

Article 6: the General Assembly

Composition. Article 6(1)(a): the General Assembly consists of the States party to this Convention which are members of any of the Unions.

Article 6(1)(b): the Government of each State is represented by one delegate, who may be assisted by alternate delegates, advisors and experts.

Article 6(1)(c): the expenses of each delegation are borne by the Government which appointed it.

Functions, Article 6(2). The General Assembly shall:

(i) appoint the Director General upon the nomination of the Coordination Committee;

(ii) review and approve the reports of the Director General concerning the Organization and give him all necessary instructions;

(iii) review and approve the reports and activities of the Coordination Committee and give it instructions;

(iv) adopt the biennial budget of expenses common to the Unions;

(v) approve the measures proposed by the Director General concerning the administration of the international agreements referred to in Article 4(iii);

(vi) adopt the financial regulations of the Organization;

(vii) determine the working languages of the Secretariat, taking into consideration the practice of the United Nations;

(viii) invite States referred to in Article 5(2)(ii) to become party to this Convention;

(ix) determine which States not members of the Organization and which intergovernmental and international non governmental organisations shall be admitted to its meetings as observers;

(x) exercise such other functions as are appropriate under this Convention.

Article 6(3): each State has one vote.

Article 6(4)(a): the General Assembly meets once in every second calendar year in ordinary session.

Article 6(3)(c) and (d): one half of the members constitutes a quorum, and decisions require two thirds of the votes cast, subject to specified exceptions.

Article 7: the Conference

Composition. Article 7(1)(a): the Conference consists of the States party to this Convention whether or not they are members of any of the Unions.

That single difference from Article 6 is the most examinable fact about the organs.

Functions, Article 7(2). The Conference shall:

(i) discuss matters of general interest in the field of intellectual property and may adopt recommendations relating to such matters, having regard for the competence and autonomy of the Unions;

(ii) adopt the biennial budget of the Conference;

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in200

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Eight

WIPO: Finance, Legal Capacity and Amendment, Articles 11, 17, 18 and 19

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO has three budgets, its members pay contributions according to a class each chooses for itself, and the Convention can be amended by its own Conference without a diplomatic conference.

In exam wording: Article 11 of the Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization governs its finances, providing for the budget of expenses common to the Unions, the budget of the Conference and the budgets of the Unions, and establishing the contribution class system; Articles 17 to 19 govern amendment, denunciation and the notifications made by the Director General.

Article 11: the finances

Article 11(1): the Organization shall have two budgets, the budget of expenses common to the Unions and the budget of the Conference.

Article 11(2)(a): the budget of expenses common to the Unions shall include provision for expenses of interest to several Unions.

Article 11(2)(b): this budget shall be financed from the sources named in Article 11(3), that is from the contributions of the Unions themselves, from contributions due from States party to the Convention which are not members of any Union, from payments for services performed by the International Bureau not falling within the framework of a Union, from the sale of publications and royalties, and from gifts, bequests and subventions, and from rents, interests and other miscellaneous income.

Article 11(4) is the contribution class provision, and it is the answer to MU's question about how a developing member's burden is scaled.

Article 11(4)(a): for the purpose of establishing its contribution towards the budget of expenses common to the Unions, each State party to this Convention which is not a member of any of the Unions shall belong to a class, and shall pay its annual contributions on the basis of a number of units.

The classes at the time of the Convention were class A at ten units, class B at three units, and class C at one unit.

Article 11(4)(b): each State indicates, at the time of depositing its instrument, the class to which it wishes to belong, and may change class.

Article 11(5): a State in arrears may not exercise its right to vote in any organ of which it is a member if the amount of its arrears equals or exceeds the amount of the contributions due from it for the two preceding full years, though the organ may allow it to continue to vote if satisfied that the delay is due to exceptional and unavoidable circumstances.

Article 11(6): if the budget is not adopted before the beginning of a new financial period, it shall be at the same level as the budget of the previous year.

Article 11(7): the International Bureau shall be entitled to receive and to make payments for services provided by it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in206

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Nine

WIPO Today: The Committees, the Centre and the Limits

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO today runs four global registration systems, a set of standing committees where new treaties are negotiated, an arbitration and mediation centre, and a development programme, and it still cannot make a member do anything.

In exam wording: the World Intellectual Property Organization discharges its functions today through the global protection systems it administers, through standing committees on patents, trademarks, copyright, enforcement and genetic resources in which norm setting is negotiated, through the WIPO Arbitration and Mediation Center, through its databases and technical assistance programmes, and through the Development Agenda adopted in 2007, its limitations remaining those of an organisation with no legislative and no adjudicative power.

The four global systems

The Patent Cooperation Treaty system, by far the largest, handling international patent applications.

The Madrid system for the international registration of marks.

The Hague system for the international registration of industrial designs.

The Lisbon system for appellations of origin and, since the Geneva Act of 2015, geographical indications.

Two things to say about them in an answer. They are the Article 4(vii) function in action, and they are the source of most of the Organization's income, which is why WIPO behaves in part like a service provider.

And a limit. None of them grants a right. Each administers an application or a registration whose effect remains national.

The standing committees

They are where norm setting actually happens, because a diplomatic conference is convened only when a text is ready.

The Standing Committee on the Law of Patents, where the substantive patent law treaty negotiation stalled and where disclosure of origin was debated for two decades before the GRATK Treaty.

The Standing Committee on the Law of Trademarks, Industrial Designs and Geographical Indications, from which the Singapore Treaty and the Riyadh Design Law Treaty came.

The Standing Committee on Copyright and Related Rights, from which the Beijing and Marrakesh treaties came, and where a broadcasting organisations treaty has been under negotiation since 1998 without result.

The Advisory Committee on Enforcement, which is deliberately not a norm setting body, because enforcement standards belong to TRIPS.

The Intergovernmental Committee on Intellectual Property and Genetic Resources, Traditional Knowledge and Folklore, established in 2000, which produced the GRATK Treaty in 2024 and is still negotiating on traditional knowledge and traditional cultural expressions.

The Committee on Development and Intellectual Property, established to implement the Development Agenda.

The Arbitration and Mediation Center

Established in 1994, it offers mediation, arbitration, expedited arbitration and expert determination for commercial disputes involving intellectual property.

Its best known work is domain names. WIPO proposed and the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers adopted the Uniform Domain Name Dispute Resolution Policy in 1999, under which a complainant must show that the domain name is identical or confusingly similar to a mark in which it has rights, that the registrant has no rights or legitimate interests, and that the name was registered and is being used in bad faith.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in211

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty

WIPO and the United Nations

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO became a specialised agency of the United Nations in 1974, agreed to cooperate with the World Trade Organization in 1995, and committed itself to a development mandate in 2007.

In exam wording: the World Intellectual Property Organization entered into an agreement with the United Nations which took effect on 17 December 1974, by which it became a specialised agency responsible for taking appropriate action to promote creative intellectual activity and to facilitate the transfer of technology related to industrial property to developing countries; it concluded an agreement with the World Trade Organization on 22 December 1995 in force from 1 January 1996; and its General Assembly adopted the Development Agenda in 2007.

Why WIPO wanted the relationship

Because BIRPI was outside the United Nations system altogether, and by the 1960s that was a problem.

Institutional competition. UNESCO administered the Universal Copyright Convention of 1952 and was making a claim to the copyright field. Without a place in the system, WIPO risked being absorbed or bypassed.

Membership. Newly independent States joined the United Nations first, and an organisation inside the system was easier for them to join and to trust.

Resources and legitimacy. Access to the development machinery of the United Nations, and the standing that comes with a formal relationship.

The agreement of 1974

Article 1 of the agreement recognises WIPO as a specialised agency responsible for taking appropriate action in accordance with its basic instrument and the treaties and agreements administered by it, inter alia for promoting creative intellectual activity and for facilitating the transfer of technology related to industrial property to the developing countries in order to accelerate economic, social and cultural development, subject to the competence and responsibilities of the United Nations and its organs.

That last clause matters. WIPO's mandate is subject to the competence of the United Nations bodies, in particular the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development, the United Nations Development Programme and the United Nations Industrial Development Organization.

The agreement also provides for reciprocal representation, for the exchange of information and documents, for cooperation on personnel and statistics, and for WIPO's reports to the Economic and Social Council.

What it did not do. It did not give WIPO any power it lacked, and it did not subordinate WIPO's assemblies to any United Nations organ.

The agreement with the World Trade Organization, 1995

Concluded on 22 December 1995 and in force from 1 January 1996. It has three substantive articles.

Article 2 concerns laws and regulations. WIPO agrees to make available to WTO members and their nationals the collection of laws and regulations held in its library, on the same terms as to WIPO members, and to accept and make available notifications under TRIPS Article 63.2.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in216

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-One

The Twenty-Eight Treaties WIPO Administers

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO administers twenty eight treaties, and they fall into three families: those that set standards of protection, those that run a single international filing or registration, and those that classify.

In exam wording: the World Intellectual Property Organization administers twenty eight treaties including the Convention establishing it, which are conventionally grouped into intellectual property protection treaties, global protection system treaties, and classification treaties, to which must be added for the purposes of this paper the UPOV Convention administered by UPOV, the Convention on Biological Diversity with its Nagoya Protocol, and the TRIPS Agreement administered by the World Trade Organization.

Family one: intellectual property protection

These define internationally agreed basic standards of protection in each country. Seventeen of them.

Paris Convention 1883, industrial property. Worked in seven chapters of this book.

Berne Convention 1886, literary and artistic works. Worked in seven chapters.

Madrid Agreement (Indications of Source) 1891, the repression of false or deceptive indications of source on goods.

Rome Convention 1961, performers, producers of phonograms and broadcasting organisations. Administered jointly with the International Labour Organization and UNESCO.

Phonograms Convention 1971, against unauthorised duplication of phonograms.

Brussels Convention 1974, programme carrying signals transmitted by satellite.

Nairobi Treaty 1981, the Olympic symbol.

Washington Treaty 1989, intellectual property in respect of integrated circuits. Never entered into force.

Trademark Law Treaty 1994, procedural harmonisation for marks.

WIPO Copyright Treaty 1996, the first internet treaty.

WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty 1996, the second.

Patent Law Treaty 2000, procedural harmonisation for patents.

Singapore Treaty on the Law of Trademarks 2006, the successor to the Trademark Law Treaty.

Beijing Treaty on Audiovisual Performances 2012.

Marrakesh VIP Treaty 2013, access to published works for persons who are print disabled.

WIPO GRATK Treaty 2024, intellectual property, genetic resources and associated traditional knowledge.

Riyadh Design Law Treaty 2024.

Family two: the global protection system

These ensure that one international registration or filing has effect in the relevant signatory States. Six of them, counting the Madrid Agreement and Protocol separately.

Madrid Agreement (Marks) 1891 and the Madrid Protocol 1989, international registration of marks.

Hague Agreement 1925, international registration of industrial designs, now the Geneva Act of 1999.

Lisbon Agreement 1958, appellations of origin, now with the Geneva Act of 2015 covering geographical indications.

Patent Cooperation Treaty 1970, the international patent application.

Budapest Treaty 1977, the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms.

Family three: classification

These create systems that organise information into indexed, manageable structures. Four of them.

Nice Agreement 1957, goods and services for marks.

Locarno Agreement 1968, industrial designs.

Strasbourg Agreement 1971, the International Patent Classification.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in221

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Two

The Rome Convention 1961: Performers, Producers and Broadcasters

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Rome Convention protects the people who bring works to the public, the performer, the record producer and the broadcaster, and India is not a party to it.

In exam wording: the International Convention for the Protection of Performers, Producers of Phonograms and Broadcasting Organisations, concluded at Rome on 26 October 1961 and in force from 18 May 1964, is administered jointly by WIPO, the International Labour Organization and UNESCO, and confers on performers the possibility of preventing certain acts, on producers of phonograms the right to authorise or prohibit direct or indirect reproduction, and on broadcasting organisations the rights set out in Article 13.

Why the law has this at all

Berne protects authors and says nothing about anybody else. The composer of a song is an author. The singer who records it is not. The company that pays for the recording is not. The station that broadcasts it is not.

Each of them invests and each of them can be copied. By the 1930s recording and broadcasting had made that a commercial problem, and the International Labour Organization took an interest because performers are workers.

So Rome protects "neighbouring rights", also called related rights, and the phrase means rights neighbouring on copyright and not part of it.

Article 1 makes the relationship explicit: protection granted under this Convention shall leave intact and shall in no way affect the protection of copyright in literary and artistic works, and consequently no provision may be interpreted as prejudicing such protection.

Definitions, Article 3

Performers means actors, singers, musicians, dancers and other persons who act, sing, deliver, declaim, play in, or otherwise perform literary or artistic works.

Phonogram means any exclusively aural fixation of sounds of a performance or of other sounds.

Producer of phonograms means the person who, or the legal entity which, first fixes the sounds of a performance or other sounds.

Publication means the offering of copies of a phonogram to the public in reasonable quantity.

Reproduction means the making of a copy or copies of a fixation.

Broadcasting means the transmission by wireless means for public reception of sounds or of images and sounds.

Rebroadcasting means the simultaneous broadcasting by one broadcasting organisation of the broadcast of another.

National treatment, Articles 2, 4, 5 and 6

Article 2 defines national treatment as the treatment accorded by the domestic law of the Contracting State in which protection is claimed to performers who are its nationals, to producers of phonograms who are its nationals and to broadcasts of organisations having their headquarters on its territory.

Article 4 fixes the points of attachment for performers: the performance takes place in another Contracting State; or it is incorporated in a phonogram protected under Article 5; or it is carried by a broadcast protected under Article 6.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in226

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Three

Rome: The Intergovernmental Committee and the Final Clauses, Articles 23 to 34

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Rome Convention is the only intellectual property treaty in the world run by three international organisations at once, and its Article 32 is what sets that up.

In exam wording: Articles 23 to 34 of the Rome Convention govern signature and deposit, the manner of becoming party, entry into force, implementation, territories, denunciation, revision, the settlement of disputes, limits on reservations, the Intergovernmental Committee, languages and notifications, the Convention being deposited with the Secretary-General of the United Nations and administered jointly by the Director General of WIPO, the Director-General of the International Labour Office and the Director-General of UNESCO.

Articles 23 to 25: joining

Article 23: the Convention shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the United Nations and shall be open until 30 June 1962 for signature by any State invited to the Diplomatic Conference on the International Protection of Performers, Producers of Phonograms and Broadcasting Organisations, which is a member of the United Nations, or a member of any of the specialised agencies, or a party to the Statute of the International Court of Justice, or is invited by the General Assembly of the United Nations.

Article 24(1): the Convention is subject to ratification or acceptance by signatory States.

Article 24(2) is the eligibility condition and it is examinable: the Convention shall be open for accession by any State invited to the Conference, by any member State of the United Nations, or by any State member of any of the specialised agencies, provided that in either case such State is a party to the Universal Copyright Convention or is a member of the International Union for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works.

So a State must already protect authors before it may protect neighbouring rights. That is why the Rome membership is much smaller than Berne's.

Article 25: the Convention enters into force three months after the deposit of the sixth instrument, and thereafter for each State three months after the deposit of its own instrument. It came into force on 18 May 1964.

Articles 26 to 28: implementation, territories and denunciation

Article 26(1): each Contracting State undertakes to adopt, in accordance with its Constitution, the measures necessary to ensure the application of this Convention.

Article 26(2): at the time of deposit, each State must be in a position under its domestic law to give effect to the terms of the Convention.

Article 27: any State may declare that the Convention extends to all or any of the territories for whose international relations it is responsible.

Article 28: denunciation, by notification addressed to the Secretary-General, taking effect twelve months after receipt, and not exercisable before the expiry of a period of five years from the date on which the Convention came into force for that State. Denunciation of the Universal Copyright Convention or of the Berne Union automatically brings the Rome denunciation with it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in233

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Four

The Geneva Phonograms Convention 1971 and the Brussels Satellite Convention 1974

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

One convention answers record piracy by obliging States to stop the duplication of phonograms, and the other answers signal theft by obliging them to stop the distribution of satellite signals to people they were not meant for.

In exam wording: the Convention for the Protection of Producers of Phonograms Against Unauthorized Duplication of Their Phonograms, concluded at Geneva on 29 October 1971, obliges each Contracting State to protect producers of phonograms who are nationals of other Contracting States against the making of duplicates without their consent and against the importation and distribution of such duplicates; and the Convention Relating to the Distribution of Programme-Carrying Signals Transmitted by Satellite, concluded at Brussels on 21 May 1974, obliges each Contracting State to prevent the distribution on or from its territory of any programme carrying signal by a distributor for whom the signal was not intended.

The Phonograms Convention 1971

Why it was made. The Rome Convention of 1961 protected producers of phonograms, but its membership grew slowly and its Article 24(2) condition kept many States out. Meanwhile the cassette made record piracy cheap, and piracy on an industrial scale appeared in the 1960s.

So a short convention was made for the single problem, open to a wider membership, with no requirement of Berne or Universal Copyright Convention membership.

Article 1 defines phonogram, producer of phonograms, duplicate, and distribution to the public, in terms very close to Rome Article 3.

Article 2 is the obligation: each Contracting State shall protect producers of phonograms who are nationals of other Contracting States against the making of duplicates without the consent of the producer, and against the importation of such duplicates, provided that any such making or importation is for the purpose of distribution to the public, and against the distribution of such duplicates to the public.

Article 3 leaves the means to each State: protection may be by copyright, by a sui generis right, by the law of unfair competition, or by penal sanctions. That flexibility is the Convention's most distinctive feature, and it is why it was easier to join than Rome.

Article 4: the duration is a matter for domestic law, but if it fixes a specific duration it shall be not less than twenty years from the end of the year in which the sounds were first fixed or the phonogram first published.

Article 5 is the formalities provision, in the same terms as Rome Article 11: the P in a circle notice with the year of first publication satisfies any formality requirement.

Article 6 permits the same limitations as a State provides for authors, and permits compulsory licences only where reproduction is solely for teaching or scientific research, is limited to the territory, does not include export, and carries equitable remuneration.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in239

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Six

The WIPO Copyright Treaty: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 15 to 25

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Treaty has its own Assembly, is open to States and to certain intergovernmental organisations, needed thirty ratifications to come into force, and permits no reservations.

In exam wording: Articles 15 to 25 of the WIPO Copyright Treaty establish an Assembly of the contracting parties and provide that the International Bureau of WIPO shall perform the administrative tasks, and govern eligibility for becoming party, the rights and obligations under the Treaty, signature, entry into force upon deposit of thirty instruments, the effective date of becoming party, the prohibition of reservations, denunciation, languages and the depositary.

Article 15: the Assembly

Article 15(1)(a): the contracting parties shall have an Assembly.

Article 15(1)(b): each contracting party shall be represented by one delegate who may be assisted by alternate delegates, advisors and experts.

Article 15(1)(c): the expenses of each delegation shall be borne by the contracting party that appointed it; the Assembly may ask WIPO to grant financial assistance to facilitate the participation of delegations of contracting parties that are regarded as developing countries in conformity with the established practice of the General Assembly of the United Nations or that are countries in transition to a market economy.

Article 15(2)(a) sets the functions: the Assembly shall deal with matters concerning the maintenance and development of the Treaty and the application and operation of it; it shall perform the function allocated to it under Article 17(2) concerning admission of certain intergovernmental organisations; and it shall decide the convocation of any diplomatic conference for revision and give the necessary instructions to the Director General for the preparation of such a conference.

Article 15(3)(a): each contracting party that is a State has one vote and votes only in its own name.

Article 15(3)(b) is the regional organisation rule: any contracting party that is an intergovernmental organisation may participate in the vote, in place of its member States, with a number of votes equal to the number of its member States that are party to the Treaty, and no such organisation shall participate in the vote if any one of its member States exercises its right to vote and vice versa.

Article 15(4): the Assembly shall meet in ordinary session once every two years upon convocation by the Director General.

Article 15(5): the Assembly shall establish its own rules of procedure, including the convocation of extraordinary sessions, the requirements of a quorum, and the required majorities, subject to the Treaty's own provisions.

Article 16: the International Bureau

Article 16: the International Bureau of WIPO shall perform the administrative tasks concerning the Treaty.

One line, and it is what makes this a WIPO treaty rather than one deposited with the United Nations, as Rome, Phonograms and Brussels are.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in251

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Seven

The WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty 1996: Performers and Producers, Articles 1 to 17

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The WPPT gives performers what the Rome Convention withheld, a moral right and exclusive economic rights, and gives producers of phonograms the on demand right.

In exam wording: the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty, adopted at Geneva on 20 December 1996 and in force from 20 May 2002, confers on performers moral rights and exclusive rights of reproduction, distribution, rental and making available in respect of performances fixed in phonograms, together with the right to authorise the broadcasting and communication to the public and the fixation of unfixed performances, and confers on producers of phonograms exclusive rights of reproduction, distribution, rental and making available, with a right to a single equitable remuneration for broadcasting and communication to the public under Article 15.

Articles 1 to 4: the framework

Article 1(1): nothing derogates from existing obligations that contracting parties have to each other under the Rome Convention.

Article 1(2): protection under this Treaty shall leave intact and shall in no way affect the protection of copyright in literary and artistic works, and consequently no provision may be interpreted as prejudicing such protection. The same rule as Rome Article 1.

Article 1(3): the Treaty shall not have any connection with, nor shall it prejudice any rights and obligations under, any other treaty.

Article 2 defines the terms. Performers means actors, singers, musicians, dancers and other persons who act, sing, deliver, declaim, play in, interpret or otherwise perform literary or artistic works or expressions of folklore.

That reference to expressions of folklore is new and it matters for Module IV, because Rome did not have it and it is the first time an international copyright instrument recognised a performer of folklore.

Phonogram means the fixation of the sounds of a performance or of other sounds, or of a representation of sounds, other than in the form of a fixation incorporated in a cinematographic or other audiovisual work.

Fixation means the embodiment of sounds, or of the representations thereof, from which they can be perceived, reproduced or communicated through a device.

Producer of a phonogram means the person, or the legal entity, who or which takes the initiative and has the responsibility for the first fixation of the sounds.

Publication, broadcasting and communication to the public are also defined, broadcasting including transmission by satellite and encrypted signals where the means for decrypting are provided by or with the consent of the broadcasting organisation.

Article 3 identifies the beneficiaries: nationals of other contracting parties, applying the criteria of eligibility under the Rome Convention as if all contracting parties to this Treaty were Contracting States of Rome.

Article 4, national treatment: each contracting party shall accord to nationals of other contracting parties the treatment it accords to its own nationals with regard to the exclusive rights specifically granted in this Treaty and to the right to equitable remuneration in Article 15. Article 4(2) limits the obligation where a party has made a reservation under Article 15(3).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in256

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Eight

The WPPT: Common Provisions, Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 18 to 33

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The second half of the WPPT mirrors the WIPO Copyright Treaty exactly: locks, metadata, no formalities, no reservations except the remuneration opt out, and an Assembly of its own.

In exam wording: Articles 18 to 33 of the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty impose obligations concerning technological measures and rights management information, prohibit formalities, restrict reservations, govern application in time and enforcement, and establish the Assembly, the role of the International Bureau, eligibility, entry into force, denunciation, languages and the depositary.

Articles 18 and 19: locks and metadata

Article 18, technological measures. Contracting parties shall provide adequate legal protection and effective legal remedies against the circumvention of effective technological measures that are used by performers or producers of phonograms in connection with the exercise of their rights under this Treaty and that restrict acts, in respect of their performances or phonograms, which are not authorised by the performers or the producers concerned or permitted by law.

Article 19, rights management information. Contracting parties shall provide adequate and effective legal remedies against any person knowingly performing, or with respect to civil remedies having reasonable grounds to know, that it will induce, enable, facilitate or conceal an infringement, who removes or alters any electronic rights management information without authority, or who distributes, imports for distribution, broadcasts, communicates or makes available to the public, without authority, performances, copies of fixed performances or phonograms knowing that electronic rights management information has been removed or altered without authority.

Article 19(2) defines rights management information as information which identifies the performer, the performance, the producer of the phonogram, the phonogram, the owner of any right, or information about the terms and conditions of use, and any numbers or codes that represent such information, when any of these items is attached to a copy of a fixed performance or a phonogram or appears in connection with its communication or making available.

These are the twins of WIPO Copyright Treaty Articles 11 and 12, and India implemented all four by sections 65A and 65B of the Copyright Act in 2012.

Articles 20 to 23

Article 20, formalities: the enjoyment and exercise of the rights provided for in this Treaty shall not be subject to any formality.

The same rule as Berne Article 5(2), extended to neighbouring rights, and it means no registration, deposit or notice may be required.

Article 21, reservations: subject to the provisions of Article 15(3), no reservations to this Treaty shall be permitted. So the only reservation is the equitable remuneration opt out.

Article 22, application in time. Contracting parties shall apply the provisions of Berne Article 18, mutatis mutandis, to the rights of performers and producers of phonograms provided for in this Treaty. Article 22(2) permits a party to limit the application of Article 5 on moral rights to performances which occurred after the entry into force of the Treaty for that party.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in262

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Nine

The Beijing Treaty on Audiovisual Performances 2012, Articles 1 to 17

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Beijing Treaty gives an audiovisual performer the rights that Rome took away and the WPPT never gave, and it took the international system fifty one years to get there.

In exam wording: the Beijing Treaty on Audiovisual Performances, adopted at Beijing on 24 June 2012 and in force from 28 April 2020, confers on performers in respect of their performances fixed in audiovisual fixations moral rights and exclusive rights of reproduction, distribution, rental, making available, and broadcasting and communication to the public, and addresses the transfer of rights to the producer of the audiovisual fixation in Article 12.

Why it took fifty one years

Rome Article 19 is the beginning of the story. Notwithstanding anything in that Convention, once a performer has consented to the incorporation of his performance in a visual or audiovisual fixation, Article 7 shall have no further application. So a film actor who agreed to be filmed lost the Convention's protection entirely.

The WPPT of 1996 did not fix it. Article 2(b) of that Treaty defines a phonogram to exclude a fixation incorporated in a cinematographic or other audiovisual work, so an actor was outside it too.

A diplomatic conference in 2000 failed. Nineteen of twenty articles were agreed provisionally and the conference broke down on one question: the transfer of rights from the performer to the producer.

The disagreement was between two legal traditions. The United States and others wanted a presumption or a rule of transfer, so that a producer financing a film would hold all the rights without needing separate assignments from every performer. Others, particularly in Europe and in developing countries, resisted anything that reduced the performer's position by treaty.

The Beijing solution was to leave it to national law, which is Article 12, and that compromise is what made the Treaty possible in 2012.

Articles 1 to 4: framework, definitions and beneficiaries

Article 1(1): nothing derogates from existing obligations under the WPPT or the Rome Convention.

Article 1(3): this Treaty shall not have any connection with, nor prejudice any rights and obligations under, any other treaty.

An Agreed Statement to Article 1 records that nothing prevents a contracting party from applying the provisions of the Treaty to performances fixed in phonograms as well.

Article 2 defines performers in terms that include performers of expressions of folklore, as the WPPT does; audiovisual fixation as the embodiment of moving images, whether or not accompanied by sounds, from which they can be perceived, reproduced or communicated through a device; broadcasting, including satellite and encrypted transmissions where the decrypting means are provided by or with the consent of the broadcasting organisation; and communication to the public.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in267

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty

The Beijing Treaty: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 18 to 30

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Beijing Treaty's second half follows the 1996 model exactly, with one addition: it permits notifications rather than reservations, and it needed thirty ratifications, which took eight years.

In exam wording: Articles 18 to 30 of the Beijing Treaty govern reservations and notifications, application in time, enforcement, the Assembly, the role of the International Bureau, eligibility, rights and obligations, signature, entry into force upon deposit of thirty instruments, effective dates, denunciation, languages and the depositary.

Article 18: reservations and notifications

Article 18(1): subject to the provisions of Article 11(3), no reservations to this Treaty shall be permitted.

Article 18(2): any notification under Article 11(2) or 11(3) may be made upon ratification or accession, and the effective date shall be three months after the date of entry into force of the Treaty for that party, or at any time thereafter, in which case it takes effect three months after receipt by the Director General.

The distinction between a reservation and a notification is worth stating. A reservation modifies the treaty obligation for the reserving party; a notification here exercises an option the Treaty itself gives. Article 11 offers three positions and a party chooses one, which is not a derogation.

Article 19: application in time

Article 19(1): contracting parties shall accord the protection granted under this Treaty to fixed performances that exist at the moment of entry into force, and to all performances that occur after that moment.

Article 19(2): notwithstanding paragraph 1, a contracting party may provide in a declaration that it will not apply Articles 7 to 11 to fixed performances that existed at the moment of entry into force for that party; and any other party may limit the application of those Articles, in respect of the first party's fixed performances, to performances that occurred after entry into force for the first party.

Article 19(3): the protection provided for in Article 5 and in Article 19(1) and (2) shall not apply to performances that occurred before entry into force for that party.

Article 19(4): contracting parties may apply Berne Article 18 mutatis mutandis.

That is a more elaborate scheme than the WPPT's, and the reason is that an audiovisual archive is very large and very old, so States wanted the option not to revive rights in existing films.

Article 20: enforcement

Article 20(1): contracting parties undertake to adopt, in accordance with their legal systems, the measures necessary to ensure the application of the Treaty.

Article 20(2): contracting parties shall ensure that enforcement procedures are available under their law so as to permit effective action against any act of infringement of rights covered by this Treaty, including expeditious remedies to prevent infringements and remedies which constitute a deterrent to further infringements.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in273

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-One

The Marrakesh VIP Treaty 2013, Articles 1 to 12

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Marrakesh Treaty requires every party to create an exception to copyright so that books can be made accessible to blind and print disabled people, and it lets those accessible copies cross borders.

In exam wording: the Marrakesh Treaty to Facilitate Access to Published Works for Persons Who Are Blind, Visually Impaired or Otherwise Print Disabled, adopted at Marrakesh on 27 June 2013 and in force from 30 September 2016, obliges contracting parties to provide in their national law a limitation or exception permitting the making and supply of accessible format copies to beneficiary persons, and to permit the cross border exchange and importation of such copies by authorised entities.

Why it is different from every other treaty in this module

Every other WIPO instrument creates or strengthens a right. This one requires a limitation.

That is not a small point of drafting. It reverses the direction of international intellectual property law, and it is the strongest evidence that the Development Agenda of 2007 changed something.

The problem it answers is called the book famine. Of the books published each year, only a small proportion were ever made available in accessible formats such as braille, large print, audio or accessible digital text; and an accessible copy made lawfully in one country could not lawfully be sent to another, because the exception under which it was made had no effect abroad.

So the same book was converted separately in every country, at enormous duplicated cost, and in most countries not at all.

India was ahead of the treaty. The Copyright (Amendment) Act 2012 inserted section 52(1)(zb), permitting the adaptation, reproduction, issue of copies or communication to the public of any work in an accessible format for the benefit of persons with disability, and section 31B, a compulsory licence to publish a work in an accessible format. Both preceded the Treaty by a year.

And India ratified first in the world, on 30 June 2014.

Articles 1 and 2: framework and definitions

Article 1: nothing in this Treaty shall derogate from any obligations that contracting parties have to each other under any other treaties, nor shall it prejudice any rights that a contracting party has under any other treaties.

Article 2(a) defines works as literary and artistic works within the meaning of Berne Article 2(1), in the form of text, notation and related illustrations, whether published or otherwise made publicly available in any media.

An Agreed Statement adds that this includes such works in audio form, such as audiobooks.

Article 2(b) defines an accessible format copy as a copy of a work in an alternative manner or form which gives a beneficiary person access to the work, including permitting access as feasibly and comfortably as a person without visual impairment or other print disability. The accessible format copy is used exclusively by beneficiary persons and it must respect the integrity of the original work, taking due consideration of the changes needed to make the work accessible and of the accessibility needs of the beneficiary persons.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in278

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Two

The Marrakesh VIP Treaty: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 13 to 22

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Marrakesh Treaty uses the standard 1996 machinery but needed only twenty ratifications, and it reached them in three years.

In exam wording: Articles 13 to 22 of the Marrakesh VIP Treaty establish the Assembly of the contracting parties and the role of the International Bureau of WIPO, and govern eligibility for becoming party, rights and obligations, signature, entry into force upon deposit of twenty instruments, effective dates, denunciation, languages and the depositary.

Article 13: the Assembly

The frame is the standard WIPO Assembly clause, and the chapter on the administration of the WIPO Copyright Treaty sets it out in full. Rather than repeat it, this chapter states what Marrakesh does with it and where it departs.

The four features it shares with the 1996 model. An Assembly of the contracting parties, each represented by one delegate assisted by alternates, advisors and experts, at its own expense. A competence over the maintenance, development, application and operation of the Treaty. One vote for each contracting party that is a State, with an intergovernmental organisation voting instead of its member States and never alongside them. And meetings convoked by the Director General, in the absence of exceptional circumstances during the same period and at the same place as the General Assembly of WIPO.

Three features are new or sharpened.

Financial assistance, Article 13(1)(c). The Assembly may ask WIPO to grant financial assistance to facilitate the participation of delegations of contracting parties regarded as developing countries in conformity with the established practice of the General Assembly of the United Nations, or countries in transition to a market economy. That is a beneficiary provision inside an administrative article, and it fits a treaty whose beneficiaries are in those countries.

Consensus, Article 13(5). The Assembly shall endeavour to take its decisions by consensus and shall establish its own rules of procedure, including the convocation of extraordinary sessions, quorum requirements and, subject to the Treaty, the majorities required for various kinds of decision.

The consensus sentence is not in the 1996 treaties, and it records a change of practice in WIPO bodies over the intervening seventeen years.

Admission of organisations, Article 13(2)(b). The Assembly performs the function allocated to it by Article 15(2), which is the admission of certain intergovernmental organisations, so the membership decision is taken by the Assembly rather than by the depositary.

Article 13(2)(c) gives the Assembly the power to decide the convocation of a diplomatic conference for revision and to instruct the Director General on its preparation.

Article 14: the International Bureau

Article 14: the International Bureau of WIPO performs the administrative tasks concerning the Treaty. One sentence, and it is the same sentence the other modern WIPO treaties use.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in284

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Three

The Patent Cooperation Treaty 1970: What an International Application Is

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Patent Cooperation Treaty does not grant a patent: it lets an inventor file once, in one language, at one office, and be treated as having filed in every country designated, while deciding for another eighteen months which of them are worth the money.

In exam wording: the Patent Cooperation Treaty, concluded at Washington on 19 June 1970 and as amended on 3 October 2001, establishes a Union for cooperation in the filing, searching and examination of applications for the protection of inventions, an international application filed under it having, from the international filing date, the effect of a regular national application in each designated State, all substantive decisions on patentability remaining with the national offices.

Articles 1 and 2: the Union and the vocabulary

Article 1(1): the States party to this Treaty constitute a Union for cooperation in the filing, searching, and examination of applications for the protection of inventions, and for rendering special technical services. The Union is called the International Patent Cooperation Union.

Article 1(2) is the safeguard: no provision of this Treaty shall be interpreted as diminishing the rights under the Paris Convention of any national of, or resident in, a country party to that Convention.

Article 2 defines the terms. An application means an application for the protection of an invention. International application means an application filed under this Treaty. National application means an application filed with a national Office. Designated State means a State designated in an international application. Receiving Office means the national Office or the intergovernmental organisation with which the international application has been filed. Elected State means a State elected for the purposes of international preliminary examination.

Articles 3 to 8: what an international application is

Article 3(1): applications for the protection of inventions in any of the contracting States may be filed as international applications under this Treaty.

Article 3(2): an international application shall contain, as specified in this Treaty and the Regulations, a request, a description, one or more claims, one or more drawings where required, and an abstract.

Article 3(4) requires the application to be in a prescribed language, to comply with the prescribed physical requirements, to comply with the prescribed requirement of unity of invention, and to be subject to the payment of the prescribed fees.

Article 4, the request. It shall contain a petition that the international application be processed according to this Treaty, the designation of the contracting State or States in which protection is sought, the name of and other prescribed data concerning the applicant and the agent if any, the title of the invention, and the name of and other prescribed data concerning the inventor where national law so requires.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in289

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Five

The PCT: Chapter II and the National Phase, Articles 22 to 42

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

At thirty months from priority the applicant hands the application to each national office it has chosen, pays the fees, files the translations, and from that moment the Treaty stops mattering and national law takes over.

In exam wording: Articles 22 to 30 of the Patent Cooperation Treaty govern the entry into the national phase before designated Offices, the effects of international publication and the confidential nature of the application, and Articles 31 to 42 govern Chapter II international preliminary examination, the international preliminary report on patentability, and the procedure before elected Offices.

Articles 22 to 24: entering the national phase

Article 22(1): the applicant shall furnish to each designated Office a copy of the international application, unless already communicated, and a translation where required, and shall pay the national fee, if any, not later than at the expiration of thirty months from the priority date.

Thirty months is the number to remember. It was twenty months until 2002 for States that had not accepted the Chapter II timetable, and the amendment of 3 October 2001 made thirty the general rule.

Article 22(3): any national law may fix time limits which expire later than the Treaty's, and several do.

Article 23(1): no designated Office shall process or examine the international application prior to the expiration of the applicable time limit.

Article 23(2): notwithstanding that, any designated Office may, on the express request of the applicant, process or examine at any time.

Article 24(1) sets out when effect is lost in a designated State: if the applicant withdraws the international application or the designation of that State; if the international application is considered withdrawn by reason of Articles 12(3), 14(1)(b), 14(3)(a) or 14(4); or if the applicant fails to perform the acts referred to in Article 22 within the applicable time limit.

Article 24(2): notwithstanding that, any designated Office may maintain the effect of the international application even where it is not required to do so.

That saving in Article 24(2) is the basis of the restoration provisions that most offices now operate for a missed national phase deadline.

Articles 25 to 30: review, national requirements and confidentiality

Article 25, review by designated Offices. Where the receiving Office has refused to accord an international filing date or has declared the application withdrawn, or the International Bureau has made a finding under Article 12(3), the International Bureau shall send copies of the file to any designated Office on request, and if the applicant so requests the Office shall decide whether the refusal, declaration or finding was justified under the Treaty. If it was not, the Office shall treat the application as if the error had not occurred.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in301

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Six

The PCT: Common Provisions, Technical Services and Administration, Articles 43 to 69

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The last third of the Patent Cooperation Treaty deals with utility models and inventors' certificates, with time limits and excuses for missing them, with technical assistance for developing countries, and with the machinery of the Union.

In exam wording: Articles 43 to 52 of the Patent Cooperation Treaty contain common provisions concerning the kind of protection sought, regional patent treaties, translations, time limits, the right to practise, patent information services and technical assistance, and Articles 53 to 69 establish the Assembly, the Executive Committee, the International Bureau, the Committee for Technical Cooperation, the finances, the Regulations, and the provisions on disputes, revision, amendment, accession, entry into force, reservations, gradual application, denunciation, signature, languages, depositary functions and notifications.

Articles 43 to 46: what protection is sought

Article 43, seeking certain kinds of protection. In respect of any designated or elected State whose law provides for the grant of inventors' certificates, utility certificates, utility models, patents or certificates of addition, inventors' certificates of addition, or utility certificates of addition, the applicant may indicate that the international application is for the grant of one of those rather than a patent, and the ensuing effects shall be governed by the applicant's choice.

Article 44, seeking two kinds of protection. In respect of any designated or elected State whose law permits an application to be for the grant of a patent or one of the other kinds of protection and also for one of the others, the applicant may indicate the two kinds sought.

Article 45, regional patent treaties. Any treaty providing for the grant of regional patents, and giving all persons entitled under Article 9 the right to file applications for such patents, may provide that international applications designating or electing a State party to both that treaty and this Treaty may be filed as applications for such regional patents. Article 45(2) permits the national law of such a designated or elected State to provide that any designation or election of that State in the international application shall have the effect of an indication of the wish to obtain a regional patent.

That is how the European Patent Office fits into the system, and an applicant who designates the European Patent Office in an international application obtains a European regional application.

Article 46, incorrect translation. If, because of an incorrect translation, the scope of any patent granted on an international application exceeds the scope of the international application in its original language, the competent authorities of the contracting State concerned may accordingly and retroactively limit the scope of the patent, and declare it null and void to the extent that its scope has exceeded the scope of the original.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in308

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Seven

The Budapest Treaty 1977: Depositing a Microorganism

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

You cannot describe a bacterium in words well enough for somebody else to make it, so the Budapest Treaty lets an inventor deposit a sample once, with one recognised institution, and have that deposit recognised by every contracting State.

In exam wording: the Budapest Treaty on the International Recognition of the Deposit of Microorganisms for the Purposes of Patent Procedure, done at Budapest on 28 April 1977 and amended on 26 September 1980, establishes a Union whose contracting States are bound to recognise, for the purposes of patent procedure, the deposit of a microorganism with any International Depositary Authority, irrespective of whether that Authority is on or outside their territory.

Why the law has this at all

Because the patent bargain is disclosure, and section 10(4) of the Indian Patents Act, like every other patent law, requires the specification to describe the invention sufficiently for a person skilled in the art to perform it.

A microorganism cannot be described that way. A written description of a novel strain will not enable a skilled reader to obtain that strain, because a strain is not a recipe.

So the answer is to deposit a sample. The specification then says where the sample is, and the person skilled in the art can obtain it.

But before 1977 that meant depositing in every country separately, at very great cost and with the risk that a strain would die in one collection and not another.

Article 3 is the whole Treaty in one sentence: one deposit, recognised everywhere.

Articles 1 to 5: the obligation

Article 1: the States party to this Treaty constitute a Union for the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for the purposes of patent procedure.

Article 2 defines the terms. A patent includes inventors' certificates, utility certificates, utility models, patents of addition and the like. Patent procedure means any administrative or judicial procedure relating to a patent application or a patent. Publication for the purposes of patent procedure means the official publication or the official laying open for public inspection of a patent application or a patent. International depositary authority means a depositary institution which has acquired the status provided for in Article 7. Depositor and Union are also defined.

Article 3(1)(a) is the core obligation: contracting States which allow or require the deposit of microorganisms for the purposes of patent procedure shall recognise, for such purposes, the deposit of a microorganism with any international depositary authority, and such recognition shall include the recognition of the fact and date of the deposit as indicated by the international depositary authority as well as the recognition of the fact that what is furnished as a sample is a sample of the deposited microorganism.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in315

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Eight

The Madrid Agreement 1891: International Registration of Marks

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Madrid Agreement lets the owner of a mark registered at home file one application, in French, through its own office, and obtain protection in every country it designates, all of it depending for five years on the home registration surviving.

In exam wording: the Madrid Agreement Concerning the International Registration of Marks of 14 April 1891, as revised at Stockholm on 14 July 1967 and amended on 28 September 1979, establishes a Special Union under Article 19 of the Paris Convention whereby nationals of the contracting countries may secure protection for their marks in all the other contracting countries by filing an application through the Office of the country of origin for international registration by the International Bureau.

Articles 1 and 2: the Special Union and who may use it

Article 1(1): the countries to which this Agreement applies constitute a Special Union for the international registration of marks.

Article 1(2): nationals of any of the contracting countries may, in all the other countries party to this Agreement, secure protection for their marks applicable to goods or services, registered in the country of origin, by filing the said marks at the International Bureau, through the intermediary of the Office of the said country of origin.

Article 1(3) defines the country of origin. It is the country of the Special Union where the applicant has a real and effective industrial or commercial establishment; if he has no such establishment, the country where he has his domicile; and if he has no domicile within the Special Union, the country of his nationality if he is a national of a country of the Special Union.

The order is fixed and it is a cascade. Establishment, then domicile, then nationality.

Article 2 applies Article 3 of the Paris Convention: persons not nationals of a contracting country who satisfy the conditions of Paris Article 3 are treated as nationals.

Article 3: the application

Article 3(1): every application for international registration must be presented on the form prescribed by the Regulations; the Office of the country of origin shall certify that the particulars appearing in the application correspond to the particulars in the national register, and shall mention the dates and numbers of the filing and registration of the mark in the country of origin as well as the date of the application for international registration.

Article 3(2): the applicant must indicate the goods or services for which protection is claimed and, if possible, the corresponding class or classes according to the classification established by the Nice Agreement.

Article 3(4): the International Bureau shall register the marks immediately and shall notify the interested Offices without delay. The registered marks shall be published in a periodical journal issued by the International Bureau.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in321

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Nine

The Madrid Protocol 1989, and Why India Joined It

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Protocol keeps the Madrid machinery and removes every reason a country had for staying out of it: an application may be based on a home application, English is available, refusal may take eighteen months, individual fees may be charged, and a central attack no longer destroys everything.

In exam wording: the Protocol Relating to the Madrid Agreement Concerning the International Registration of Marks, adopted at Madrid on 27 June 1989 and as amended on 12 November 2007, permits an international application to be based on a basic application as well as on a basic registration, opens membership to intergovernmental organisations, permits an extended period for refusal, permits individual fees, and permits transformation of an international registration into national applications where the basic mark ceases to have effect.

Articles 1 and 2: membership and the basis

Article 1: the States party to this Protocol, even where they are not party to the Madrid Agreement, and the organisations referred to in Article 14(1)(b) which are party to this Protocol, shall be members of the same Union of which countries party to the Madrid Agreement are members.

One Union, two treaties. That is the structure, and it is why the whole is called the Madrid System.

Article 2(1) is the fundamental change. Where an application for the registration of a mark has been filed with the Office of a Contracting Party, or where a mark has been registered in the register of the Office of a Contracting Party, the person in whose name that application or that registration stands may secure protection for the mark in the territory of the Contracting Parties by obtaining the registration of that mark in the register of the International Bureau.

Read the two limbs. A basic application or a basic registration will do. The Agreement required a registration.

Article 2(1)(i) and (ii) set the entitlement conditions: where the basic application was filed with, or the basic registration was made by, the Office of a Contracting State, the person must be a national of, or be domiciled in, or have a real and effective industrial or commercial establishment in, that State; and where the Office is that of a Contracting Organisation, the person must be a national of a State member of that Organisation, or be domiciled or have such an establishment in its territory.

Article 2(2): the application shall be filed with the International Bureau through the intermediary of the Office of origin.

Article 3: the international application

Article 3(1): every international application shall be presented on the prescribed form; the Office of origin shall certify that the particulars appearing in the international application correspond to the particulars appearing, at the time of certification, in the basic application or basic registration, and shall indicate the dates and numbers.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in328

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy

The Other Madrid Agreement of 1891: False and Deceptive Indications of Source

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Goods carrying a false or deceptive indication of where they come from must be seized on importation, and this short agreement of 1891 is the beginning of the international law of geographical indications.

In exam wording: the Madrid Agreement for the Repression of False or Deceptive Indications of Source on Goods, of 14 April 1891, as last revised at Lisbon on 31 October 1958 and supplemented by the Additional Act of Stockholm of 14 July 1967, requires the seizure on importation of all goods bearing a false or deceptive indication of source, prohibits the use in trade of indications capable of deceiving the public as to the source of goods, and reserves to the courts of each country the decision which appellations, on account of their generic character, fall outside its provisions.

Two agreements, one day, and the confusion they cause

Both were concluded at Madrid on 14 April 1891. One concerns the international registration of marks, worked in [The Madrid Agreement 1891: International Registration of Marks]. This one concerns false indications of source.

They have nothing in common but the city and the date. One is a registration system; this one is a set of obligations about seizure.

A candidate who confuses them loses the whole question. The safe practice is to name it in full: the Madrid Agreement for the Repression of False or Deceptive Indications of Source on Goods.

Why it exists

Because Paris Article 10 was not enough. Article 10 of the Paris Convention applies the seizure provisions of Article 9 to a false indication of source, but it requires the indication to be false, and it left the details of enforcement to each country.

And because the wine trade needed it. The pressure came from producers of goods whose reputation was tied to a place, above all wines and spirits, whose names were being applied to goods from elsewhere.

So a special agreement was made under Paris Article 19, going further than the Convention and binding only those who joined it.

Article 1: seizure

Article 1(1): all goods bearing a false or deceptive indication by which one of the countries to which this Agreement applies, or a place situated therein, is directly or indirectly indicated as being the country or place of origin shall be seized on importation into any of the said countries.

Note the word deceptive. Paris Article 10 speaks of a false indication; this Agreement adds indications that are literally true but deceptive, which is a real extension.

Article 1(2): seizure shall also be effected in the country where the false or deceptive indication has been applied, or into which the goods bearing it have been imported.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in335

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-One

The Hague Agreement and the Geneva Act 1999, Articles 1 to 18

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Hague system lets a designer file one international application, in one language, with one set of fees, and obtain protection for up to a hundred designs in every contracting party designated.

In exam wording: the Hague Agreement Concerning the International Registration of Industrial Designs, in its Geneva Act of 2 July 1999, permits any person who is a national of, or is domiciled or has a habitual residence or a real and effective industrial or commercial establishment in, a Contracting Party, to file an international application directly with the International Bureau or through the Office of a Contracting Party, and provides that the resulting international registration has, in each designated Contracting Party, the effect of an application for the grant of protection under that party's law.

Why there are three Acts at once

The Hague Agreement was concluded in 1925 and has been revised at London in 1934, at The Hague in 1960, and at Geneva in 1999, with Complementary and Additional Acts in between.

Three Acts have been in force simultaneously: the 1934 London Act, the 1960 Hague Act and the 1999 Geneva Act, so a State may be bound by one, two or all three, and the applicable Act depends on which the designating and designated parties share.

The 1934 Act was frozen by a decision of the Assembly and its application terminated with effect from 18 October 2016, so the live Acts are 1960 and 1999.

The Geneva Act of 1999 is the one that matters, because it was designed to attract countries with examination systems, which the earlier Acts could not, and that is why the United States, Japan, Korea and the European Union joined it.

Articles 1 to 3: vocabulary and entitlement

Article 1 defines the abbreviated expressions, including that "the 1934 Act" means the Act signed at London on 2 June 1934, "the 1960 Act" the Act signed at The Hague on 28 November 1960, "applicant" the person in whose name an international application is filed, "Contracting Party" any State or intergovernmental organisation party to this Act, and "Office" the agency entrusted with the grant of protection for industrial designs.

Article 2 is a saving: the provisions of this Act shall not affect the application of any greater protection which may be accorded by the law of a Contracting Party, nor shall they affect in any way the protection accorded to works of art and works of applied art by international copyright treaties and conventions, nor the protection accorded to industrial designs under the TRIPS Agreement.

Article 3, entitlement. Any person that is a national of a State that is a Contracting Party or of a State member of an intergovernmental organisation that is a Contracting Party, or that has a domicile, a habitual residence or a real and effective industrial or commercial establishment in the territory of a Contracting Party, shall be entitled to file an international application.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in341

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Two

The Hague Geneva Act: Administration and Final Clauses, Articles 19 to 34

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Geneva Act gives the Hague Union the standard machinery, forbids reservations outright, and sets out how three Acts of the same Agreement operate side by side.

In exam wording: Articles 19 to 34 of the Geneva Act of the Hague Agreement provide for a common Office of several States, define the membership of the Hague Union, establish the Assembly and the role of the International Bureau, govern the finances and the Regulations, and contain the provisions on revision, amendment, becoming party, effective dates, the prohibition of reservations, declarations, the applicability of the 1934 and 1960 Acts, denunciation, languages and the depositary.

Articles 19 and 20: the Office and the Union

Article 19(1): if several States desiring to become party to this Act have effected, or if several States party to this Act agree to effect, a unification of their domestic legislation on industrial designs, they may notify the Director General that a common Office shall be substituted for the national Office of each of them, and that the whole of their respective territories shall be deemed to be a single Contracting Party for the purposes of the Act.

Article 19(2) requires such a notification to take effect three months after the date of the communication.

Article 20: the Contracting Parties shall be members of the same Union as the States party to the 1934 Act or the 1960 Act.

So there is one Hague Union with three Acts, exactly as there is one Madrid Union with two treaties.

Article 21: the Assembly

Article 21(1)(a): the Contracting Parties shall be members of the same Assembly as the States bound by Article 2 of the 1967 Complementary Act.

Article 21(1)(b): each member of the Assembly shall be represented in the Assembly by one delegate, who may be assisted by alternate delegates, advisors and experts, and each delegate may represent only one Contracting Party.

Article 21(1)(c): members of the Assembly that are not members bound by the 1967 Complementary Act shall be invited to the meetings of the Assembly as observers on any matters concerning only that Act.

Article 21(2)(a) sets the functions. The Assembly shall deal with all matters concerning the maintenance and development of the Union and the implementation of this Act; exercise the rights and perform the tasks specially conferred upon it; give directions to the Director General concerning the preparations for revision conferences and decide the convocation of any such conference; amend the Regulations; review and approve the reports and activities of the Director General; determine the programme and adopt the biennial budget and approve the final accounts; adopt the financial regulations; establish committees and working groups; determine observers; and take any other appropriate action.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in348

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Three

The Lisbon Agreement 1958 and the Geneva Act of 2015

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Lisbon Agreement lets a country register an appellation of origin once, at Geneva, and have it protected in every other member country unless that country refuses within a year, and the Geneva Act of 2015 extended the same machinery to geographical indications.

In exam wording: the Lisbon Agreement for the Protection of Appellations of Origin and their International Registration, of 31 October 1958, as revised at Stockholm on 14 July 1967 and amended on 28 September 1979, establishes a Special Union within the framework of the Paris Union under which appellations of origin recognised and protected as such in the country of origin are registered with the International Bureau and protected in the other countries of the Special Union.

Articles 1 and 2: the Union and the definition

Article 1(1): the countries to which this Agreement applies constitute a Special Union within the framework of the Union for the Protection of Industrial Property.

Article 1(2): they undertake to protect on their territories, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, the appellations of origin of products of the other countries of the Special Union, recognised and protected as such in the country of origin and registered at the International Bureau.

Article 2(1) is the definition and it must be quoted exactly. Appellation of origin means the geographical denomination of a country, region, or locality, which serves to designate a product originating therein, the quality or characteristics of which are due exclusively or essentially to the geographical environment, including natural and human factors.

Three elements: a geographical denomination; designating a product originating there; whose quality or characteristics are due exclusively or essentially to the geographical environment, including natural and human factors.

Article 2(2): the country of origin is the country whose name, or the country in which is situated the region or locality whose name, constitutes the appellation of origin which has given the product its reputation.

Compare the TRIPS definition and the difference is examinable. TRIPS Article 22.1 defines a geographical indication as an indication which identifies a good as originating in a territory, region or locality, where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic is essentially attributable to its geographical origin. So a geographical indication is wider: reputation alone will do, the link need only be essential rather than exclusive or essential, and the indication need not be a geographical name at all.

An appellation of origin is therefore a narrow species of the wider genus.

Articles 3 to 6: protection

Article 3 is the scope of protection. Protection shall be ensured against any usurpation or imitation, even if the true origin of the product is indicated or if the appellation is used in translated form or accompanied by terms such as kind, type, make, imitation, or the like.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in355

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Four

The Nice Agreement 1957: Classifying Goods and Services

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Nice Agreement supplies the list of forty five classes into which goods and services are put for the purposes of registering a trade mark, and it expressly declines to decide anything about the scope of protection.

In exam wording: the Nice Agreement Concerning the International Classification of Goods and Services for the Purposes of the Registration of Marks, of 15 June 1957, as revised at Stockholm on 14 July 1967 and at Geneva on 13 May 1977 and amended on 28 September 1979, establishes a Special Union which adopts a common classification of goods and services, the classification having in each country of the Special Union the effect attributed to it by that country and not being binding on the scope of the protection afforded to any given mark.

Why a classification is needed at all

Because a trade mark right is a right in a sign for particular goods or services, not in a word at large. So every registration must define what it covers, and every search must be able to find what might conflict.

Without a common classification, a search is impossible across borders. An examiner in one country cannot know whether a mark registered elsewhere covers the same field if the two offices describe goods differently.

And a registry needs a filing structure. Forty five classes is a filing cabinet.

But a classification is an administrative tool and not a rule of law, and Article 2 of this Agreement says so, which is the single most important thing about it.

Articles 1 and 2: the Union and the classification

Article 1(1): the countries to which this Agreement applies constitute a Special Union and adopt a common classification of goods and services for the purposes of the registration of marks.

Article 1(2): the classification comprises a list of classes, together with explanatory notes if appropriate, and an alphabetical list of goods and services with an indication of the class into which each of them falls.

Article 1(3): the classification consists of the list of classes and the alphabetical list published in 1971 by the International Bureau, with such amendments and additions as the Committee of Experts may make under Article 3.

Article 1(4): the classification is in English and French, both texts being equally authentic.

Article 2(1) is the operative limitation, and it must be quoted. Subject to the requirements prescribed by this Agreement, the effect of the classification shall be that attributed to it by each country of the Special Union. In particular, the classification shall not bind the countries of the Special Union in respect of either the evaluation of the extent of the protection afforded to any given mark or the recognition of service marks.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in361

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Five

The Locarno Agreement 1968 and the Strasbourg Agreement 1971

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Locarno classifies industrial designs and Strasbourg creates the International Patent Classification, and neither decides anything about the scope of any right.

In exam wording: the Locarno Agreement Establishing an International Classification for Industrial Designs, of 8 October 1968 as amended on 28 September 1979, and the Strasbourg Agreement Concerning the International Patent Classification, of 24 March 1971 as amended on 28 September 1979, each establish a Special Union which adopts a common classification, in each case administrative in effect and expressly without binding force as to the scope of protection or the extent of the rights conferred.

The Locarno Agreement 1968

Article 1(1): the countries to which this Agreement applies constitute a Special Union and adopt a common classification for industrial designs.

Article 1(2): the classification comprises a list of classes and subclasses, an alphabetical list of goods in which industrial designs are incorporated with an indication of the classes and subclasses into which they fall, and explanatory notes.

Article 1(3): the classification consists of the list published in 1968 by the International Bureau, with such amendments and additions as the Committee of Experts may make under Article 3.

Article 1(4): the classification is in English and French, both equally authentic.

Article 2(1) is the limitation, in the same terms as Nice. Subject to the requirements prescribed by this Agreement, the international classification shall be solely of an administrative character, and each country may attribute to it the legal scope it desires. In particular, the international classification shall not bind the countries of the Special Union as regards the nature and scope of the protection afforded to the design in those countries.

The word solely is stronger than the Nice formula, and it makes the point explicitly.

Article 2(2): each country reserves the right to use the classification as a principal or as a subsidiary system.

Article 2(3): the Offices shall include in the official documents for the deposit or registration of designs, and in publications, the numbers of the classes and subclasses.

Article 2(4): in selecting terms for inclusion in the alphabetical list, the Committee of Experts shall exercise due discretion in the use of terms in which rights of exclusivity may exist, and the inclusion of any word in no way constitutes an expression of opinion on whether it is subject to such rights.

Article 3: the Committee of Experts, in which each country is represented, which decides amendments and additions, with four fifths for amendments and a simple majority for additions and other amendments, in the same structure as Nice.

Article 4: notification, entry into force and publication, amendments taking effect six months after despatch and additions on the date of despatch.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in367

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Six

The Vienna Agreement 1973: Classifying the Figurative Elements of Marks

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Vienna Agreement classifies pictures, so that an examiner confronted with a device mark of a bird in a circle can find every other bird in a circle already on the register.

In exam wording: the Vienna Agreement Establishing an International Classification of the Figurative Elements of Marks, of 12 June 1973 as amended on 1 October 1985, establishes a Special Union which adopts a classification of the figurative elements of marks into categories, divisions and sections, the classification being solely of an administrative character and not binding on the countries of the Special Union as regards the extent of the protection afforded to any mark.

The problem it answers

A word mark can be searched alphabetically. A device mark cannot be searched at all unless somebody has described the picture in a standard way.

Consider a mark consisting of an eagle with outstretched wings above a shield. An examiner asked whether it conflicts with anything on the register must be able to find every eagle, every bird of prey, every shield, and every combination.

Nice does not help. Nice classifies the goods and services; it says nothing about what the mark looks like.

So Vienna classifies the picture itself, and the classification is what makes a figurative search possible.

Articles 1 to 4: the Union, the classification and its use

Article 1: the countries to which this Agreement applies constitute a Special Union and adopt a common classification for the figurative elements of marks, called the Classification of Figurative Elements.

Article 2(1): the classification comprises a list of categories, divisions and sections in which the figurative elements of marks are classified, together with, as the case may be, explanatory notes.

Article 2(2): the classification is contained in one authentic copy, in the English and French languages, signed by the Director General and deposited with him.

Article 3, languages: the classification is established in English and French, both texts being equally authentic, and official texts in other languages are established by the International Bureau after consultation with the interested Governments.

Article 4(1) is the limitation, and it is in the same form as Nice and Locarno. Subject to the requirements prescribed by this Agreement, the scope of the classification shall be that attributed to it by each country of the Special Union. In particular, the classification shall not bind the countries of the Special Union in respect of the extent of the protection afforded to the mark.

Article 4(2): each country of the Special Union reserves the right to use the classification either as a principal or as a subsidiary system.

Article 4(3): the competent authorities of the countries of the Special Union shall include in the official documents and publications relating to registrations and renewals of marks the numbers of the categories, divisions and sections into which the figurative elements of those marks belong.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in373

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Seven

The Nairobi Treaty 1981: The Olympic Symbol

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Every State party to the Nairobi Treaty must refuse to register, and must prohibit the commercial use of, the five interlaced rings as a mark, unless the International Olympic Committee has authorised it.

In exam wording: the Nairobi Treaty on the Protection of the Olympic Symbol, adopted at Nairobi on 26 September 1981 and in force from 25 September 1982, obliges every State party to refuse or to invalidate the registration as a mark, and to prohibit by appropriate measures the use as a mark or other sign for commercial purposes, of any sign consisting of or containing the Olympic symbol as defined in the Charter of the International Olympic Committee, except with the authorisation of that Committee.

Why a treaty for one symbol

Because the five rings are not a trade mark and cannot easily be one. They are not used by a trader on goods; they identify a movement, and the International Olympic Committee licenses them to sponsors as a source of revenue.

Because the ordinary law was inadequate. A sign nobody uses in trade may not be registrable as a mark by its owner, and once it is not registered a third party may register it.

And because Paris Article 6ter does not reach it. That article protects the emblems of States and of international intergovernmental organisations, and the International Olympic Committee is neither: it is a private association under Swiss law.

So a treaty was made to do for one symbol what Article 6ter does for State emblems, and that is the doctrinal point worth making in an answer.

Article 1: the obligation

Article 1: any State party to this Treaty shall be obliged, subject to Articles 2 and 3, to refuse or to invalidate the registration as a mark and to prohibit by appropriate measures the use, as a mark or other sign, for commercial purposes, of any sign consisting of or containing the Olympic symbol, as defined in the Charter of the International Olympic Committee, except with the authorisation of the International Olympic Committee.

The definition is by reference. The Olympic symbol is defined in the Charter as five interlaced rings, and the Treaty adopts that definition rather than restating it, which is why an answer should say so rather than describing the rings.

Note the two limbs. Refuse or invalidate registration; and prohibit commercial use as a mark or other sign. The second is wider than trade mark law, because it catches use as a sign that is not a mark.

Article 2: the exceptions

Article 2(1): the obligation provided for in Article 1 shall not bind any State party to this Treaty as regards any mark consisting of or containing the Olympic symbol where that mark was registered in that State before the date on which this Treaty enters into force with respect to that State or during any period during which, in that State, the obligation is deemed suspended under Article 3.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in379

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Eight

The Washington Treaty 1989 on Integrated Circuits

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Washington Treaty was made to protect the pattern etched on a silicon chip, it never came into force, and TRIPS Article 35 made most of it binding on the whole world anyway.

In exam wording: the Treaty on Intellectual Property in Respect of Integrated Circuits, adopted at Washington on 26 May 1989, obliges contracting parties to secure, throughout their territory, intellectual property protection in respect of layout designs, or topographies, of integrated circuits, and although it has never entered into force, Article 35 of TRIPS obliges every member of the World Trade Organization to provide protection in accordance with its Articles 2 to 7 other than Article 6(3), Article 12 and Article 16(3).

Why a treaty for a chip layout

Because no existing category fitted. The three dimensional arrangement of elements on a semiconductor is not an invention in the ordinary sense, because it is dictated largely by the function; it is not a literary or artistic work; and it is not a design judged by the eye, because nobody looks at it.

Because copying is trivial and creation is expensive. A layout takes years and enormous investment; photographing and reverse engineering it takes weeks.

And because national systems had diverged. The United States Semiconductor Chip Protection Act of 1984 created a sui generis right and offered protection to foreign nationals only on a reciprocity basis, and Japan and the European Communities followed with their own. A treaty was needed to stop the reciprocity conditions hardening.

Articles 1 to 3: the Union and the subject matter

Article 1: the Contracting Parties constitute themselves into a Union for the purposes of this Treaty.

Article 2 defines the terms. An integrated circuit means a product, in its final form or an intermediate form, in which the elements, at least one of which is an active element, and some or all of the interconnections are integrally formed in and on a piece of material and which is intended to perform an electronic function. A layout design (topography) means the three dimensional disposition, however expressed, of the elements, at least one of which is an active element, and of some or all of the interconnections of an integrated circuit, or such a three dimensional disposition prepared for an integrated circuit intended for manufacture.

Article 3(1)(a) is the obligation: each Contracting Party shall have the obligation to secure, throughout its territory, intellectual property protection in respect of layout designs in accordance with this Treaty, and it shall in particular secure adequate measures to ensure the prevention of acts considered unlawful under Article 6 and appropriate legal remedies.

Article 3(2)(a): the obligation applies to layout designs that are original in the sense that they are the result of their creators' own intellectual effort and are not commonplace among creators of layout designs and manufacturers of integrated circuits at the time of their creation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in385

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Nine

The Trademark Law Treaty 1994

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Trademark Law Treaty does not say what a mark is or when it should be refused; it says what an office may demand of an applicant, and, far more usefully, what it may not.

In exam wording: the Trademark Law Treaty, adopted at Geneva on 27 October 1994 and in force from 1 August 1996, harmonises the administrative procedures for the registration of trade marks by prescribing a maximum list of the indications and elements an Office may require in an application and in subsequent requests, and by prohibiting any requirement not so listed, in particular the requirement of a certificate of registration in another country or of evidence of trading activity.

Why a treaty about forms

Because the formalities were the real barrier. By the 1990s the substantive law of trade marks was reasonably similar across the industrial world; what differed was what each office demanded.

A single change of address for a proprietor with two hundred registrations in forty countries could require forty separate requests, forty powers of attorney, forty notarisations and forty legalisations.

The cost fell disproportionately on small enterprises, and the answer was to fix a maximum list of what may be required.

And it is a maximum, not a minimum. An office may always ask for less. That is what distinguishes this treaty from every substantive instrument in the module.

Articles 1 to 3: scope and the application

Article 1 defines the abbreviated expressions, including Office, registration, application, person, holder, register, Paris Convention, Nice Classification and communication.

Article 2(1)(a): this Treaty shall apply to marks consisting of visible signs, provided that only those Contracting Parties which accept for registration three dimensional marks shall be obliged to apply this Treaty to such marks.

Article 2(1)(b) is the exclusion, and it matters: this Treaty shall not apply to hologram marks and to marks not consisting of visible signs, in particular sound marks and olfactory marks.

That single exclusion is the reason the Singapore Treaty was made twelve years later.

Article 2(2)(a): the Treaty applies to marks relating to goods, to marks relating to services, or to both.

Article 2(2)(b): it does not apply to collective marks, certification marks and guarantee marks.

Article 3(1)(a) is the heart of the Treaty. Any Contracting Party may require that an application contain some or all of the following indications or elements: a request for registration; the name and address of the applicant; the name of a State of which the applicant is a national and of which he is domiciled, and the name of a State in which he has a real and effective establishment; the legal nature of the applicant if a legal entity; the name and address of the representative where there is one; the address for service where required; a declaration claiming priority with the supporting indications; a declaration claiming protection from an exhibition; where the Office uses characters of a particular script, a transliteration; a translation of the mark; the names of the goods or services grouped according to the classes of the Nice Classification; a signature; and a declaration of intention to use the mark or of actual use.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in393

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty

The Singapore Treaty 2006, and What It Changed

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Singapore Treaty is the Trademark Law Treaty made to work for every kind of mark, with relief when a deadline is missed, rules about licence recordal, an Assembly of its own, and electronic filing.

In exam wording: the Singapore Treaty on the Law of Trademarks, adopted at Singapore on 27 March 2006 and in force from 16 March 2009, applies to marks consisting of any sign registrable under the law of a Contracting Party, provides for relief measures where a time limit is missed, regulates the recordal of licences, permits communications in electronic form, and establishes an Assembly, while otherwise following the structure of the Trademark Law Treaty of 1994.

Articles 1 to 3: scope and application

Article 1 defines the abbreviated expressions, including Office, communication, register, holder, Nice Classification, licence, licensee, Assembly, Organization and Director General.

Article 2(1): any Contracting Party shall apply this Treaty to marks consisting of signs which can be registered as marks under its law.

That is the change from the 1994 Treaty, whose Article 2(1)(b) had excluded holograms, sound marks and olfactory marks. The Singapore Treaty follows the national law: whatever a Contracting Party registers, the Treaty's procedures apply to.

Article 2(2)(a): the Treaty applies to marks relating to goods, to services, or to both.

Article 2(2)(b): it does not apply to collective marks, certification marks and guarantee marks, which is unchanged from 1994.

Article 3(1): a Contracting Party may require an application to contain some or all of the indications and elements listed, which follow the 1994 list with the addition, where the Contracting Party so provides, of one or more reproductions of the mark as prescribed in the Regulations.

Article 3(4): no Contracting Party shall demand requirements other than those referred to in the article and in Article 8, and in particular the four prohibitions of the 1994 Treaty are carried over: no extract from a register of commerce, no indication or evidence of trading activity, no indication or evidence of an activity corresponding to the goods or services, and no evidence of registration in another country except under Paris Article 6quinquies.

Articles 4 to 9: procedure

Article 4, representation and address for service, in the same terms as 1994, with a single power of attorney permitted for several applications or registrations.

Article 5, filing date, listing the indications and elements an Office may require and forbidding any other. Article 5(3) requires the Office to notify a deficiency and permit correction.

Article 6, single registration for several classes: where goods or services belonging to several classes of the Nice Classification are included in one application, that application shall result in one and the same registration.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in400

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-One

The Patent Law Treaty 2000

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Patent Law Treaty does for patents what the Trademark Law Treaty did for marks, fixing the maximum formal requirements an office may impose and giving an applicant a route back when a deadline is missed.

In exam wording: the Patent Law Treaty, adopted at Geneva on 1 June 2000 and in force from 28 April 2005, harmonises the formal requirements of national and regional patent applications and patents, prescribing a maximum set of requirements which a Contracting Party may impose, standardising the requirements for according a filing date, providing relief in respect of time limits and reinstatement of rights, and restricting the grounds on which a patent may be revoked for a formal defect.

Articles 1 and 2: vocabulary and the general principles

Article 1 defines the abbreviated expressions used throughout, including Office, application, patent, person, communication, records, Regulations, Patent Cooperation Treaty, Contracting Party and Assembly, and it is the ordinary opening article of a modern WIPO treaty.

The general principles

Article 2(1) is the character of the whole Treaty: nothing in this Treaty or the Regulations shall be construed as prescribing anything that would limit the freedom of a Contracting Party to prescribe such requirements of the applicable substantive law relating to patents as it desires.

So the Treaty says nothing about patentability, novelty, inventive step, exclusions or infringement. A candidate who suggests otherwise has misunderstood it entirely.

Article 2(2): nothing in this Treaty or the Regulations shall be construed as limiting the freedom of a Contracting Party to prescribe such requirements as, from the viewpoint of national security, it deems necessary, and Article 4 repeats it as a separate security exception.

Article 3, applications and patents to which the Treaty applies. It applies to national and regional applications for patents for invention and for patents of addition, filed with or for the Office of a Contracting Party, and to international applications under the Patent Cooperation Treaty once they have entered the national phase; and to patents for invention and patents of addition granted with effect for a Contracting Party.

Article 5: the filing date, and why it is the most useful article

Article 5(1)(a): a Contracting Party shall provide that the filing date of an application shall be the date on which its Office has received all of the following elements, filed at the option of the applicant on paper or otherwise as permitted by the Office: an express or implicit indication to the effect that the elements are intended to be an application; indications allowing the identity of the applicant to be established or allowing the applicant to be contacted by the Office; and a part which on the face of it appears to be a description.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in407

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Two

The WIPO GRATK Treaty 2024: Genetic Resources and Traditional Knowledge

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The newest of the twenty eight WIPO treaties requires a patent applicant whose invention is based on genetic resources to say where they came from, and it is the first time in twenty five years of negotiation that a disclosure requirement has appeared in a WIPO instrument.

In exam wording: the WIPO Treaty on Intellectual Property, Genetic Resources and Associated Traditional Knowledge, adopted at Geneva on 24 May 2024, requires each Contracting Party, where the claimed invention in a patent application is based on genetic resources, to require applicants to disclose the country of origin or source of those genetic resources, and, where the claimed invention is based on traditional knowledge associated with genetic resources, to disclose the indigenous peoples or local community that provided it.

Twenty five years of negotiation in one paragraph

The Convention on Biological Diversity of 1992 asserted sovereign rights over genetic resources and required access on prior informed consent and mutually agreed terms.

But a patent office in a third country knew nothing about it. An applicant could obtain a patent on an invention derived from material taken without consent, and the country of origin would learn of it only by accident, as India did with turmeric, neem and basmati.

India, Brazil and a group of like minded countries proposed a disclosure requirement at the TRIPS Council from 1999 and at the WIPO Intergovernmental Committee on Intellectual Property and Genetic Resources, Traditional Knowledge and Folklore, established in 2000.

The industrial countries resisted for two decades, arguing that a disclosure requirement would create uncertainty in the patent system and belonged in access legislation rather than in patent law.

The Diplomatic Conference of May 2024 settled it, and the compromise is in Articles 3, 4 and 5.

Articles 1 and 2: objectives and terms

Article 1, objectives. The objectives of this Treaty are to enhance the efficacy, transparency and quality of the patent system with regard to genetic resources and traditional knowledge associated with genetic resources, and to prevent patents from being granted erroneously for inventions that are not novel or inventive with regard to genetic resources and traditional knowledge associated with genetic resources.

Note what the objectives are not. They are not to create a right in genetic resources or in traditional knowledge, and they are not to enforce access legislation. They are about the quality of patents.

Article 2, list of terms. Genetic resources means genetic material of actual or potential value. Genetic material means any material of plant, animal, microbial or other origin containing functional units of heredity. Country of origin of genetic resources means the country which possesses those genetic resources in in situ conditions. Source of genetic resources refers to any source from which the applicant has obtained the genetic resources, such as a research centre, gene bank, the Multilateral System of the International Treaty on Plant Genetic Resources for Food and Agriculture, or any other ex situ collection or depository of genetic resources. Source of traditional knowledge associated with genetic resources refers to any source from which the applicant has obtained the traditional knowledge, such as scientific literature, publicly accessible databases, patent applications and patent publications.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in415

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Three

The Riyadh Design Law Treaty 2024

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Riyadh Design Law Treaty does for industrial designs what the Trademark Law Treaty did for marks and the Patent Law Treaty did for patents: it fixes the maximum formalities an office may impose and gives a designer a route back when a deadline is missed.

In exam wording: the Riyadh Design Law Treaty, adopted at Riyadh on 22 November 2024, harmonises the procedural requirements for obtaining protection of industrial designs, prescribing a maximum set of requirements for an application, standardising the requirements for according a filing date, providing a grace period in case of disclosure, permitting deferment of publication, and providing relief in respect of time limits and reinstatement of rights.

Why a fourth law treaty

Because designs were the last category without one. Marks had the Trademark Law Treaty of 1994 and the Singapore Treaty of 2006; patents had the Patent Law Treaty of 2000; designs had nothing.

Because design filings are dominated by small enterprises and individual designers. A design is cheap to create and fast to obsolesce, so the formalities matter more, proportionately, than they do for a patent.

And because the negotiation took eighteen years. The Standing Committee on the Law of Trademarks, Industrial Designs and Geographical Indications began work in 2006, and the sticking point throughout was whether a disclosure requirement for traditional cultural expressions and traditional knowledge should be included. The compromise was a resolution adopted alongside the Treaty rather than a provision in it.

Articles 1 to 3: vocabulary, principles and scope

Article 1 defines the abbreviated expressions, including Office, application, industrial design, procedure before the Office, applicant, holder, Contracting Party and Regulations.

Article 2, general principles. Nothing in this Treaty or the Regulations shall be construed as prescribing anything that would limit the freedom of a Contracting Party to prescribe such requirements of the applicable substantive law relating to industrial designs as it desires, nor as limiting the freedom of a Contracting Party to prescribe such requirements as, from the viewpoint of national security, it deems necessary.

Article 3, scope. The Treaty applies to applications for the protection of industrial designs filed with or for the Office of a Contracting Party, and to industrial designs protected with effect for a Contracting Party, in each case as prescribed in the Regulations.

Articles 4 to 6: the application and the filing date

Article 4, application. A Contracting Party may require an application to contain some or all of a listed set of indications and elements, including a request for protection, the name and address of the applicant, a representation of the industrial design as prescribed, an indication of the product or products constituting the industrial design or in relation to which it is to be used, a description, a claim where the applicable law so requires, an indication of the class of the Locarno Classification, the name of the creator, a priority declaration, and a fee.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in422

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Four

The UPOV Convention: 1961, 1978 and 1991

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

UPOV gives a plant breeder an exclusive right in a variety that is new, distinct, uniform and stable, and the 1991 Act narrowed what a farmer may do with the seed, which is why India did not join.

In exam wording: the International Convention for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants, of 2 December 1961, as revised at Geneva on 10 November 1972, on 23 October 1978 and on 19 March 1991, obliges each Contracting Party to grant and protect breeders' rights in plant varieties which are new, distinct, uniform and stable, the 1991 Act extending protection to all genera and species, extending the scope of the right to harvested material and to essentially derived varieties, and reducing the farmer's freedom to an optional exception.

First, the institutional point

UPOV is not WIPO. It is the International Union for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants, a separate intergovernmental organisation established by the 1961 Convention.

The confusion is understandable and it is a mistake. UPOV's offices are in the WIPO building in Geneva, and by an agreement between the two organisations the Director General of WIPO is the Secretary-General of UPOV. But UPOV has its own membership, its own Council and its own budget, and a State that joins WIPO does not join UPOV.

So UPOV is not one of the twenty eight treaties WIPO administers. A candidate who lists it among them has made a common error.

Articles 1 to 4: obligations and national treatment

Article 1 defines the terms, including breeder, meaning the person who bred, or discovered and developed, a variety, or that person's employer or successor in title; breeder's right, meaning the right provided for in this Convention; and variety, meaning a plant grouping within a single botanical taxon of the lowest known rank which can be defined by the expression of the characteristics resulting from a given genotype, distinguished from any other plant grouping by the expression of at least one of those characteristics, and considered as a unit with regard to its suitability for being propagated unchanged.

Article 2, the basic obligation: each Contracting Party shall grant and protect breeders' rights.

Article 3, genera and species to be protected. Article 3(1): a Contracting Party already bound by the 1961, 1972 or 1978 Act shall apply the Convention to at least fifteen plant genera or species at the date of becoming bound, and to all plant genera and species at the latest by the expiration of a period of ten years. Article 3(2): a new Contracting Party shall apply it to at least ten plant genera or species and to all plant genera and species at the latest by the expiration of a period of five years.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in429

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Five

UPOV: The Union, Its Organs and the Final Clauses, Articles 22 to 42

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

UPOV is a Union with a Council of its members and an Office headed by the Secretary-General, who is the Director General of WIPO, and a State may not join the 1991 Act until the Council has advised that its law conforms.

In exam wording: Articles 22 to 42 of the 1991 Act of the UPOV Convention govern the cancellation of the breeder's right, the membership, legal status and organs of the Union, the Council, the Office of the Union, languages and finances, the implementation of the Convention, the relations between Contracting Parties and States bound by earlier Acts, special agreements, signature, ratification and accession, reservations, communications, entry into force and the closing of earlier Acts, revision, denunciation, the preservation of existing rights, the texts and the depositary functions.

Article 22: cancellation

Article 22(1)(a): the breeder's right may be cancelled by a Contracting Party if it is established that the conditions of uniformity or stability are no longer fulfilled.

Article 22(1)(b): it may further be cancelled if, after being requested to do so and within a prescribed period, the breeder does not provide the authority with the information, documents or material deemed necessary for verifying the maintenance of the variety; does not pay the fees due to keep the right in force; or does not propose, where the denomination is cancelled after grant, another suitable denomination.

Article 22(2): the breeder's right may not be cancelled for any reason other than those referred to.

Note the difference from Article 21. Nullity looks back to the grant and destroys the right from the beginning; cancellation looks forward and ends it from the date of cancellation.

Articles 23 to 25: the Union

Article 23: the Contracting Parties shall be members of the Union.

Article 24(1): the Union shall have legal personality.

Article 24(2): the Union shall enjoy on the territory of each Contracting Party, in conformity with the laws of that party, such legal capacity as may be necessary for the fulfilment of the objectives of the Union and for the exercise of its functions.

Article 24(3): the seat of the Union and of its permanent organs is at Geneva.

Article 24(4): the Union shall have a headquarters agreement with the Swiss Confederation.

Article 25: the permanent organs of the Union shall be the Council and the Office of the Union.

Two organs only. UPOV is a smaller institution than WIPO and its structure shows it.

Article 26: the Council

Article 26(1): the Council shall consist of the representatives of the members of the Union, each member having one representative in the Council and one alternate.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in437

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Six

Bretton Woods 1944 and the Organisation That Was Never Born

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Forty four countries met at a hotel in New Hampshire in July 1944 and designed three institutions for the post war economy; two were built and the third, the trade organisation, was not, so a temporary agreement did its work for forty seven years.

In exam wording: the United Nations Monetary and Financial Conference, held at Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, from 1 to 22 July 1944, established the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, and contemplated a third institution for trade, which was negotiated as the International Trade Organization in the Havana Charter of 1948 but never came into existence, leaving the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade of 1947 to govern world trade until the World Trade Organization was established in 1995.

Why the conference happened

Because everybody present believed the depression had caused the war.

The sequence they had lived through. The crash of 1929; the Smoot Hawley Tariff Act of 1930 in the United States, raising tariffs on over twenty thousand goods; retaliation by more than twenty countries; a collapse of world trade by roughly two thirds between 1929 and 1934; competitive devaluations as countries abandoned the gold standard one by one; exchange controls and bilateral clearing arrangements; and, on that ground, the political movements that produced the war.

So the diagnosis was economic nationalism, and the remedy was to build institutions that would make it harder.

Three problems, three institutions. Exchange rate instability and balance of payments crises needed a fund. Reconstruction and development needed a bank. Protectionism needed a trade organisation.

The conference

Held at the Mount Washington Hotel, Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, from 1 to 22 July 1944, with delegates from forty four allied nations, while the war was still being fought.

Two plans were on the table. The British plan, prepared by John Maynard Keynes, proposed an International Clearing Union with an international unit of account and a mechanism placing an obligation on surplus countries as well as deficit ones. The American plan, prepared by Harry Dexter White, proposed a stabilisation fund with quotas subscribed by members and drawing rights limited to those subscriptions.

The American plan prevailed, because the United States was the creditor and the British were not.

India was represented, and was a founding member of both institutions.

The International Monetary Fund

Its purpose. To promote international monetary cooperation, to facilitate the expansion and balanced growth of international trade, to promote exchange stability, to assist in the establishment of a multilateral system of payments, and to make resources temporarily available to members with balance of payments difficulties.

The par value system. Each member fixed a par value for its currency in terms of gold or of the United States dollar, and undertook to keep the market rate within a narrow band, devaluing only with the Fund's concurrence for a fundamental disequilibrium.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in445

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Seven

GATT 1947: Its Basic Objectives, and How Far It Succeeded

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

GATT was a treaty that spent forty seven years pretending to be an organisation, and its basic objective was to reduce tariffs and eliminate discrimination so that trade could grow.

In exam wording: the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, signed at Geneva on 30 October 1947 and applied provisionally from 1 January 1948, had as its objectives the substantial reduction of tariffs and other barriers to trade and the elimination of discriminatory treatment in international commerce, pursued through the obligations of most favoured nation treatment, national treatment, tariff binding and the general prohibition of quantitative restrictions.

The objectives, from the preamble

The preamble states them, and a candidate asked for the basic objectives of GATT should begin there. The contracting parties recognise that their relations in the field of trade and economic endeavour should be conducted with a view to:

raising standards of living;

ensuring full employment and a large and steadily growing volume of real income and effective demand;

developing the full use of the resources of the world;

and expanding the production and exchange of goods.

And the means: entering into reciprocal and mutually advantageous arrangements directed to the substantial reduction of tariffs and other barriers to trade and to the elimination of discriminatory treatment in international commerce.

Note what is not there. Free trade is not an objective. The objectives are economic outcomes, and reduced tariffs and non discrimination are the means.

The four pillars

1. Most favoured nation, Article I. With respect to customs duties and charges of any kind imposed on or in connection with importation or exportation, any advantage, favour, privilege or immunity granted by any contracting party to any product originating in or destined for any other country shall be accorded immediately and unconditionally to the like product originating in or destined for the territories of all other contracting parties.

2. National treatment, Article III. Internal taxes and other internal charges, and laws, regulations and requirements affecting the internal sale, offering for sale, purchase, transportation, distribution or use of products, should not be applied to imported or domestic products so as to afford protection to domestic production; and imported products shall be accorded treatment no less favourable than that accorded to like domestic products.

Together those two are the principle of non discrimination. Most favoured nation forbids discrimination between foreigners; national treatment forbids discrimination between foreigners and locals.

3. Tariff bindings, Article II. Each contracting party shall accord to the commerce of the other contracting parties treatment no less favourable than that provided for in its Schedule of Concessions. A bound tariff may not be exceeded, and the Schedules are what the rounds of negotiation produce.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in450

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Eight

The Rounds of Negotiation, Geneva 1947 to Punta del Este 1986

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

There were eight rounds of trade negotiation between 1947 and 1994, the first five were about tariffs, the sixth and seventh discovered that tariffs were no longer the problem, and the eighth built an organisation.

In exam wording: the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade was developed through eight rounds of multilateral trade negotiations, Geneva in 1947, Annecy in 1949, Torquay in 1951, Geneva in 1956, the Dillon Round from 1960 to 1961, the Kennedy Round from 1964 to 1967, the Tokyo Round from 1973 to 1979 and the Uruguay Round from 1986 to 1994, the last of which established the World Trade Organization and concluded the TRIPS Agreement.

The five tariff rounds

Geneva, 1947. Twenty three countries, tariffs only. Some forty five thousand tariff concessions covering about a fifth of world trade. The round that produced the Agreement itself.

Annecy, 1949. Thirteen countries, tariffs only, about five thousand concessions. Ten new countries acceded.

Torquay, 1951. Thirty eight countries, tariffs only, about eight thousand seven hundred concessions, reducing 1948 tariff levels by about a quarter.

Geneva, 1956. Twenty six countries, tariffs only, and a modest result of about two and a half billion dollars in trade covered. Japan acceded.

The Dillon Round, Geneva, 1960 to 1961. Twenty six countries, tariffs only. Its occasion was the formation of the European Economic Community, whose common external tariff required renegotiation of the members' bindings under GATT Article XXIV:6.

What the five have in common. Each proceeded product by product, on a request and offer basis, bilaterally between principal suppliers, with the results extended to all by Article I. That method was workable while there were few participants and tariffs were high, and it became impossibly slow as both changed.

The Kennedy Round, 1964 to 1967

Sixty two countries. The first round to abandon the product by product method for a linear approach: a general percentage cut across the board, with exceptions negotiated.

The result was an average tariff reduction of about thirty five per cent on industrial products.

And the first non tariff agreement. An Anti Dumping Code was concluded, though it bound only its signatories, which is the first appearance of the plurilateral technique that would dominate the next round.

Its significance for this paper. It is the round at which the participants discovered that tariffs were no longer the main obstacle, because as tariffs fell, other measures became visible: subsidies, standards, customs valuation, licensing.

The Tokyo Round, 1973 to 1979

One hundred and two countries, the largest so far.

Average tariffs on industrial products fell to about six per cent.

Its real product was the Codes. Nine agreements were concluded on non tariff measures: technical barriers to trade, government procurement, subsidies and countervailing measures, customs valuation, import licensing procedures, anti dumping, and arrangements on bovine meat, dairy products and civil aircraft.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in456

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Nine

The Uruguay Round 1986 to 1994, and Its Socio Legal Implications

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Uruguay Round lasted seven and a half years, brought agriculture, textiles, services and intellectual property into the trading system, and replaced a provisional agreement with an organisation.

In exam wording: the Uruguay Round of multilateral trade negotiations was launched by the Ministerial Declaration adopted at Punta del Este on 20 September 1986, concluded by the Final Act signed at Marrakesh on 15 April 1994, and produced the Marrakesh Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization with its four annexes, including in Annex 1C the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights.

The launch: Punta del Este, 1986

The Ministerial Declaration of 20 September 1986 set the mandate, and the intellectual property part of it is worth quoting because its wording was itself the negotiation.

The mandate on trade related aspects of intellectual property rights read: in order to reduce the distortions and impediments to international trade, and taking into account the need to promote effective and adequate protection of intellectual property rights, and to ensure that measures and procedures to enforce intellectual property rights do not themselves become barriers to legitimate trade, the negotiations shall aim to clarify GATT provisions and elaborate as appropriate new rules and disciplines.

Read what that sentence concedes to each side. The industrial countries obtained "effective and adequate protection"; the developing countries obtained the qualification that enforcement measures must not themselves become barriers to legitimate trade, and the framing of the whole subject as trade related.

The Declaration continued: negotiations shall aim to develop a multilateral framework of principles, rules and disciplines dealing with international trade in counterfeit goods, taking into account work already undertaken in GATT.

And it added a sentence that mattered later: these negotiations shall be without prejudice to other complementary initiatives that may be taken in the World Intellectual Property Organization and elsewhere to deal with these matters.

The developing countries' initial position was that GATT's competence extended only to counterfeit goods in trade, and that standards belonged in WIPO. That position was maintained until about 1989 and then abandoned, for the reasons in the previous chapter.

The course of the negotiation

Fifteen negotiating groups were established under the Trade Negotiations Committee.

The Montreal mid term review, December 1988, deadlocked on agriculture and on intellectual property, and was resumed in Geneva in April 1989, where a framework for the intellectual property negotiation was agreed.

The Brussels Ministerial Conference of December 1990 was intended to conclude the Round and failed, on agriculture, between the United States and the European Communities.

The Draft Final Act of December 1991, prepared by the Director General Arthur Dunkel and known as the Dunkel Draft, put a complete text on the table. Its intellectual property chapter is substantially the TRIPS Agreement as concluded.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in461

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety

How Intellectual Property Got Into a Trade Agreement

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Four industries, one statute and one failed conference explain how a subject that had belonged to WIPO for a century arrived in a trade agreement.

In exam wording: the factors leading to the TRIPS Agreement were the growing share of intellectual property in the value of traded goods and services, the inability of the World Intellectual Property Organization to set enforceable standards or to determine a breach, the failure of the Paris Convention revision conference of 1980 to 1984, the use of unilateral trade retaliation by the United States under section 301 of its Trade Act of 1974, and the availability in the Uruguay Round of concessions in agriculture and textiles that made an exchange possible.

Factor one: what was being traded had changed

By the 1980s a large and rising share of the value of internationally traded goods was intellectual rather than physical.

A pharmaceutical tablet costs almost nothing to make and a fortune to discover. A film reel costs nothing to copy. A software disk costs less than the packaging.

So the traditional trade instrument, the tariff, protected almost nothing. A four per cent duty on an imported medicine is irrelevant if a local manufacturer can make the same molecule and sell it at a tenth of the price, lawfully, because the importing country grants no product patent.

The industrial countries characterised that as a trade problem, and the developing countries characterised it as a matter of domestic policy in which each State was entitled to strike its own balance. Both characterisations were arguable, and the word chosen in the Punta del Este mandate, trade related, was the compromise.

Factor two: WIPO could not deliver

Three limitations, and they are the same three that appear in [WIPO Today: The Committees, the Centre and the Limits].

It cannot legislate. A WIPO treaty is made by a diplomatic conference and binds only ratifiers, so a country that did not want product patents simply did not join an instrument requiring them; and no such instrument existed.

Its standards were minimum and old. Paris requires national treatment, priority and a short list of common rules, and says nothing about what may be patented, for how long, or how a right is enforced. Berne is more substantive but excludes enforcement.

It cannot adjudicate or enforce. Paris Article 28 and Berne Article 33 refer disputes to the International Court of Justice subject to a reservation, and neither has ever been used.

So a country could be in breach of Paris for twenty years and nothing would happen. That sentence is the whole of factor two.

Factor three: the Paris revision conference failed

A diplomatic conference to revise the Paris Convention was convened in 1980 and met in sessions until 1984.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in467

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-One

The Marrakesh Agreement 1994: The World Trade Organization

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Sixteen articles establish an organisation, define its scope and functions, create its organs, give it legal personality, and say nothing at all about trade.

In exam wording: the Marrakesh Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization, done at Marrakesh on 15 April 1994 and in force from 1 January 1995, establishes the World Trade Organization as the common institutional framework for the conduct of trade relations among its Members, its Articles I to VIII establishing the Organization, defining its scope, functions and structure, and providing for the Secretariat, the budget and the Organization's status.

Article I: establishment

Article I: the World Trade Organization is hereby established.

Five words, exactly as with the WIPO Convention, and exactly as significant: from 1 January 1995 the trading system had an organisation for the first time.

Article II: scope

Article II:1: the WTO shall provide the common institutional framework for the conduct of trade relations among its Members in matters related to the agreements and associated legal instruments included in the Annexes to this Agreement.

Article II:2 is the single undertaking: the agreements and associated legal instruments included in Annexes 1, 2 and 3, called the Multilateral Trade Agreements, are integral parts of this Agreement, binding on all Members.

Article II:3: the agreements included in Annex 4, called the Plurilateral Trade Agreements, are also part of this Agreement for those Members that have accepted them, and are binding on those Members; they do not create either obligations or rights for Members that have not accepted them.

Article II:4: the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade 1994 is legally distinct from the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade dated 30 October 1947.

That last paragraph matters more than it looks. GATT 1994 is a new instrument incorporating GATT 1947 as rectified and amended, together with the protocols, decisions and six Understandings, and the distinction is what allowed the grandfather clause of the Protocol of Provisional Application to be discarded.

Article III: functions

Article III:1: the WTO shall facilitate the implementation, administration and operation, and further the objectives, of this Agreement and of the Multilateral Trade Agreements, and shall also provide the framework for the implementation, administration and operation of the Plurilateral Trade Agreements.

Article III:2: the WTO shall provide the forum for negotiations among its Members concerning their multilateral trade relations in matters dealt with under the agreements in the Annexes, and may provide a forum for further negotiations and a framework for the implementation of their results.

Article III:3: the WTO shall administer the Understanding on Rules and Procedures Governing the Settlement of Disputes.

Article III:4: the WTO shall administer the Trade Policy Review Mechanism.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in473

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Two

The Structure of the WTO, and the Council for TRIPS

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The Ministerial Conference meets every two years and makes the political decisions, the General Council does everything else, and the Council for TRIPS is where every question about the intellectual property agreement is actually handled.

In exam wording: the World Trade Organization functions through a Ministerial Conference meeting at least once every two years, a General Council of all Members acting in the intervals and sitting separately as the Dispute Settlement Body and as the Trade Policy Review Body, three sectoral councils for goods, services and trade related aspects of intellectual property rights, and committees established by the Ministerial Conference, the Council for TRIPS overseeing the functioning of the TRIPS Agreement under Article IV:5 of the Marrakesh Agreement.

The Ministerial Conferences and what each did

MU asked for the significant changes since the creation of the WTO, and the Ministerial Conferences are the frame for that answer.

Singapore, December 1996. The first. It produced the Information Technology Agreement, and it introduced the four Singapore issues: investment, competition policy, transparency in government procurement, and trade facilitation, three of which developing countries subsequently refused to negotiate.

Geneva, May 1998. A declaration on global electronic commerce, and the moratorium on customs duties on electronic transmissions, which has been renewed at every Conference since.

Seattle, November and December 1999. Failed, amid large public demonstrations, on agriculture, on implementation and on the process of negotiation itself.

Doha, November 2001. Launched the Doha Development Agenda, and adopted the Declaration on the TRIPS Agreement and Public Health, which is worked in [The Doha Declaration on TRIPS and Public Health, 2001].

Cancun, September 2003. Failed on agriculture and on the Singapore issues.

Hong Kong, December 2005. Agreed to eliminate agricultural export subsidies by 2013, and adopted decisions on cotton and on duty free quota free access for least developed countries.

Geneva, 2009 and 2011. Stocktaking, with no negotiating outcome.

Bali, December 2013. The Trade Facilitation Agreement, the first multilateral agreement concluded under the WTO, together with decisions on agriculture and on least developed countries.

Nairobi, December 2015. The elimination of agricultural export subsidies, and the first Ministerial Conference held in Africa. It also recorded openly that Members did not agree on whether to reaffirm the Doha mandates.

Buenos Aires, December 2017. No ministerial declaration.

Geneva, June 2022. The Agreement on Fisheries Subsidies, the first WTO agreement with an environmental objective at its centre; a decision on the TRIPS Agreement relating to COVID-19 vaccines; and the renewal of the electronic commerce moratorium.

Abu Dhabi, February and March 2024. The renewal of the electronic commerce moratorium, and the accession of Comoros and Timor-Leste.

The two great changes since 1995

MU's question asks for the significant changes, and two dominate.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in479

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Three

Decision Making, Waivers, Amendment and Withdrawal, Articles IX, X and XV

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The WTO decides by consensus wherever it can, requires a three fourths majority to waive an obligation, and has amended its agreements exactly once in thirty years.

In exam wording: Article IX of the Marrakesh Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization provides for decision making by consensus, for voting where consensus is not reached, for the exclusive authority of the Ministerial Conference and General Council to adopt interpretations, and for waivers of obligations; Article X provides for amendment; and Article XV provides for withdrawal.

Article IX: consensus and voting

Article IX:1: the WTO shall continue the practice of decision making by consensus followed under GATT 1947. Except as otherwise provided, where a decision cannot be arrived at by consensus, the matter at issue shall be decided by voting. At meetings of the Ministerial Conference and the General Council, each Member of the WTO shall have one vote, and where the European Communities exercise their right to vote they shall have a number of votes equal to the number of their member States which are Members of the WTO. Decisions shall be taken by a majority of the votes cast, unless otherwise provided.

A footnote defines consensus: the body concerned shall be deemed to have decided by consensus on a matter submitted for its consideration if no Member, present at the meeting when the decision is taken, formally objects to the proposed decision.

Read that definition carefully, because two things follow.

Silence is consent. A Member that does not object has consented, and abstention does not block.

Absence is consent. Only a Member present at the meeting can object, so a Member that does not attend cannot prevent a decision.

And voting almost never happens. The practice is to negotiate until nobody objects, which is why the negotiating function has slowed as membership has grown.

Article IX:2: interpretations

Article IX:2: the Ministerial Conference and the General Council shall have the exclusive authority to adopt interpretations of this Agreement and of the Multilateral Trade Agreements. In the case of an interpretation of a Multilateral Trade Agreement in Annex 1, they shall exercise their authority on the basis of a recommendation by the Council overseeing the functioning of that Agreement. The decision to adopt an interpretation shall be taken by a three fourths majority of the Members.

Two points a candidate should make.

Interpretation is exclusive to the political organs, not to panels. A panel interprets in deciding a dispute, but only the Ministerial Conference and General Council can adopt an authoritative interpretation binding for the future.

For a TRIPS interpretation the Council for TRIPS must recommend it first.

The power has never been used for TRIPS. The Doha Declaration on TRIPS and Public Health of 2001 was adopted as a Ministerial Declaration and not as an Article IX:2 interpretation, and whether it is nevertheless a subsequent agreement on interpretation under Article 31(3)(a) of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties is a real question, worked in [The Doha Declaration on TRIPS and Public Health, 2001].

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in485

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Four

Membership and Accession, Articles XI, XII, XIII, XIV and XVI

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The original members joined by accepting the Agreement; everybody since has had to negotiate their way in, on terms agreed with the existing members, and the negotiation has no fixed rules and no time limit.

In exam wording: Articles XI to XIV and XVI of the Marrakesh Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization govern original membership, accession by any State or separate customs territory possessing full autonomy in the conduct of its external commercial relations on terms to be agreed between it and the WTO, the non application of the agreements between particular Members, acceptance and entry into force, and miscellaneous provisions including the requirement that Members ensure the conformity of their laws with their obligations.

Article XI: original membership

Article XI:1: the contracting parties to GATT 1947 as of the date of entry into force of this Agreement, and the European Communities, which accept this Agreement and the Multilateral Trade Agreements and for which Schedules of Concessions and Commitments are annexed to GATT 1994 and for which Schedules of Specific Commitments are annexed to the General Agreement on Trade in Services, shall become original Members of the WTO.

So original membership was open to the GATT contracting parties, and it required two things: acceptance of the whole package, and Schedules.

India was an original Member, having been a contracting party to GATT 1947 from the beginning.

Article XI:2 is the least developed country provision: the least developed countries recognised as such by the United Nations will only be required to undertake commitments and concessions to the extent consistent with their individual development, financial and trade needs or their administrative and institutional capabilities.

Article XII: accession

Article XII:1: any State or separate customs territory possessing full autonomy in the conduct of its external commercial relations and of the other matters provided for in this Agreement and the Multilateral Trade Agreements may accede to this Agreement, on terms to be agreed between it and the WTO. Such accession shall apply to this Agreement and the Multilateral Trade Agreements annexed thereto.

Two features of that sentence decide everything about accession.

A separate customs territory may accede. It need not be a State, which is how Hong Kong, Macao and Chinese Taipei are Members, and it is a difference from WIPO, whose Convention admits only States and no separate customs territory at all.

Accession is on terms to be agreed. The Agreement lays down no criteria, no benchmark and no timetable, so the terms are whatever the existing Members and the applicant negotiate.

Article XII:2: decisions on accession shall be taken by the Ministerial Conference, which shall approve the agreement on the terms of accession by a two thirds majority of the Members.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in491

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Five

The WTO and Global Economic Policy Making

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The WTO makes global economic policy in three ways, by setting rules that constrain what governments may do, by adjudicating disputes about them, and by cooperating formally with the Fund and the Bank, and it is criticised for all three.

In exam wording: the World Trade Organization participates in global economic policy making through its rule making function, through the binding adjudication of disputes under the Dispute Settlement Understanding, and through the coherence mandate in Article III:5 of the Marrakesh Agreement requiring cooperation with the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the resulting influence being contested on grounds of democratic legitimacy, of the reach of its rules into domestic regulation, and of the imbalance of negotiating power among its Members.

The three mechanisms

1. Rules that bind domestic policy. A WTO agreement does not regulate trade at the border alone; it constrains what a government may do inside its own territory. GATT Article III reaches internal taxes and regulations; the Agreement on Sanitary and Phytosanitary Measures reaches food safety standards; the Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade reaches product standards; the Agreement on Subsidies reaches industrial policy; and TRIPS reaches the whole of a Member's intellectual property law, including how long a patent lasts and what may be excluded from patentability.

That last point is the one that matters here. Before 1995 the term of an Indian patent was a matter for the Indian Parliament. After 1995 it is fixed by TRIPS Article 33 at not less than twenty years from filing.

2. Adjudication with consequences. The Dispute Settlement Understanding produces rulings that are adopted automatically by reverse consensus and that may be enforced by authorised suspension of concessions. No other economic institution has that.

3. The coherence mandate. Article III:5 of the Marrakesh Agreement provides that with a view to achieving greater coherence in global economic policy making, the WTO shall cooperate, as appropriate, with the International Monetary Fund and with the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and its affiliated agencies.

A Declaration on the Contribution of the World Trade Organization to Achieving Greater Coherence in Global Economic Policy Making was adopted at Marrakesh in 1994, and formal agreements between the WTO and each of the Fund and the Bank were concluded in 1996 and 1997.

What coherence means in practice is observer status at each other's meetings, staff level consultation, the exchange of information, and joint work: the Integrated Framework for trade related technical assistance to least developed countries, the Aid for Trade initiative launched at Hong Kong in 2005, and cooperation on trade finance.

Why the phrase is contested

MU set the phrase as a short note, and the note should say why the phrase is contentious.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in497

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Six

The Norms for Developing Countries

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

The trading system treats developing countries differently through non reciprocity, preferential access, longer time limits and technical assistance, and the collective name for all of it is special and differential treatment.

In exam wording: the norms applicable to developing countries in the multilateral trading system comprise the non reciprocity principle in Part IV of GATT 1947, the Enabling Clause of 1979 permitting differential and more favourable treatment notwithstanding Article I, the special and differential treatment provisions distributed through the WTO agreements, the transitional periods in Articles 65 and 66 of TRIPS, and the technical cooperation and technology transfer obligations in Articles 66.2 and 67.

The four generations of the idea

First, nothing. GATT 1947 as originally drafted made no distinction, beyond Article XVIII on governmental assistance to economic development, which permitted a contracting party in the early stages of development to modify concessions and to apply quantitative restrictions for balance of payments purposes.

Second, non reciprocity. Part IV, Trade and Development, was added in 1965, comprising Articles XXXVI to XXXVIII. Article XXXVI:8 is the provision to quote: the developed contracting parties do not expect reciprocity for commitments made by them in trade negotiations to reduce or remove tariffs and other barriers to the trade of less developed contracting parties.

Third, preferences. The Generalised System of Preferences was endorsed by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development in 1968 and required a waiver from Article I, granted in 1971 for ten years. The Enabling Clause of 1979, formally the Decision on Differential and More Favourable Treatment, Reciprocity and Fuller Participation of Developing Countries, made it permanent.

Fourth, special and differential treatment in the WTO agreements, which is where the idea now lives.

The Enabling Clause

Paragraph 1: notwithstanding the provisions of Article I of the General Agreement, contracting parties may accord differential and more favourable treatment to developing countries, without according such treatment to other contracting parties.

Paragraph 2 lists what it covers: preferential tariff treatment accorded by developed to developing countries in accordance with the Generalised System of Preferences; differential and more favourable treatment in respect of non tariff measures governed by multilaterally negotiated instruments; regional or global arrangements entered into amongst developing countries for the mutual reduction or elimination of tariffs and of non tariff measures on products imported from one another; and special treatment of the least developed countries in the context of any general or specific measures in favour of developing countries.

Paragraph 3 sets the conditions. Any such treatment shall be designed to facilitate and promote the trade of developing countries and not to raise barriers to or create undue difficulties for the trade of any other contracting parties; shall not constitute an impediment to the reduction or elimination of tariffs on a most favoured nation basis; and shall, in the case of treatment accorded by developed to developing countries, be designed and, if necessary, modified, to respond positively to the development, financial and trade needs of developing countries.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in502

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Seven

The Multilateral Agreements and the Single Undertaking

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

There are three kinds of agreement in the WTO system, and the difference between them is who is bound.

In exam wording: the agreements of the World Trade Organization comprise the Multilateral Trade Agreements in Annexes 1, 2 and 3 of the Marrakesh Agreement, which are integral parts of that Agreement and binding on all Members by Article II:2, and the Plurilateral Trade Agreements in Annex 4, which bind only those Members that have accepted them and create neither obligations nor rights for those that have not.

The four annexes

Annex 1A, Multilateral Agreements on Trade in Goods, containing GATT 1994 and twelve further agreements:

the Agreement on Agriculture;

the Agreement on the Application of Sanitary and Phytosanitary Measures;

the Agreement on Textiles and Clothing, which terminated itself on 1 January 2005 under its own Article 9;

the Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade;

the Agreement on Trade-Related Investment Measures;

the Agreement on Implementation of Article VI of GATT 1994, that is the Anti Dumping Agreement;

the Agreement on Implementation of Article VII of GATT 1994, that is the Customs Valuation Agreement;

the Agreement on Preshipment Inspection;

the Agreement on Rules of Origin;

the Agreement on Import Licensing Procedures;

the Agreement on Subsidies and Countervailing Measures;

and the Agreement on Safeguards.

Two more have been added since. The Agreement on Trade Facilitation, adopted at Bali in 2013 and in force from 22 February 2017, and the Agreement on Fisheries Subsidies, adopted at Geneva in 2022 and in force from 15 September 2025, both inserted into Annex 1A by protocol.

Annex 1B, the General Agreement on Trade in Services, with its annexes on the movement of natural persons, financial services, telecommunications and air transport services.

Annex 1C, the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights.

Annex 2, the Understanding on Rules and Procedures Governing the Settlement of Disputes.

Annex 3, the Trade Policy Review Mechanism.

Annex 4, the Plurilateral Trade Agreements. Four were listed in 1994: the Agreement on Trade in Civil Aircraft, the Agreement on Government Procurement, the International Dairy Agreement and the International Bovine Meat Agreement. The last two were terminated at the end of 1997, so two remain.

What GATT 1994 actually is

Article II:4 of the Marrakesh Agreement provides that GATT 1994 is legally distinct from GATT 1947.

The instrument defining GATT 1994 provides that it consists of the provisions of GATT 1947 as rectified, amended or modified before the entry into force of the WTO Agreement; the provisions of the legal instruments that entered into force under GATT 1947 before that date, being protocols relating to tariff concessions, protocols of accession, decisions on waivers still in force, and other decisions of the CONTRACTING PARTIES; the six Understandings on Articles II:1(b), XVII, XII and XVIII:B, XXIV, waivers, and XXVIII; and the Marrakesh Protocol to GATT 1994, which carries the Schedules.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in508

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Eight

WTO Dispute Settlement: The Procedure a TRIPS Complaint Follows

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

A WTO dispute runs consultations, panel, appeal, adoption, implementation and, if all else fails, authorised retaliation, and the reason it works is that a report is adopted unless everybody objects.

In exam wording: disputes under the WTO agreements, including TRIPS, are settled under the Understanding on Rules and Procedures Governing the Settlement of Disputes in Annex 2 of the Marrakesh Agreement, which provides for consultations, the establishment of a panel by the Dispute Settlement Body, panel proceedings and a report, appellate review on issues of law, adoption of reports by negative consensus, surveillance of implementation, and, where a Member fails to comply, compensation or the suspension of concessions or other obligations.

Why it is different from what went before

Under GATT 1947 a panel report had to be adopted by consensus. The losing party was present and could object, so it could block adoption of a report against it, and several important reports were never adopted.

The Understanding reversed the rule. A report is adopted unless the Dispute Settlement Body decides by consensus not to adopt it, which means every Member including the winning party would have to agree not to adopt. That is called negative or reverse consensus, and it makes adoption automatic in practice.

The same reversal applies at three points: the establishment of a panel under Article 6.1, the adoption of panel and Appellate Body reports under Articles 16.4 and 17.14, and the authorisation of retaliation under Article 22.6.

Article 23 forbids unilateralism. When Members seek the redress of a violation, they shall have recourse to and abide by the rules and procedures of this Understanding, and shall not make a determination that a violation has occurred except through it.

The stages

Stage one: consultations, Article 4. The complainant requests consultations in writing, giving reasons, identifying the measures and the legal basis. The respondent shall reply within ten days and enter into consultations within thirty days. If it does not, or if consultations fail to settle the dispute within sixty days, the complainant may request a panel.

Article 4.10 requires Members, during consultations, to give special attention to the particular problems and interests of developing country Members.

Article 5 offers good offices, conciliation and mediation, voluntary and confidential, available at any time and terminable at any time.

Stage two: the panel, Articles 6 to 16. The Dispute Settlement Body establishes a panel at the latest at the meeting following that at which the request first appears on the agenda, unless it decides by consensus not to establish one.

A panel has three members unless the parties agree within ten days to five, and they serve in their individual capacities. If there is no agreement on composition within twenty days, either party may ask the Director-General to appoint them.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in513

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Nine

The Other Mechanisms: Good Offices, Conciliation, Mediation and Arbitration

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

Besides the panel route, the Understanding offers good offices, conciliation, mediation and arbitration, all voluntary, all confidential, and all available at any time.

In exam wording: apart from the panel and appellate procedure, the Dispute Settlement Understanding provides for consultations under Article 4, good offices, conciliation and mediation under Article 5, and arbitration under Article 25, to which must be added the arbitration on the reasonable period of time under Article 21.3(c), the arbitration on the level of suspension under Article 22.6, and the Multi-Party Interim Appeal Arbitration Arrangement of 2020.

Why there are other mechanisms at all

Article 3.7 states the preference. The aim of the mechanism is to secure a positive solution to a dispute, and a solution mutually acceptable to the parties and consistent with the covered agreements is clearly to be preferred.

So litigation is the fallback, not the object. Everything in this chapter exists because the Understanding would rather the parties settled.

Consultations, Article 4

The first mechanism and the most used. Every complaint must begin here, and a large proportion of matters never go further.

Article 4.3: the respondent shall reply to the request within ten days and enter into consultations in good faith within thirty days, with a view to reaching a mutually satisfactory solution. If it does not, the complainant may proceed directly to request a panel.

Article 4.7: if consultations fail to settle the dispute within sixty days, the complainant may request a panel, and it may request one earlier if both parties jointly consider that consultations have failed.

Article 4.10 requires special attention to the particular problems and interests of developing country Members.

Article 4.6: consultations are confidential and without prejudice to the rights of either party in further proceedings.

Good offices, conciliation and mediation, Article 5

One article, three procedures, and the Understanding does not define them. The distinction is one of degree, and a candidate should give it in these terms.

Good offices is a third party providing the channel and the venue so the parties can talk, without entering the substance.

Conciliation is a third party taking part in the discussions and helping the parties understand each other's positions.

Mediation is a third party going further and proposing terms of settlement, which the parties remain free to reject.

Article 5.1: all three are procedures that are undertaken voluntarily if the parties to the dispute so agree.

Article 5.2: proceedings, and in particular positions taken by the parties during them, shall be confidential, and without prejudice to the rights of either party in any further proceedings.

Article 5.3: they may be requested at any time by any party, may begin at any time and be terminated at any time. Once terminated, the complaining party may proceed with a request for a panel.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in519

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred

UNESCO, the ILO, the FAO and the WHO

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

UNESCO runs a rival copyright convention and the cultural treaties, the International Labour Organization co-administers performers' rights, the Food and Agriculture Organization runs the plant genetic resources treaty, and the World Health Organization is where the argument about patents and medicines is actually conducted.

UNESCO

The United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization is the second copyright organisation, and its instrument is the Universal Copyright Convention, signed at Geneva on 6 September 1952 and revised at Paris on 24 July 1971.

Why it exists. Berne demanded a high level of protection and, crucially, protection without formalities. The United States required registration and notice and a manufacturing clause, and the Soviet Union and much of Latin America were outside Berne. A convention was needed that those countries could join, and UNESCO built one.

Article I obliges each Contracting State to provide adequate and effective protection of the rights of authors and other copyright proprietors in literary, scientific and artistic works, including writings, musical, dramatic and cinematographic works, and paintings, engravings and sculpture.

Article II is national treatment for published works of nationals of any Contracting State and works first published in that State.

Article III is the famous one, and it is the copyright notice. A State whose domestic law requires formalities such as deposit, registration, notice, notarial certificates, fees or manufacture shall regard those requirements as satisfied for foreign works if, from the time of first publication, all copies bear the copyright symbol accompanied by the name of the copyright proprietor and the year of first publication, placed so as to give reasonable notice.

That single sentence is why the notice appears on the reverse of every book printed in the second half of the twentieth century.

Article IV.2 sets the term. Not less than the life of the author and twenty five years after death. Berne requires fifty. The lower floor was the price of a wider membership.

Article V makes translation an exclusive right, but permits a State to grant a compulsory translation licence after seven years if no authorised translation into a language in general use there has been published.

Articles Vbis, Vter and Vquater, added at Paris in 1971, let a State regarded as a developing country in conformity with the established practice of the General Assembly notify the Director-General and take further translation and reproduction exceptions, effective for ten year periods.

Article XI establishes an Intergovernmental Committee to study application and operation, prepare revisions, and cooperate with UNESCO, the Berne Union and the Organization of American States.

Article XVII and its Appendix Declaration are the safeguard clause, and they are what killed the Convention. Article XVII provides that the Convention shall not in any way affect the Berne Convention or membership in the Berne Union. The Appendix Declaration, an integral part of the Convention for States bound by Berne, provides that works whose country of origin is a country that has withdrawn from the Berne Union after 1 January 1951 shall not be protected by the Universal Copyright Convention in Berne Union countries, and that the Universal Copyright Convention does not apply between countries of the Berne Union to works whose country of origin is a Berne country.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in524

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred One

WIPO and the WTO Compared

Syllabus topic 2, "International Organisation and"

In one line

WIPO makes intellectual property law and cannot enforce it, the WTO enforces intellectual property law and barely makes it, and since 1996 they have had a treaty telling each other so.

The objectives, side by side

WIPO, Article 3 of the Convention of 1967. The objectives of the Organization are, first, to promote the protection of intellectual property throughout the world through cooperation among States and, where appropriate, in collaboration with any other international organization, and second, to ensure administrative cooperation among the Unions.

Two objectives, and both are about protection. WIPO exists to raise protection and to run the Unions tidily. It is not asked to balance protection against anything.

The WTO, the preamble and Article II:1 of the Marrakesh Agreement. The parties recognise that trade and economic relations should be conducted with a view to raising standards of living, ensuring full employment, expanding production and trade in goods and services, allowing for the optimal use of the world's resources in accordance with the objective of sustainable development, and ensuring that developing countries secure a share in the growth in international trade commensurate with the needs of their economic development. The Organization provides the common institutional framework for the conduct of trade relations among Members.

Note what is missing. Intellectual property is not a WTO objective at all. It is a subject matter of one of its annexes. Protection is a means to a trade end, which is exactly why TRIPS Article 7 speaks of a balance and the WIPO Convention does not.

The functions, side by side

WIPO, Article 4. It shall promote measures to facilitate efficient protection and to harmonize national legislation; shall perform the administrative tasks of the Paris Union, the Special Unions and the Berne Union; may agree to assume the administration of any other agreement designed to promote protection; shall encourage the conclusion of international agreements; shall offer legal-technical assistance to States requesting it; shall assemble and disseminate information and publish studies; and shall maintain services facilitating international protection and, where appropriate, provide for registration and publication of registration data.

The WTO, Article III. It shall facilitate the implementation, administration and operation of the Agreement and the Multilateral Trade Agreements and provide the framework for the Plurilateral ones; shall provide the forum for negotiations; shall administer the Dispute Settlement Understanding; shall administer the Trade Policy Review Mechanism; and, with a view to greater coherence in global economic policy-making, shall cooperate with the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development.

Put the two lists next to each other and the difference is visible. WIPO registers, harmonises, assists and publishes. The WTO negotiates, adjudicates, reviews and coordinates. Only one of them runs a court.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in531

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Module III

The TRIPS Agreement

munotes.in

Chapter One Hundred Two

The TRIPS Agreement: What It Is and Why It Changed Everything

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

TRIPS is Annex 1C of the Marrakesh Agreement, it binds every WTO Member, and it is the first intellectual property treaty anyone can be made to obey.

In exam wording: the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights is Annex 1C to the Marrakesh Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization, concluded on 15 April 1994 and in force from 1 January 1995. Being a Multilateral Trade Agreement under Article II:2 of that Agreement it is an integral part of it and binding on all Members, and by its own Article 64 it is enforceable through the Dispute Settlement Understanding.

The shape of the Agreement

Seventy three articles in seven Parts, and a candidate should be able to name the Parts.

Part I, general provisions and basic principles, Articles 1 to 8. Scope of obligations, the incorporated conventions, national treatment, most favoured nation, exhaustion, objectives and principles.

Part II, standards concerning the availability, scope and use of intellectual property rights, Articles 9 to 40, in eight Sections: copyright and related rights, trademarks, geographical indications, industrial designs, patents, layout designs of integrated circuits, protection of undisclosed information, and control of anti competitive practices in contractual licences.

Part III, enforcement of intellectual property rights, Articles 41 to 61, in five Sections: general obligations, civil and administrative procedures and remedies, provisional measures, special requirements related to border measures, and criminal procedures.

Part IV, acquisition and maintenance of intellectual property rights and related inter partes procedures, Article 62.

Part V, dispute prevention and settlement, Articles 63 and 64.

Part VI, transitional arrangements, Articles 65 to 67.

Part VII, institutional arrangements and final provisions, Articles 68 to 73.

What was new

Five things, and no earlier treaty had any of them.

Minimum standards across every field at once. Paris governed industrial property, Berne governed copyright, Rome governed neighbouring rights, and none of them touched the others. TRIPS covers seven categories in one instrument and, by Article 2.1 and Article 9.1, carries the older conventions inside itself.

Enforcement obligations. Part III requires Members to make procedures available, to give courts particular powers, to provide provisional measures, border measures and criminal penalties for wilful trademark counterfeiting and copyright piracy on a commercial scale. Paris and Berne said almost nothing about how a right was to be vindicated.

Most favoured nation. Article 4 puts a trade principle into intellectual property for the first time, so an advantage given to one country's nationals must be given to all.

Dispute settlement with consequences. Article 64 applies the Dispute Settlement Understanding, so a breach can be found by a panel and, on non compliance, retaliation can be authorised.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in537

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Three

TRIPS Article 1: The Nature and Scope of Obligations

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Give effect to it, you may go further, do it your own way, and intellectual property means the seven Sections of Part II.

Article 1.1, the three sentences

"Members shall give effect to the provisions of this Agreement." The obligation is one of result. Compliance is measured by whether the Member's law provides what the Agreement requires, not by whether it copies the words.

"Members may, but shall not be obliged to, implement in their law more extensive protection than is required by this Agreement, provided that such protection does not contravene the provisions of this Agreement." This is the minimum standards rule. It has two limbs: more is permitted, and more is permitted only if it does not contravene the Agreement. The proviso matters, because a Member cannot use extra protection to defeat national treatment or most favoured nation.

"Members shall be free to determine the appropriate method of implementing the provisions of this Agreement within their own legal system and practice." This is the freedom of method. A Member may implement by statute, by delegated legislation, by common law, or by a mixture, and a Member with a dualist constitution such as India is not required to make the Agreement directly effective.

Why the third sentence is the one India uses

India is a dualist State. A treaty does not become part of Indian law by ratification; Parliament must legislate under Article 253 of the Constitution.

So TRIPS is not directly enforceable in an Indian court. A litigant cannot sue on it. The Agreement takes effect in India through the Patents Act, the Copyright Act, the Trade Marks Act and the rest.

And Indian courts have said so. Where a party has argued that an Indian provision conflicts with TRIPS, the answer has been that the statute governs and the Agreement is at most an aid to construction.

Article 1.2, the definition

"For the purposes of this Agreement, the term intellectual property refers to all categories of intellectual property that are the subject of Sections 1 through 7 of Part II."

Those seven Sections are: copyright and related rights; trademarks; geographical indications; industrial designs; patents; layout designs of integrated circuits; and protection of undisclosed information.

Section 8 is not in the definition, because Section 8 is control of anti competitive practices in contractual licences, which is not a category of intellectual property but a discipline on how the categories are licensed.

Why the definition matters. Every later obligation expressed in terms of intellectual property, including Article 3 national treatment, Article 4 most favoured nation, and the whole of Part III enforcement, is bounded by this list. Plant varieties are a good example: Article 27.3(b) requires their protection but there is no Section for them, so a plant variety right is not intellectual property for the purposes of the definition, though the obligation to protect is real.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in542

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Four

TRIPS Article 2: Paris, Berne, Rome and Washington Carried In

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Article 2.1 makes Paris Articles 1 to 12 and 19 binding on every WTO Member, and Article 2.2 says nothing in TRIPS cuts down what those four conventions already require.

Article 2.1

"In respect of Parts II, III and IV of this Agreement, Members shall comply with Articles 1 through 12, and Article 19, of the Paris Convention (1967)."

Three things follow.

Paris now binds non parties. A WTO Member that never joined Paris must nonetheless comply with those Articles, and a breach is a breach of TRIPS, actionable before a panel.

The reference is to the Stockholm Act of 14 July 1967, as footnote 2 states, so it is the current substantive text and not an earlier Act.

The incorporation is partial and deliberate. Articles 1 to 12 are the substantive provisions and Article 19 preserves the right to make special agreements. Articles 13 to 18 and 20 to 30, being the administrative and final clauses on the Assembly, the International Bureau, finances, revision and disputes, are left out, because those govern the Paris Union and a WTO Member is not thereby made a member of the Union.

Article 6ter comes in with the rest, and that is why the 1995 agreement between WIPO and the WTO had to provide, in its Article 3, that the International Bureau administers the emblems procedures for WTO Members under the Paris Article 6ter machinery.

What Paris Articles 1 to 12 and 19 actually contain

Article 1: the Union, and the scope of industrial property.

Article 2: national treatment for nationals of Union countries.

Article 3: assimilation of certain categories of person.

Article 4: the right of priority, twelve months for patents and utility models, six for designs and marks.

Article 4bis: independence of patents obtained for the same invention in different countries.

Article 4ter: the inventor's right to be mentioned.

Article 4quater: patentability not to be refused because sale is restricted by domestic law.

Article 5: importation, failure to work, compulsory licences and the four year and three year time bars, plus marking and grace periods for fees.

Article 5bis to 5quinquies: grace period for fees, patents in international traffic, process patents on imported products, and industrial designs.

Article 6: independence of marks registered in different countries.

Article 6bis: well known marks.

Article 6ter: State emblems, official hallmarks and emblems of intergovernmental organisations.

Article 6quater to 6septies: assignment of marks, protection as registered in the country of origin, service marks, collective marks, and marks registered by an agent.

Article 7 and 7bis: nature of the goods, and collective marks.

Article 8: trade names, protected without filing or registration.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in546

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Five

TRIPS Article 3: National Treatment

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Treat foreign nationals no worse than your own, subject to the exceptions the four older conventions already allowed.

Article 3.1

"Each Member shall accord to the nationals of other Members treatment no less favourable than that it accords to its own nationals with regard to the protection of intellectual property."

Four elements to notice.

The beneficiary is the national, not the Member. This follows Article 1.3, and it is why a WTO Member cannot satisfy the obligation by granting a favour at State level.

The standard is treatment no less favourable, which is a standard of effective equality of competitive opportunity and not a requirement of identical formal rules.

The subject is protection, and footnote 3 defines it. For the purposes of Articles 3 and 4, protection shall include matters affecting the availability, acquisition, scope, maintenance and enforcement of intellectual property rights, as well as those matters affecting the use of intellectual property rights specifically addressed in the Agreement.

That footnote is the operative width of the obligation. It means national treatment reaches registration procedure, opposition, renewal, remedies and border measures, not merely the existence of the right.

The obligation is subject to the exceptions already provided in Paris (1967), Berne (1971), the Rome Convention and the IPIC Treaty. TRIPS does not create new national treatment exceptions; it carries the old ones forward.

The carried exceptions worth naming

Berne Article 7(8), the comparison of terms. A country need not protect a work for longer than the term fixed in the country of origin. So a Member with a life plus sixty term may give a foreign work only life plus fifty if that is what its home country gives.

Berne Article 2(7), works of applied art. Where a work is protected in its country of origin solely as a design, it may claim only design protection elsewhere.

Berne Article 6, restricting protection of works of nationals of non Union countries that fail to protect Union authors adequately, and a Member availing itself of it must notify the Council for TRIPS.

Rome Article 16(1)(b), on reservations to the equitable remuneration right for phonograms, likewise notifiable.

And the second sentence of Article 3.1 carves out neighbouring rights. In respect of performers, producers of phonograms and broadcasting organisations, national treatment only applies in respect of the rights provided under this Agreement, that is Article 14. A Member giving its own performers a broader right than Article 14 requires need not extend that broader right to foreigners.

Article 3.2

"Members may avail themselves of the exceptions permitted under paragraph 1 in relation to judicial and administrative procedures, including the designation of an address for service or the appointment of an agent within the jurisdiction of a Member, only where such exceptions are necessary to secure compliance with laws and regulations which are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Agreement and where such practices are not applied in a manner which would constitute a disguised restriction on trade."

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in551

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Six

TRIPS Articles 4 and 5: Most Favoured Nation Treatment

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Any advantage a Member gives to one country's nationals must be given immediately and unconditionally to every other Member's nationals, subject to four listed exceptions.

Why it is remarkable

Most favoured nation is the oldest principle of trade law, and it is GATT Article I. It had never been applied to intellectual property.

Paris and Berne have national treatment but no most favoured nation. Under Paris a country could give French nationals a better deal than German nationals by a bilateral agreement, provided both got at least what its own nationals got.

TRIPS Article 4 closes that door. It is the single clearest sign that intellectual property had entered the trade system, and it is worth saying so in an answer.

Article 4, the rule

"With regard to the protection of intellectual property, any advantage, favour, privilege or immunity granted by a Member to the nationals of any other country shall be accorded immediately and unconditionally to the nationals of all other Members."

Note the width. The comparator is the nationals of any other country, not merely of another Member. So an advantage given to the nationals of a non Member must still be extended to all Members' nationals.

Note the two adverbs. Immediately, so there is no transition; and unconditionally, so a Member may not demand reciprocity as the price of extending the advantage.

And note that protection carries the footnote 3 definition again, so most favoured nation reaches availability, acquisition, scope, maintenance and enforcement.

The four exceptions

Article 4(a): advantages deriving from international agreements on judicial assistance or law enforcement of a general nature and not particularly confined to the protection of intellectual property. A mutual legal assistance treaty is not caught.

Article 4(b): advantages granted in accordance with Berne (1971) or the Rome Convention authorising that the treatment accorded be a function not of national treatment but of the treatment accorded in another country. This preserves the reciprocity provisions, above all the comparison of terms in Berne Article 7(8).

Article 4(c): advantages in respect of the rights of performers, producers of phonograms and broadcasting organisations not provided under this Agreement. The same carve out as in Article 3.1, applied to most favoured nation.

Article 4(d): advantages deriving from international agreements related to the protection of intellectual property which entered into force prior to the entry into force of the WTO Agreement, provided those agreements are notified to the Council for TRIPS and do not constitute an arbitrary or unjustifiable discrimination against nationals of other Members.

Article 4(d) is the grandfather clause, and it has a hard edge. It saves only agreements in force before 1 January 1995. A bilateral agreement made after that date giving one country's nationals a better deal must be extended to everyone, which is why the intellectual property chapters of modern free trade agreements are drafted as obligations on both parties to legislate rather than as advantages granted to the other party's nationals.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in556

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Seven

TRIPS Articles 6, 7 and 8: Exhaustion, Objectives and Principles

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Article 6 takes exhaustion off the table, and Articles 7 and 8 are the balancing provisions the Doha Declaration later leaned on.

Article 6, exhaustion

"For the purposes of dispute settlement under this Agreement, subject to the provisions of Articles 3 and 4, nothing in this Agreement shall be used to address the issue of the exhaustion of intellectual property rights."

What exhaustion is. Once a protected article has been put on the market by or with the consent of the right holder, the right in that particular article is spent, and the purchaser may resell it. The question is the geographical scope of that rule.

Three possible regimes.

National exhaustion: the right is exhausted only by a first sale inside the country, so importing a copy lawfully sold abroad still infringes.

Regional exhaustion: exhaustion operates within a defined region, as in the European Union.

International exhaustion: a first sale anywhere in the world exhausts the right, so parallel imports are lawful.

Article 6 says nothing about which is right. It says the question may not be litigated at the WTO. That is a negotiating failure written into the text: the parties could not agree, so they agreed not to argue.

The two provisos matter. The exclusion is subject to Articles 3 and 4, so a Member may not operate an exhaustion rule that discriminates by nationality; and it operates for the purposes of dispute settlement, so it is jurisdictional rather than substantive.

The Doha Declaration confirmed it. Paragraph 5(d) states that the effect of the TRIPS provisions relevant to the exhaustion of intellectual property rights is to leave each Member free to establish its own regime for such exhaustion without challenge, subject to the most favoured nation and national treatment provisions.

What India did with Article 6

Section 107A(b) of the Patents Act, 1970 provides that importation of patented products by any person from a person who is duly authorised under the law to produce and sell or distribute the product shall not be considered an infringement.

That is international exhaustion, and the words duly authorised under the law refer to the law of the exporting country, so the authorisation need not come from the Indian patentee.

Section 30(3)(b) of the Trade Marks Act, 1999 produces the same result for marks where goods have been lawfully acquired, and Indian courts have read it as adopting international exhaustion.

The freedom to do this comes from Article 6, and it is one of the most valuable flexibilities India has.

Article 7, objectives

"The protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users of technological knowledge and in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations."

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in560

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Nine

TRIPS Articles 15 to 21: Trademarks

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Any sign capable of distinguishing is registrable, registration gives the right to stop confusing use, well known marks are protected across dissimilar goods, and use may not be unjustifiably encumbered.

Article 15, protectable subject matter

Article 15.1, the definition. Any sign, or any combination of signs, capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one undertaking from those of other undertakings, shall be capable of constituting a trademark. Such signs, in particular words including personal names, letters, numerals, figurative elements and combinations of colours, as well as any combination of such signs, shall be eligible for registration.

Three permissions follow in the same paragraph. Where signs are not inherently capable of distinguishing, a Member may make registrability depend on distinctiveness acquired through use. And a Member may require, as a condition of registration, that signs be visually perceptible.

That last permission is why sound and smell marks are optional. India used it: section 2(1)(zb) of the Trade Marks Act, 1999 requires a mark capable of being represented graphically.

Article 15.2: paragraph 1 does not prevent a Member from denying registration on other grounds, provided they do not derogate from Paris (1967). So absolute and relative grounds of refusal remain national, subject to Paris.

Article 15.3: a Member may make registrability depend on use, but actual use shall not be a condition for filing, and an application shall not be refused solely because intended use has not taken place before the expiry of three years from the application date.

Article 15.4: the nature of the goods or services shall in no case form an obstacle to registration. This is Paris Article 7 restated, and it is the provision the plain packaging complainants invoked, arguing that Australia had made tobacco's nature an obstacle.

Article 15.5: Members shall publish each mark either before or promptly after registration and afford a reasonable opportunity for petitions to cancel; opposition may additionally be afforded.

So cancellation is compulsory and opposition is optional, which is the reverse of what most candidates assume. India provides both, opposition under section 21 and rectification under sections 57 and 47.

Article 16, rights conferred

Article 16.1, the core right. The owner of a registered mark shall have the exclusive right to prevent all third parties not having the owner's consent from using in the course of trade identical or similar signs for goods or services which are identical or similar to those registered where such use would result in a likelihood of confusion. In the case of an identical sign for identical goods or services, a likelihood of confusion shall be presumed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in571

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Ten

TRIPS Articles 22 to 24: Geographical Indications

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Every Member must give the legal means to stop misleading use of a geographical indication, wines and spirits get protection without any need to prove that anyone was misled, and Article 24 takes much of it back.

Article 22.1, the definition

"Geographical indications are, for the purposes of this Agreement, indications which identify a good as originating in the territory of a Member, or a region or locality in that territory, where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic of the good is essentially attributable to its geographical origin."

Four elements.

An indication, not necessarily a place name. Basmati and Feta are indications without being place names.

Identifying a good, so services are outside. A geographical indication for a service is not required by TRIPS.

Originating in a territory, region or locality of a Member.

Where a given quality, reputation or other characteristic is essentially attributable to that origin. Reputation alone suffices, which is a lower threshold than the Lisbon Agreement's appellation of origin, and it is what lets a mark with a reputation but no distinctive terroir qualify.

Article 22.2 and 22.3, the general obligation

Article 22.2: Members shall provide the legal means for interested parties to prevent, first, the use of any means in the designation or presentation of a good that indicates or suggests that it originates in a geographical area other than the true place of origin in a manner which misleads the public; and second, any use which constitutes an act of unfair competition within the meaning of Paris Article 10bis.

So the general standard is a misleading standard. The claimant must show that the public is misled, or an act of unfair competition.

Article 22.3: a Member shall, ex officio if its legislation so permits or at the request of an interested party, refuse or invalidate the registration of a trademark which contains or consists of a geographical indication for goods not originating in the territory indicated, if use of the indication in the mark for such goods in that Member is of such a nature as to mislead the public as to the true place of origin.

Article 22.4 extends the protection to an indication literally true as to the territory in which the goods originate but which falsely represents that they originate in another territory. That covers the case of a genuine Champagne in a different country of the same name.

Article 23, wines and spirits

Article 23.1: each Member shall provide the legal means to prevent use of a geographical indication identifying wines for wines, or spirits for spirits, not originating in the place indicated, even where the true origin of the goods is indicated or the geographical indication is used in translation or accompanied by expressions such as "kind", "type", "style", "imitation" or the like.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in576

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Eleven

TRIPS Articles 25 and 26: Industrial Designs

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Protect independently created designs that are new or original, give the owner the right to stop commercial copying, and let the protection last at least ten years.

Article 25.1, the conditions

"Members shall provide for the protection of independently created industrial designs that are new or original."

Three things are settled by that sentence and one is left open.

Independently created excludes copying, so a design arrived at independently is protectable even if it resembles another.

New or original is stated in the alternative, so a Member may choose a novelty standard, an originality standard, or both. India chose novelty and originality together in section 4 of the Designs Act, 2000.

Two permissions follow. Members may provide that designs are not new or original if they do not significantly differ from known designs or combinations of known design features. And Members may provide that such protection shall not extend to designs dictated essentially by technical or functional considerations.

That second permission is the functionality exclusion, and it is section 2(d) of the Designs Act, which excludes any mode or principle of construction and anything which is in substance a mere mechanical device.

What is left open is registration. TRIPS does not say whether protection must be by registration or may arise automatically, so a Member may operate a registered design system, an unregistered design right, or a copyright based system.

Article 25.2, textiles

"Each Member shall ensure that requirements for securing protection for textile designs, in particular in regard to any cost, examination or publication, do not unreasonably impair the opportunity to seek and obtain such protection. Members shall be free to meet this obligation through industrial design law or through copyright law."

Why textiles have their own paragraph. A fabric or garment design has a commercial life measured in a single season. A registration system with a fee, an examination and a publication delay is useless to it, because by the time protection issues the market has moved on.

The obligation is therefore about the cost and speed of access, not about the substantive standard.

And the second sentence is an express permission to use copyright, which is how many countries protect textile designs. India uses design registration, with the Locarno classification and a class for textiles, and its Designs Rules provide a simplified procedure.

Article 26.1, the right

"The owner of a protected industrial design shall have the right to prevent third parties not having the owner's consent from making, selling or importing articles bearing or embodying a design which is a copy, or substantially a copy, of the protected design, when such acts are undertaken for commercial purposes."

Three acts: making, selling, importing. Not using, and not exporting.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in582

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twelve

TRIPS Article 27: Patentable Subject Matter

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Patents must be available for any invention in all fields of technology, without discrimination, subject to three permitted exclusions.

Article 27.1, the obligation

"Subject to the provisions of paragraphs 2 and 3, patents shall be available for any inventions, whether products or processes, in all fields of technology, provided that they are new, involve an inventive step and are capable of industrial application."

Four elements.

Any inventions, but the Agreement does not define invention. That omission is the single largest space left to national law, and it is where section 3 of the Indian Patents Act operates.

Whether products or processes. This is the sentence that ended India's process only regime for medicines and food, which the Patents Act, 1970 had introduced on the recommendation of the Ayyangar Committee.

In all fields of technology. No field may be excluded as such, subject only to paragraphs 2 and 3.

New, inventive step, capable of industrial application. Footnote 5 permits a Member to deem inventive step and capable of industrial application synonymous with non obvious and useful, which reconciles the European and American vocabularies.

The non discrimination sentence

"Subject to paragraph 4 of Article 65, paragraph 8 of Article 70 and paragraph 3 of this Article, patents shall be available and patent rights enjoyable without discrimination as to the place of invention, the field of technology and whether products are imported or locally produced."

Three prohibited grounds of discrimination.

Place of invention, so a Member may not favour inventions made at home.

Field of technology, so a Member may not single out pharmaceuticals for worse treatment.

Whether products are imported or locally produced, which is the sentence that hangs over every local working requirement.

The Canada pharmaceutical patents panel drew the distinction that matters: Article 27.1 forbids discrimination, not differentiation. A rule that treats a field differently for a bona fide reason, applied even handedly, is not necessarily discriminatory.

And the imported or locally produced limb has never been decided. The United States challenged Brazil's local working requirement in Brazil: Measures Affecting Patent Protection, and the dispute ended in a mutually agreed solution with no findings, which is the point made in the earlier chapter on maintaining a right.

Article 27.2, the ordre public exclusion

Members may exclude inventions "the prevention within their territory of the commercial exploitation of which is necessary to protect ordre public or morality, including to protect human, animal or plant life or health or to avoid serious prejudice to the environment, provided that such exclusion is not made merely because the exploitation is prohibited by their law."

Read the structure. The exclusion is available where preventing commercial exploitation is necessary for one of the listed purposes.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in587

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirteen

TRIPS Articles 28, 29 and 30: Rights, Disclosure and Exceptions

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

A product patent stops making, using, offering for sale, selling and importing; a process patent stops using the process and dealing in the direct product; and exceptions must be limited.

Article 28.1, the rights conferred

Where the subject matter is a product, the owner may prevent third parties without consent from making, using, offering for sale, selling, or importing for these purposes that product.

Where the subject matter is a process, the owner may prevent third parties from using the process, and from using, offering for sale, selling, or importing for these purposes at least the product obtained directly by that process.

Note four things.

The rights are rights to prevent, not rights to work. A patentee may be barred from working its own invention by regulation.

Offering for sale is included, so an offer alone is an infringement.

Importing is included, but footnote 6 subjects it to Article 6. So the importation right is subject to whatever exhaustion rule the Member has chosen, which is the textual link between Article 28 and India's section 107A(b).

The process patent reaches the direct product, and the word directly limits it: a product two steps downstream is not caught.

Article 28.2: patent owners shall also have the right to assign, or transfer by succession, the patent and to conclude licensing contracts.

India's counterpart is section 48 of the Patents Act, which mirrors Article 28.1 almost word for word, and sections 68 to 70 on assignment and licensing.

Article 29, conditions on applicants

Article 29.1, disclosure. Members shall require that the applicant disclose the invention in a manner sufficiently clear and complete for the invention to be carried out by a person skilled in the art, and may require the applicant to indicate the best mode known to the inventor at the filing date or, where priority is claimed, at the priority date.

Sufficiency is mandatory; best mode is optional. India requires both: section 10(4) of the Patents Act requires a full and particular description, the method by which it is to be performed, the best method known to the applicant, and a claim or claims.

Article 29.2, foreign applications. Members may require an applicant to provide information concerning corresponding foreign applications and grants.

India took that option too, in section 8, which requires a statement and undertaking about foreign applications, and failure to comply is a ground of revocation under section 64(1)(m). It is one of the most frequently litigated provisions in Indian patent practice.

What Article 29 does not require. It does not require disclosure of the source or geographical origin of biological material, and that omission is the whole subject of the disclosure debate under Doha paragraph 19 and of the WIPO treaty of 2024 on intellectual property, genetic resources and associated traditional knowledge. India requires it anyway, in section 10(4)(d)(ii)(D), and non disclosure or wrongful mention is a ground of revocation under section 64(1)(p) and (q).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in592

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fourteen

TRIPS Article 31: Other Use Without Authorisation

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

A Member may authorise use of a patent without the owner's consent, case by case, after trying to negotiate, non exclusively, predominantly for the domestic market, with adequate remuneration and judicial review.

What Article 31 governs

Its title is "Other Use Without Authorization of the Right Holder", and footnote 7 defines other use as use other than that allowed under Article 30.

So the scheme is complete. Article 30 is a limited exception that operates automatically. Article 31 is an authorisation given in a particular case. There is no third route.

Article 31 covers both compulsory licences to private parties and government use, since the opening words are "including use by the government or third parties authorized by the government".

And Article 31 does not say when a licence may be granted. It lists conditions to be respected where the law of a Member allows such use, leaving the grounds entirely to national law. That silence is the largest flexibility in the Agreement.

The thirteen conditions

(a) Individual merits. Authorisation shall be considered on its individual merits, so no blanket or automatic licensing.

(b) Prior negotiation. Use may only be permitted if the proposed user has first made efforts to obtain authorization from the right holder on reasonable commercial terms, unsuccessfully within a reasonable period of time. This may be waived in the case of a national emergency, other circumstances of extreme urgency, or public non-commercial use. In emergency cases the right holder must still be notified as soon as reasonably practicable; in public non-commercial use, where the government or contractor knows or has demonstrable grounds to know a valid patent is or will be used, the holder must be informed promptly.

(c) Scope and duration. Limited to the purpose for which it was authorized; and for semi-conductor technology only for public non-commercial use or to remedy an anti-competitive practice determined after judicial or administrative process.

(d) Non-exclusive.

(e) Non-assignable, except with that part of the enterprise or goodwill which enjoys the use.

(f) Predominantly for the supply of the domestic market of the Member authorising it.

(g) Termination. Liable to be terminated, subject to adequate protection of the legitimate interests of the persons authorised, if and when the circumstances which led to it cease to exist and are unlikely to recur, and the competent authority shall have power to review continuance on motivated request.

(h) Remuneration. The right holder shall be paid adequate remuneration in the circumstances of each case, taking into account the economic value of the authorization.

(i) Review of the authorisation. The legal validity of any decision shall be subject to judicial review or other independent review by a distinct higher authority.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in597

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifteen

TRIPS Articles 32, 33 and 34: Revocation, Term and Burden of Proof

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Any revocation must be reviewable by a court, a patent must last at least twenty years from filing, and in a process patent case the defendant may be made to prove its process is different.

Article 32, revocation

"An opportunity for judicial review of any decision to revoke or forfeit a patent shall be available."

One sentence, and it is procedural. TRIPS says nothing about the grounds on which a patent may be revoked, so those are entirely national.

That silence matters. It is why India's section 64, with its sixteen grounds including insufficiency, obviousness, non disclosure under section 8 and non disclosure of the source of biological material, is not open to challenge as such.

Note also that Paris Article 5A(3) survives, requiring forfeiture to be preceded by a compulsory licence that proves insufficient, so the two provisions operate together.

India's compliance: section 64 revocation by the High Court on a counter claim or by the Appellate authority on petition, section 25(2) post grant opposition before the Controller with an appeal, and section 66 revocation in the public interest by the Central Government, which is itself amenable to judicial review.

Article 33, term

"The term of protection available shall not end before the expiration of a period of twenty years counted from the filing date."

Footnote 8: Members without a system of original grant may compute the term from the filing date in the system of original grant.

Three points.

The measure is from filing, not from grant. So examination delay eats into the term, and the patentee bears it. That is what patent term restoration provisions in some countries, and in TRIPS plus agreements, are designed to correct; TRIPS itself requires no restoration.

It is twenty years available, not twenty years enjoyed. A patent may lapse earlier for non payment of renewal fees.

And it is a floor. A Member may give longer.

India's compliance: section 53 of the Patents Act gives twenty years from the date of filing for every patent, and the Patents (Amendment) Act, 2002 made that uniform, replacing the earlier split of fourteen years generally and seven from filing or five from sealing for food and medicine.

The worked authority on Article 33

The case is Canada: Term of Patent Protection.

Facts. Section 45 of Canada's Patent Act gave patents applied for before 1 October 1989 a term of seventeen years from the date of grant. The United States said that breached Article 33, which requires twenty years from filing, and that Article 70.2 applies the Agreement to subject matter existing on its date of application and still protected. The citation is WT/DS170, panel report circulated 5 May 2000, Appellate Body report circulated 18 September 2000, both adopted 12 October 2000.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in603

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Sixteen

TRIPS Articles 35 to 38: Layout Designs of Integrated Circuits

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

TRIPS adopts most of the Washington Treaty of 1989, adds the changes that made it acceptable to the United States and Japan, and gives layout designs at least ten years.

Article 35, the relation to the Washington Treaty

Members agree to provide protection to the layout-designs (topographies) of integrated circuits in accordance with Articles 2 through 7 (other than paragraph 3 of Article 6), Article 12 and paragraph 3 of Article 16 of the Treaty on Intellectual Property in Respect of Integrated Circuits, and, in addition, to comply with Articles 36 to 38.

Read the exclusions. Article 6.3 of the Washington Treaty, on compulsory licensing, is left out, and Articles 36 to 38 replace it and two other points.

Why this matters historically. The Washington Treaty was adopted on 26 May 1989 and never entered into force, because the United States and Japan, who held the industry, refused to sign it. Their objections were to the compulsory licensing provision, to the short term, and to the treatment of innocent infringers. TRIPS gave them what they wanted on all three and so revived the treaty's substance without its text.

So the Washington Treaty is the only WIPO administered treaty whose substance is in force only through TRIPS.

What Articles 2 to 7 and 12 and 16.3 bring in

Article 2, definitions: an integrated circuit, and a layout design meaning the three dimensional disposition, however expressed, of the elements of an integrated circuit and of some or all of the interconnections.

Article 3, the subject matter of protection, confined to layout designs that are original in the sense of being the result of their creator's own intellectual effort and not commonplace among creators and manufacturers at the time of creation.

Article 4, the legal form, which each party is free to choose: a special law, copyright, patents, utility models, unfair competition or any combination.

Article 5, national treatment.

Article 6, the scope, less paragraph 3.

Article 7, exploitation and registration, permitting a party to require commercial exploitation or registration as a condition of protection.

Article 12, the safeguard of Paris and Berne.

Article 16.3, on the treaty's application in time.

Article 36, scope

Subject to Article 37.1, Members shall consider unlawful, if performed without the authorisation of the right holder, the acts of importing, selling, or otherwise distributing for commercial purposes a protected layout design, an integrated circuit in which it is incorporated, or an article incorporating such an integrated circuit only in so far as it continues to contain an unlawfully reproduced layout design.

Two things to note.

The final clause is a limitation. Once the offending layout design has been removed or replaced, the article is no longer caught.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in608

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Seventeen

TRIPS Article 39: Undisclosed Information

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Undisclosed information must be protectable against dishonest acquisition, use or disclosure, and test data submitted for marketing approval must be protected against unfair commercial use.

Article 39.1, the anchor

"In the course of ensuring effective protection against unfair competition as provided in Article 10bis of the Paris Convention (1967), Members shall protect undisclosed information in accordance with paragraph 2 and data submitted to governments or governmental agencies in accordance with paragraph 3."

Read the anchor carefully. The obligation is expressed as part of the duty to protect against unfair competition, not as the creation of a property right.

That framing was deliberate, and it is the reason developing countries could accept the Section. A trade secret is not owned; it is protected against dishonest conduct.

Article 10bis of Paris, incorporated by TRIPS Article 2.1, requires countries to assure effective protection against unfair competition and defines it as any act of competition contrary to honest practices in industrial or commercial matters.

Article 39.2, the three conditions

Natural and legal persons shall have the possibility of preventing information lawfully within their control from being disclosed to, acquired by, or used by others without their consent in a manner contrary to honest commercial practices, so long as such information:

(a) is secret in the sense that it is not, as a body or in the precise configuration and assembly of its components, generally known among or readily accessible to persons within the circles that normally deal with the kind of information in question;

(b) has commercial value because it is secret; and

(c) has been subject to reasonable steps under the circumstances, by the person lawfully in control, to keep it secret.

All three are required. The compilation clause in (a) is important: a combination of publicly known elements can be secret if the particular configuration is not.

Footnote 10 defines the standard of conduct. A manner contrary to honest commercial practices means at least practices such as breach of contract, breach of confidence and inducement to breach, and includes the acquisition of undisclosed information by third parties who knew, or were grossly negligent in failing to know, that such practices were involved in the acquisition.

What is not caught. Independent discovery and reverse engineering are not contrary to honest commercial practices, so neither is prohibited.

Article 39.3, test data

"Members, when requiring, as a condition of approving the marketing of pharmaceutical or of agricultural chemical products which utilize new chemical entities, the submission of undisclosed test or other data, the origination of which involves a considerable effort, shall protect such data against unfair commercial use. In addition, Members shall protect such data against disclosure, except where necessary to protect the public, or unless steps are taken to ensure that the data are protected against unfair commercial use."

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in613

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Eighteen

TRIPS Article 40: Anti-Competitive Practices in Licences

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Members may legislate against licensing practices that abuse intellectual property rights and restrain competition, and must consult each other when they do.

Why Section 8 exists at all

Because a licence is where a right becomes market power. A patent gives an exclusive right; a licence decides who may exploit it and on what terms, and it is in those terms that the abuse occurs.

Because the developing countries asked for it. The whole of Section 8 is a developing country provision, negotiated alongside Articles 7 and 8, and it is the only place in Part II where the right holder is the object rather than the beneficiary.

And because Article 1.2 leaves it outside the definition. Section 8 is not one of the seven categories of intellectual property; it is a discipline on their exercise.

Article 40.1, the recital

"Members agree that some licensing practices or conditions pertaining to intellectual property rights which restrain competition may have adverse effects on trade and may impede the transfer and dissemination of technology."

That is a shared premise, not an obligation. Its value is that the Agreement itself acknowledges that licensing can impede technology transfer, which is the developing country complaint stated in the Agreement's own words.

Article 40.2, the permission

"Nothing in this Agreement shall prevent Members from specifying in their legislation licensing practices or conditions that may in particular cases constitute an abuse of intellectual property rights having an adverse effect on competition in the relevant market. As provided above, a Member may adopt, consistently with the other provisions of this Agreement, appropriate measures to prevent or control such practices, which may include for example exclusive grantback conditions, conditions preventing challenges to validity and coercive package licensing, in the light of the relevant laws and regulations of that Member."

Three named examples, and they are the three every answer should give.

Exclusive grantback: a condition requiring the licensee to assign or exclusively license back to the licensor any improvement it makes. It removes the licensee's incentive to improve and entrenches the licensor.

Conditions preventing challenges to validity, often called no challenge clauses: the licensee agrees not to contest the patent. It insulates a weak patent from the scrutiny that would remove it.

Coercive package licensing, or tying: the licensee must take a bundle including rights it does not want, often including expired or invalid patents.

The list is illustrative, not exhaustive. The words "may include for example" say so, and a Member may legislate against other practices, subject to the requirement of consistency with the other provisions of the Agreement.

And that requirement of consistency is the limit. A Member could not, in the name of competition, deny national treatment or ignore Article 31.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in618

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Nineteen

TRIPS Article 41: The General Obligations on Enforcement

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Enforcement procedures must be available, effective, fair, not unnecessarily costly or slow, reasoned, reviewable, and they need no separate court system.

Why Part III is the heart of the Agreement

Paris and Berne barely mention enforcement. Paris Article 9 provides for seizure on importation of goods bearing an unlawful mark, and Article 10ter requires appropriate legal remedies and standing for federations. Berne Article 16 provides for seizure of infringing copies. That is nearly all.

A right without a remedy was the complaint. The industrial countries' case in the Uruguay Round was not principally that standards were low but that in many countries a right holder could not in practice get an injunction, get damages, or get goods off the market.

So Part III has five Sections and twenty one articles, and it is the largest single innovation in the Agreement.

Section 1, general obligations, Article 41. Section 2, civil and administrative procedures and remedies, Articles 42 to 49. Section 3, provisional measures, Article 50. Section 4, special requirements related to border measures, Articles 51 to 60. Section 5, criminal procedures, Article 61.

Article 41.1, effectiveness

Members shall ensure that enforcement procedures as specified in this Part are available under their law so as to permit effective action against any act of infringement of intellectual property rights covered by this Agreement, including expeditious remedies to prevent infringements and remedies which constitute a deterrent to further infringements.

Three requirements in one sentence. Procedures must permit effective action; must include expeditious remedies to prevent infringement, which is the treaty basis for interlocutory relief; and must include remedies constituting a deterrent.

And then the balance. These procedures shall be applied in such a manner as to avoid the creation of barriers to legitimate trade and to provide for safeguards against their abuse.

That second sentence is what a defendant relies on. Enforcement that stops lawful goods, or that is used oppressively, is itself contrary to Article 41.1.

Article 41.2, fairness

Procedures shall be fair and equitable. They shall not be unnecessarily complicated or costly, or entail unreasonable time-limits or unwarranted delays.

Cost and delay are treaty violations, at least in principle. It is the provision most often cited against Members whose courts take years.

Article 41.3, reasoned decisions

Decisions on the merits shall preferably be in writing and reasoned, and shall be made available at least to the parties without undue delay.

And the evidentiary rule: decisions on the merits shall be based only on evidence in respect of which parties were offered the opportunity to be heard.

Note preferably. Written reasons are encouraged, not required, which is one of the softer obligations in the Part.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in623

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty

TRIPS Articles 42 to 49: Civil and Administrative Procedures

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Right holders must have access to civil courts with fair procedure, evidence gathering, injunctions, damages, destruction of goods, information about the supply chain, and compensation for the wrongly enjoined defendant.

Article 42, fair and equitable procedures

Members shall make available to right holders civil judicial procedures concerning the enforcement of any intellectual property right covered by this Agreement.

Footnote 11: right holder includes federations and associations having legal standing to assert such rights, which mirrors Paris Article 10ter(2).

Five specific guarantees follow.

Defendants shall have the right to written notice which is timely and contains sufficient detail, including the basis of the claims.

Parties shall be allowed to be represented by independent legal counsel.

Procedures shall not impose overly burdensome requirements concerning mandatory personal appearances.

All parties shall be duly entitled to substantiate their claims and to present all relevant evidence.

The procedure shall provide a means to identify and protect confidential information, unless this would be contrary to existing constitutional requirements.

The Appellate Body fixed the scope of Article 42 in the Section 211 case, holding that the article contains procedural obligations about access to and conduct of civil proceedings, and does not govern the substantive rights a party may assert. That is why the panel's finding against section 211(a)(2) on Article 42 was reversed.

Article 43, evidence

Article 43.1: where a party has presented reasonably available evidence sufficient to support its claims and has specified evidence relevant to substantiating them which lies in the control of the opposing party, the judicial authorities shall have the authority to order that evidence be produced, subject in appropriate cases to conditions protecting confidential information.

Article 43.2: where a party voluntarily and without good reason refuses access to, or does not provide, necessary information within a reasonable period, or significantly impedes an enforcement procedure, a Member may give its courts authority to make preliminary and final determinations, affirmative or negative, on the basis of the information presented, including the complaint of the party denied access, subject to the parties being heard.

So adverse inference is optional and disclosure is mandatory. India's discovery under Order XI of the Code of Civil Procedure and the Commercial Courts Act's disclosure regime supply the first; Order XI Rule 21, dismissal or striking out for non compliance, supplies something close to the second.

Article 44, injunctions

Article 44.1: courts shall have the authority to order a party to desist from an infringement, in particular to prevent the entry into the channels of commerce of imported goods that involve an infringement, immediately after customs clearance.

The innocent acquirer exception: Members are not obliged to give that authority in respect of subject matter acquired or ordered by a person before knowing or having reasonable grounds to know that dealing in it would infringe.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in628

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-One

TRIPS Article 50: Provisional Measures

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Courts must be able to grant prompt provisional measures to stop infringement and preserve evidence, without notice where necessary, on security, with review, a time limit and compensation if wrong.

Why one article gets its own Section

Because in intellectual property the final judgment is often worthless. By the time a suit is decided the counterfeit shipment has been sold, the pirated edition has been distributed, and the infringing moulds have been destroyed.

So the effective remedy is the interim one, and Article 41.1's requirement of expeditious remedies to prevent infringements is given content here.

Article 50.1, the two purposes

Courts shall have the authority to order prompt and effective provisional measures:

(a) to prevent an infringement from occurring, and in particular to prevent the entry into the channels of commerce in their jurisdiction of goods, including imported goods immediately after customs clearance;

(b) to preserve relevant evidence in regard to the alleged infringement.

So there are two kinds. The interlocutory injunction and the evidence preservation order, which in the common law world is the search order first developed in England and adopted in India as the Anton Piller type order, and in France the saisie contrefaçon.

Article 50.2, without notice

Courts shall have the authority to adopt provisional measures inaudita altera parte where appropriate, in particular where any delay is likely to cause irreparable harm to the right holder, or where there is a demonstrable risk of evidence being destroyed.

Inaudita altera parte means without hearing the other side. The two named situations are irreparable harm from delay and a demonstrable risk of destruction of evidence, which are exactly the grounds on which an Indian court grants an ex parte injunction under Order XXXIX Rule 3 or appoints a local commissioner under Order XXVI Rule 9.

Article 50.3, the applicant's burden

Courts shall have authority to require the applicant to provide any reasonably available evidence to satisfy themselves with a sufficient degree of certainty that the applicant is the right holder and that the right is being infringed or that infringement is imminent, and to order the applicant to provide a security or equivalent assurance sufficient to protect the defendant and to prevent abuse.

Two safeguards. A standard of proof, sufficient degree of certainty, and a security to protect the defendant.

India's practice is the undertaking as to damages recorded when an interim injunction is granted, and Order XXXIX Rule 2A for enforcement.

Article 50.4, notice and review

Where measures are adopted inaudita altera parte, the parties affected shall be given notice, without delay after the execution of the measures at the latest. A review, including a right to be heard, shall take place upon request of the defendant with a view to deciding, within a reasonable period after notification, whether the measures shall be modified, revoked or confirmed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in634

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Two

TRIPS Articles 51 to 60: Border Measures

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

A right holder may apply to have customs suspend release of counterfeit or pirated goods, on security, with notice, a ten working day limit, inspection, indemnity for the importer, and destruction as the remedy.

Article 51, the obligation

Members shall adopt procedures to enable a right holder, who has valid grounds for suspecting that the importation of counterfeit trademark or pirated copyright goods may take place, to lodge an application in writing with competent authorities, administrative or judicial, for the suspension by the customs authorities of the release into free circulation of such goods.

The mandatory core is narrow. Only imports, and only counterfeit trademark goods and pirated copyright goods.

Two extensions are permitted, not required. Members may enable an application in respect of other infringements of intellectual property rights, and may provide corresponding procedures for goods destined for exportation.

Footnote 14 defines the two categories.

Counterfeit trademark goods are goods, including packaging, bearing without authorisation a mark identical to a validly registered mark for such goods, or which cannot be distinguished in its essential aspects from it, and which thereby infringes under the law of the country of importation.

Pirated copyright goods are copies made without the consent of the right holder in the country of production and made directly or indirectly from an article where making that copy would have infringed under the law of the country of importation.

Footnote 13 is the transit provision, and it is the most important footnote in the Agreement for India. There is no obligation to apply these procedures to imports of goods put on the market in another country by or with the consent of the right holder, or to goods in transit.

Footnote 12 relieves a Member that has dismantled substantially all border controls with a customs union partner from applying the Section at that border.

Articles 52 to 54, application, security and notice

Article 52, application. The right holder must provide adequate evidence that under the laws of the country of importation there is prima facie an infringement, and a sufficiently detailed description of the goods to make them readily recognisable by customs. The competent authorities must inform the applicant within a reasonable period whether the application is accepted and, where determined, the period for which customs will take action.

Article 53.1, security. Authorities may require a security or equivalent assurance sufficient to protect the defendant and the competent authorities and to prevent abuse, and it shall not unreasonably deter recourse to the procedures.

Article 53.2, the release on security rule. Where release of goods involving industrial designs, patents, layout-designs or undisclosed information has been suspended on the basis of a decision other than by a judicial or other independent authority, and the Article 55 period has expired without the granting of provisional relief, and all other conditions for importation are met, the owner, importer or consignee shall be entitled to release on posting a security sufficient to protect the right holder.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in639

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Three

TRIPS Article 61: Criminal Procedures

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Criminal procedures and penalties at least for wilful trademark counterfeiting or copyright piracy on a commercial scale, with imprisonment or fines sufficient to deter and, in appropriate cases, seizure, forfeiture and destruction.

Article 61, sentence by sentence

"Members shall provide for criminal procedures and penalties to be applied at least in cases of wilful trademark counterfeiting or copyright piracy on a commercial scale."

Four limits on the obligation.

Wilful, so negligence and inadvertence are outside.

Trademark counterfeiting or copyright piracy, so patent, design, geographical indication and trade secret infringement need no criminal sanction.

On a commercial scale, which is the phrase the whole article turns on.

And "at least", which makes this a floor.

"Remedies available shall include imprisonment and/or monetary fines sufficient to provide a deterrent, consistently with the level of penalties applied for crimes of a corresponding gravity."

Note the comparator. Deterrence is measured against the Member's own penalties for crimes of corresponding gravity, not against any international scale. A Member with generally low penalties is not required to make intellectual property crime an exception.

"In appropriate cases, remedies available shall also include the seizure, forfeiture and destruction of the infringing goods and of any materials and implements the predominant use of which has been in the commission of the offence."

"Members may provide for criminal procedures and penalties to be applied in other cases of infringement of intellectual property rights, in particular where they are committed wilfully and on a commercial scale."

So extension is permitted. India has extended it, and so have most Members.

What commercial scale means

The phrase was litigated in the China dispute.

The panel's construction was that commercial scale refers to the magnitude or extent of typical or usual commercial activity with respect to a given product in a given market. So it is relative: what counts as commercial scale for luxury watches differs from what counts for pirated discs, and differs between markets.

The consequence for the complainant is a heavy evidentiary burden. The United States had to show what the typical commercial activity was in China for the products in question and that infringement below China's thresholds still reached that magnitude. It did not do so, and the claim failed.

The consequence for a Member is real discretion. A Member may set a threshold, provided it can be justified by reference to what commercial scale means in its own market.

The worked dispute

The case, worked in the general enforcement chapter, is China: Measures Affecting the Protection and Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights.

On Article 61 the panel held that the United States had not established that China's criminal thresholds were inconsistent with the first sentence of Article 61. It read commercial scale as a relative standard requiring evidence about the market, and it found the evidence insufficient, some of it being press articles and a single unverified study.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in645

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Four

TRIPS Article 62: Acquisition and Maintenance of Rights

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

A member may impose reasonable procedures and formalities, must grant registrations within a reasonable time, must apply the fairness rules of Article 41 to office procedures, and must allow judicial review of final administrative decisions.

Article 62.1, formalities

Members may require, as a condition of the acquisition or maintenance of the rights provided for under Sections 2 through 6 of Part II, compliance with reasonable procedures and formalities. Such procedures and formalities shall be consistent with the provisions of this Agreement.

Note the range: Sections 2 to 6. That is trademarks, geographical indications, industrial designs, patents and layout designs. It excludes Section 1, copyright, because Berne Article 5(2) forbids formalities, and Section 7, undisclosed information, because there is nothing to register.

Reasonable is the test, and consistency with the Agreement is the limit. So a fee is lawful, a requirement of local incorporation would not be, because it would offend Article 3.

Article 62.2, timeliness

Where the acquisition of a right is subject to the right being granted or registered, Members shall ensure that the procedures for grant or registration, subject to compliance with the substantive conditions, permit the granting or registration of the right within a reasonable period of time so as to avoid unwarranted curtailment of the period of protection.

Read the reason clause. The obligation exists because Article 33 measures the patent term from filing, so every month of examination delay is a month of protection lost. Article 62.2 is the counterweight.

It is not a fixed period. A reasonable period, assessed in context, and expressly subject to the applicant complying with the substantive conditions, so an applicant who delays cannot complain.

India's response has been procedural rather than statutory: the request for examination under section 11B of the Patents Act, expedited examination under Rule 24C of the Patents Rules for specified categories including startups and small entities, and a large increase in examiner numbers after 2016.

Article 62.3, service marks

Article 4 of the Paris Convention (1967) shall apply mutatis mutandis to service marks.

Paris Article 4 is the right of priority, six months for marks. Paris itself did not require the protection of service marks at all, and Article 62.3 extends the priority right to them. Read with Article 16.2, which applies Paris Article 6bis to services, TRIPS completes the assimilation of service marks that Paris left undone.

Article 62.4, office procedure

Procedures concerning the acquisition or maintenance of rights and, where a Member's law provides for them, administrative revocation and inter partes procedures such as opposition, revocation and cancellation, shall be governed by the general principles set out in paragraphs 2 and 3 of Article 41.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in650

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Five

TRIPS Article 63: Transparency

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Every law, regulation, final judicial decision and administrative ruling of general application on intellectual property must be published, notified to the Council for TRIPS and supplied on request, subject to a confidentiality exception.

Why transparency is in Part V

Because Part V is called dispute prevention and settlement, and Article 63 is the prevention half.

The logic is simple. Most disputes about another Member's intellectual property regime arise from not knowing what it says. A published and notified law can be examined in the Council, questioned, and if necessary changed before anyone files a complaint.

Article 63.1, publication

Laws and regulations, and final judicial decisions and administrative rulings of general application, made effective by a Member pertaining to the subject matter of this Agreement shall be published, or where publication is not practicable made publicly available, in a national language, in such a manner as to enable governments and right holders to become acquainted with them.

The subject matter is defined in the article itself, in parentheses: the availability, scope, acquisition, enforcement and prevention of the abuse of intellectual property rights.

Four categories must be published. Laws; regulations; final judicial decisions of general application; and administrative rulings of general application. A decision between two parties on its own facts is not of general application.

And agreements between governments. Agreements concerning the subject matter of the Agreement which are in force between the government or a governmental agency of a Member and the government or a governmental agency of another Member shall also be published.

That last sentence matters more now than in 1995, because it reaches the intellectual property chapters of bilateral arrangements between governments.

Article 63.2, notification

Members shall notify the laws and regulations referred to in paragraph 1 to the Council for TRIPS in order to assist that Council in its review of the operation of this Agreement.

Two mitigations follow. The Council shall attempt to minimise the burden; and it may waive the obligation to notify directly if consultations with WIPO on establishing a common register are successful.

That is why the WIPO and WTO agreement of 22 December 1995 exists. Its Article 2 provides for the International Bureau to supply the WTO Secretariat with copies of laws a Member has already communicated to WIPO, and for the WTO Secretariat to transmit to WIPO the laws it receives under Article 63.2. The common register was never established, but the exchange arrangement is what Article 63.2 contemplated.

The Council shall also consider any action required regarding notifications under Paris Article 6ter, which is the emblems machinery, and this is the second link to the 1995 agreement, whose Article 3 puts that machinery in WIPO's hands.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in655

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Six

TRIPS Article 64: Dispute Settlement and the Non Violation Moratorium

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

TRIPS disputes go to the ordinary WTO machinery, except that non violation and situation complaints have been suspended since the beginning and the suspension has been renewed at every Ministerial Conference since.

Article 64.1

"The provisions of Articles XXII and XXIII of GATT 1994 as elaborated and applied by the Dispute Settlement Understanding shall apply to consultations and the settlement of disputes under this Agreement except as otherwise specifically provided herein."

Three consequences.

TRIPS has no dispute machinery of its own. It borrows the general machinery, so consultations, panels, appellate review, adoption by negative consensus, surveillance and retaliation all apply exactly as elsewhere.

GATT Articles XXII and XXIII are the source of the three complaint types. Article XXIII:1(a) is a violation complaint, 1(b) a non violation complaint, and 1(c) a situation complaint.

And except as otherwise specifically provided points to Article 64.2 and 64.3, and to footnote 4 to Article 23.1, which lets a Member provide for enforcement by administrative action notwithstanding the first sentence of Article 42.

Article 64.2, the moratorium

"Subparagraphs 1(b) and 1(c) of Article XXIII of GATT 1994 shall not apply to the settlement of disputes under this Agreement for a period of five years from the date of entry into force of the WTO Agreement."

So from 1 January 1995 to 1 January 2000, only violation complaints could be brought under TRIPS.

Article 64.3, what should have happened

"During the time period referred to in paragraph 2, the Council for TRIPS shall examine the scope and modalities for complaints of the type provided for under subparagraphs 1(b) and 1(c) of Article XXIII of GATT 1994 made pursuant to this Agreement, and submit its recommendations to the Ministerial Conference for approval. Any decision of the Ministerial Conference to approve such recommendations or to extend the period in paragraph 2 shall be made only by consensus, and approved recommendations shall be effective for all Members without further formal acceptance process."

The Council examined and never agreed. No recommendations on scope and modalities have ever been submitted.

So the Ministerial Conference has taken the other route open to it and extended the period, by consensus, at every Ministerial Conference since, most recently at Abu Dhabi in 2024.

The correct statement is therefore that the moratorium has been continuously renewed, not that it lapsed.

What a non violation complaint is, and why it frightens developing Members

GATT Article XXIII:1(b) allows a complaint where a benefit accruing under the agreement is being nullified or impaired as the result of the application by another Member of any measure, whether or not it conflicts with the provisions.

So the measure need not breach anything. The claimant says it had a reasonable expectation of a benefit when it made its concessions, and that the other Member's later measure defeats that expectation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in660

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Seven

TRIPS Articles 65 and 66: Transitional Arrangements

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

One year for everybody, four more for developing countries, five more again for product patents in new fields, and ten years for the least developed which have been extended twice and now run to 2034.

Article 65, the ladder

Article 65.1, the general period. No Member shall be obliged to apply the provisions of the Agreement before the expiry of a general period of one year following the date of entry into force of the WTO Agreement.

So the earliest date of application for anyone is 1 January 1996.

Article 65.2, developing countries. A developing country Member is entitled to delay for a further period of four years the date of application of the provisions other than Articles 3, 4 and 5.

Two things to note. The further period is four years, taking the date to 1 January 2000. And national treatment, most favoured nation and the WIPO procedures exception applied from the start, because Articles 3, 4 and 5 are excluded from the delay.

Article 65.3, transition economies. A Member in the process of transformation from a centrally-planned into a market, free-enterprise economy which is undertaking structural reform of its intellectual property system and facing special problems in preparing and implementing intellectual property laws may also benefit from the four year delay.

Article 65.4, product patents in new fields. To the extent that a developing country Member is obliged to extend product patent protection to areas of technology not so protectable in its territory on its general date of application, it may delay the application of the product patent provisions of Section 5 of Part II to those areas for an additional five years.

That is India's provision. India's general date under Article 65.2 was 1 January 2000; product patents for pharmaceuticals and agricultural chemicals were not available under the Patents Act, 1970; so India had until 1 January 2005, and the Patents (Amendment) Act, 2005 was passed to meet that date.

Article 65.5, the standstill or non regression clause. A Member availing itself of a transitional period shall ensure that any changes in its laws, regulations and practice made during that period do not result in a lesser degree of consistency with the provisions of the Agreement.

So a Member could stand still but not go backwards. It could not reduce protection during the transition.

The ladder in dates

1 January 1995: the WTO Agreement enters into force. Articles 3, 4 and 5 and the Article 70.8 mailbox obligation apply to developing countries from this date, notwithstanding Part VI.

1 January 1996: general date of application under Article 65.1.

1 January 2000: date of application for developing countries and transition economies under Articles 65.2 and 65.3.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in665

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Eight

TRIPS Articles 67, 70: Technical Cooperation and Existing Subject Matter

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Developed members must give technical cooperation on request, the Council for TRIPS runs the Agreement, Members exchange information on infringing goods, and Article 70 decides what happens to rights and applications that already existed in 1995.

Article 67, technical cooperation

"In order to facilitate the implementation of this Agreement, developed country Members shall provide, on request and on mutually agreed terms and conditions, technical and financial cooperation in favour of developing and least-developed country Members."

What the cooperation shall include. Assistance in the preparation of laws and regulations on protection, enforcement and prevention of abuse; and support for the establishment or reinforcement of domestic offices and agencies, including the training of personnel.

Two qualifications limit it. It is owed on request, so nothing is owed to a Member that does not ask; and it is on mutually agreed terms and conditions, so the provider's terms matter.

Compare Article 66.2. Article 67 is about helping a Member build the machinery of protection; Article 66.2 is about getting technology into the least developed economies. The first has been delivered; the second has not, and the asymmetry is itself a criticism, since assistance to write patent laws is assistance the exporting countries benefit from.

The Council receives annual reports on Article 67 as it does on Article 66.2, and the WIPO and WTO agreement of 22 December 1995, in its Article 4, obliges each secretariat to extend its assistance to the other organisation's developing country members.

Article 68, the Council for TRIPS

Its functions. The Council shall monitor the operation of this Agreement and, in particular, Members' compliance; shall afford Members the opportunity of consulting on matters relating to trade related aspects of intellectual property rights; shall carry out such other responsibilities as assigned to it by the Members; and shall provide any assistance requested in the context of dispute settlement procedures.

Its powers. It may consult with and seek information from any source it deems appropriate.

And its relations with WIPO. In consultation with WIPO, the Council shall seek to establish, within one year of its first meeting, appropriate arrangements for cooperation with bodies of that Organization.

That mandate is what produced the agreement of 22 December 1995, in force 1 January 1996, which is exactly within the year: the Council first met in 1995 and the agreement was concluded in December of that year.

What the Council actually does. Reviews of notified legislation under Article 63.2; the checklist of issues on enforcement; the standing agenda items on the geographical indications register under Article 23.4, on the review of Article 27.3(b), on the relationship with the Convention on Biological Diversity and on traditional knowledge under Doha paragraph 19; the annual reviews under Articles 66.2 and 67; and the special sessions in which the register negotiations are conducted.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in670

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Twenty-Nine

TRIPS Articles 68, 69, 71, 72 and 73: The Institutions

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

The Council for TRIPS runs the Agreement, Members cooperate against infringing trade, Article 70 governs existing subject matter, the Council reviews implementation, no reservations may be entered without consent, and there is a security exception.

The shape of Part VII

Six articles. Article 68, the Council for TRIPS. Article 69, international cooperation. Article 70, protection of existing subject matter. Article 71, review and amendment. Article 72, reservations. Article 73, security exceptions.

Articles 68, 69 and 70 are treated in the preceding chapter, because Article 70 belongs with the transitional scheme and Articles 68 and 69 belong with Article 67. This chapter completes Part VII with Articles 71, 72 and 73 and gathers the institutional picture.

Article 71, review and amendment

Article 71.1, review. The Council for TRIPS shall review the implementation of this Agreement after the expiration of the transitional period referred to in Article 65.2, that is after 1 January 2000. It shall, having regard to the experience gained, review it two years after that date, and at identical intervals thereafter. It may also undertake reviews in the light of any relevant new developments which might warrant modification or amendment.

So a biennial review was built in, and the standing agenda items of the Council are the residue of it.

Article 71.2, the fast track amendment. Amendments merely serving the purpose of adjusting to higher levels of protection of intellectual property rights achieved, and in force, in other multilateral agreements and accepted under those agreements by all Members of the WTO may be referred to the Ministerial Conference for action under Article X:6 of the WTO Agreement on the basis of a consensus proposal from the Council for TRIPS.

Read the conditions. The amendment must be merely an adjustment to a higher level; that level must have been achieved and be in force in another multilateral agreement; and all WTO Members must have accepted it under that agreement.

That last condition has never been satisfied by anything, because no intellectual property treaty has ever been accepted by every WTO Member. Article 71.2 has therefore never been used, and the one amendment TRIPS has had, Article 31bis, was made by the ordinary route under Article X of the Marrakesh Agreement, not by this one.

Article 72, reservations

"Reservations may not be entered in respect of any of the provisions of this Agreement without the consent of the other Members."

Compare Article XVI:5 of the Marrakesh Agreement, which provides that no reservations may be made in respect of any provision of that Agreement, and that reservations in respect of the Multilateral Trade Agreements may only be made to the extent provided for in those agreements. Article 72 is the TRIPS provision so contemplated, and it makes reservation possible only with consent, which in practice means never.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in677

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty

The Doha Declaration on TRIPS and Public Health, 2001

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

It is not an amendment and it is not nothing: it is a Ministerial statement that the Agreement can and should be read to protect public health, and it is authoritative because every Member agreed to it.

What it is

Document WT/MIN(01)/DEC/2, adopted on 14 November 2001 at the Fourth Ministerial Conference at Doha, 9 to 14 November 2001.

Seven paragraphs, adopted by consensus by every Member.

Its legal character. It is not a treaty amendment, and TRIPS was not altered by it. It is best understood as a subsequent agreement between the parties regarding the interpretation of the treaty, within Article 31(3)(a) of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, which requires such an agreement to be taken into account together with the context in interpreting the treaty.

So it does not change the text. It fixes how the text is to be read, and it does so by the consent of the whole membership, which is the strongest form of interpretive authority a treaty can have short of amendment.

Paragraphs 1 to 3, the premise

Paragraph 1: Members recognise the gravity of the public health problems afflicting many developing and least-developed countries, especially those resulting from HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis, malaria and other epidemics.

Paragraph 2: the need for the Agreement to be part of the wider national and international action to address these problems.

Paragraph 3, which is the balanced sentence and is often forgotten: Members recognise that intellectual property protection is important for the development of new medicines, and also recognise the concerns about its effects on prices.

Paragraph 3 is worth quoting in an answer, because it shows the Declaration is not a repudiation of patents.

Paragraph 4, the central statement

"We agree that the TRIPS Agreement does not and should not prevent Members from taking measures to protect public health. Accordingly, while reiterating our commitment to the TRIPS Agreement, we affirm that the Agreement can and should be interpreted and implemented in a manner supportive of WTO Members' right to protect public health and, in particular, to promote access to medicines for all."

And the second sentence of the paragraph: Members reaffirm the right of WTO Members to use, to the full, the provisions in the TRIPS Agreement, which provide flexibility for this purpose.

Two phrases carry the weight. Does not and should not prevent, which is a statement about the existing text and not a promise of change; and can and should be interpreted and implemented, which is a direction to panels and to legislatures alike.

Paragraph 5, the four flexibilities

Paragraph 5(a), the interpretive rule. In applying the customary rules of interpretation of public international law, each provision of the TRIPS Agreement shall be read in the light of the object and purpose of the Agreement as expressed, in particular, in its objectives and principles.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in682

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-One

Article 31bis and the Protocol Amending TRIPS

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Article 31bis lets a member grant a compulsory licence wholly for export of medicines to a country that cannot make them, and it entered into force on 23 January 2017.

The three stages

Stage one, the waiver of 30 August 2003. The General Council adopted a Decision on the Implementation of Paragraph 6 of the Doha Declaration, waiving the obligations of an exporting Member under Article 31(f) and, in stated circumstances, the obligation of the importing Member under Article 31(h). A waiver is temporary by nature, and it was expressly to last until an amendment took its place.

Stage two, the Protocol of 6 December 2005. The General Council, acting under Article X:1 of the Marrakesh Agreement, adopted the Protocol Amending the TRIPS Agreement, document WT/L/641, and submitted it to Members for acceptance. It provides that on entry into force TRIPS is amended by inserting Article 31bis after Article 31 and the Annex to the Agreement after Article 73.

Paragraph 2 of the Protocol provides that reservations may not be entered without the consent of the other Members, matching Article 72.

Stage three, entry into force on 23 January 2017, when two thirds of Members had accepted, as Article X:3 of the Marrakesh Agreement requires. It is the first and only amendment ever made to a WTO agreement.

The acceptance deadline was originally 1 December 2007 and was extended repeatedly, which is why it took eleven years.

Article 31bis, the five paragraphs

Paragraph 1, the core. The obligations of an exporting Member under Article 31(f) shall not apply with respect to the grant of a compulsory licence to the extent necessary for the purposes of production of a pharmaceutical product and its export to an eligible importing Member in accordance with the terms in paragraph 2 of the Annex.

Paragraph 2, remuneration. Where a licence is granted under the system, adequate remuneration under Article 31(h) shall be paid in the exporting Member, taking into account the economic value to the importing Member of the use authorised. And where the importing Member has also granted a compulsory licence for the same products, its own Article 31(h) obligation does not apply for those products.

So the royalty is paid once, in the exporting country, measured by the value to the importing country.

Paragraph 3, regional trade agreements. Where a developing or least developed country Member is party to a regional trade agreement within GATT Article XXIV or the Enabling Clause, at least half of whose current membership consists of countries on the United Nations list of least developed countries, its Article 31(f) obligation does not apply to the extent necessary to enable a product produced or imported under a compulsory licence to be exported to the markets of the other developing or least developed parties to that agreement that share the health problem. This is expressly without prejudice to the territorial nature of the patent rights.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in687

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Two

TRIPS and the Indian Patents Act 1970

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

India met TRIPS in three instalments, in 1999, 2002 and 2005, and each instalment answered a different set of articles.

Where India started

The Patents Act, 1970, in force from 20 April 1972, was built on the report of the Ayyangar Committee of 1959 and was designed to keep medicine prices low.

Section 5 as it then stood provided that in the case of inventions claiming substances intended for use as food, medicine or drug, or substances produced by chemical processes, no patent should be granted for the substance itself, but only for the methods or processes of manufacture.

Section 53 as it then stood gave a term of fourteen years generally, and for food, medicine or drug process patents five years from sealing or seven years from the date of the patent, whichever was shorter.

Section 87 and following contained licences of right, under which after three years anyone could demand a licence on a food or medicine patent, with royalty capped at four per cent of net sales.

The result was intended and achieved. Indian firms reverse engineered processes and produced medicines at some of the lowest prices in the world, and the domestic industry grew into the largest supplier of generic medicines to developing countries.

Every one of those provisions was inconsistent with TRIPS.

What TRIPS required India to change

Article 27.1, patents in all fields of technology, whether products or processes, without discrimination as to field: so section 5 had to go.

Article 33, twenty years from filing: so section 53 had to be rewritten.

Article 31, the conditions on compulsory licences: so licences of right and the automatic royalty cap had to go.

Articles 28 and 34, the rights conferred and the burden of proof for process patents.

Article 70.8 and 70.9, the mailbox and exclusive marketing rights, from 1 January 1995 and notwithstanding the transitional provisions.

Article 65.4 gave India until 1 January 2005 for product patents, and Article 65.2 until 1 January 2000 for the rest.

The first amendment: the Patents (Amendment) Act, 1999

Its cause was a lost case. The panel and Appellate Body in India: Patent Protection for Pharmaceutical and Agricultural Chemical Products held that India had not complied with Articles 70.8(a) and 70.9, because administrative instructions to the Patent Office did not create a mechanism preserving novelty and priority, and no system of exclusive marketing rights existed. The reports were adopted on 16 January 1998, and the European Communities won the same point separately in a report adopted on 22 September 1998.

What the Act did. It inserted section 5(2), allowing applications for patents for substances intended for use as medicine or drug or produced by chemical processes to be filed and dealt with, with grant deferred; and inserted sections 24A to 24F creating exclusive marketing rights, granted on the conditions in Article 70.9 and lasting five years from approval or until the patent was granted or refused, whichever was earlier.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in693

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Three

Section 3(d) and the Novartis Case

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Section 3(d) says a new form of a known substance is not an invention unless it enhances known efficacy, and the Supreme Court held that for a medicine efficacy means therapeutic efficacy.

The text

Section 3(d) of the Patents Act, 1970, as substituted by the Patents (Amendment) Act, 2005, provides that the following is not an invention:

"the mere discovery of a new form of a known substance which does not result in the enhancement of the known efficacy of that substance or the mere discovery of any new property or new use for a known substance or of the mere use of a known process, machine or apparatus unless such known process results in a new product or employs at least one new reactant."

And the Explanation. "For the purposes of this clause, salts, esters, ethers, polymorphs, metabolites, pure form, particle size, isomers, mixtures of isomers, complexes, combinations and other derivatives of known substance shall be considered to be the same substance, unless they differ significantly in properties with regard to efficacy."

Read it as three exclusions in one clause.

A new form of a known substance, unless it enhances known efficacy.

A new property or new use for a known substance, without qualification.

The mere use of a known process, machine or apparatus, unless the known process results in a new product or employs at least one new reactant.

And the Explanation reverses the ordinary presumption for twelve named categories, deeming them the same substance unless they differ significantly in properties with regard to efficacy.

What problem it addresses

Evergreening. A patentee whose primary patent is expiring obtains a succession of later patents on salts, polymorphs, particle sizes, formulations and combinations of the same molecule, and uses those later patents to keep generic competitors out after the original monopoly has ended.

Section 3(d) does not forbid such patents. It requires the applicant to show what the later form actually does better, measured by efficacy.

And the burden falls where the knowledge is. The applicant knows the comparative data and must produce it.

The worked case

The case is Novartis AG v Union of India.

Facts. Novartis applied in the Chennai mailbox for a patent on the beta crystalline form of imatinib mesylate, marketed as Glivec for chronic myeloid leukaemia. The Controller refused the application and the Intellectual Property Appellate Board dismissed the appeal. Novartis appealed directly to the Supreme Court. It argued that the beta crystalline form was a new product with improved flow properties, better thermodynamic stability and lower hygroscopicity, that it had thirty per cent greater bioavailability than the free base, and that section 3(d) was in any event void for vagueness and inconsistent with TRIPS. The citation is (2013) 6 SCC 1; AIR 2013 SC 1311, Civil Appeal Nos. 2706 to 2716 of 2013, decided on 1 April 2013 by Aftab Alam and Ranjana Prakash Desai JJ.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in698

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Four

How India Implemented the Rest of TRIPS

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Trade marks rewritten in 1999, geographical indications created in 1999, designs replaced in 2000, layout designs created in 2000, plant varieties created in 2001, and copyright amended in 1994 and again in 2012.

Copyright

The Copyright Act, 1957 already complied with Berne, so TRIPS required less here than anywhere else.

The Copyright (Amendment) Act, 1994, in force from 10 May 1995, did most of the TRIPS work, and it was passed before India's obligations began.

Computer programmes: section 2(o) includes computer programmes, tables and compilations including computer databases within literary work, and section 2(ffc) defines a computer programme. That is Article 10.1 and 10.2.

Rental rights: section 14(b) gives the owner of copyright in a computer programme the right to sell or give on commercial rental, and section 14(e) does the same for sound recordings. That is Article 11 and Article 14.4.

Performers' rights: sections 38 and 39 were introduced in 1994, and section 38A now sets out the exclusive right. That is Article 14.1.

Broadcast reproduction right: section 37, for twenty five years, which exceeds the twenty years in Article 14.5.

Term: section 22 gives life plus sixty years, exceeding the Berne and TRIPS floor of fifty.

Section 52 fair dealing must satisfy the three step test in Article 13, and the section 110(5) panel report is the standard against which it is measured.

The Copyright (Amendment) Act, 2012 went further than TRIPS required, implementing the WIPO Copyright Treaty and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty in substance without India acceding to them: sections 65A and 65B on technological protection measures and rights management information, section 31B on compulsory licences for the benefit of persons with disabilities, section 52(1)(zb) on accessible format copies, statutory licensing for broadcasting under section 31D, and the authors' right to royalties in the provisos to section 18.

Note what India did not do. It did not create a sui generis database right, and Article 10.2 does not require one.

Trade marks

The Trade and Merchandise Marks Act, 1958 was repealed and replaced by the Trade Marks Act, 1999, in force from 15 September 2003.

Service marks brought in, since section 2(1)(z) defines service and the Act protects marks for services. Paris did not require this, and Article 16.2 and Article 62.3 do.

Definition of mark: section 2(1)(zb) requires a mark capable of being represented graphically and capable of distinguishing goods or services, using the visual perceptibility option in Article 15.1.

Well known marks: section 2(1)(zg) defines them, section 11(6) lists the factors, section 11(7) the evidence of knowledge, section 11(9) what the Registrar shall not require, and section 11(10) the duty to protect. That is Article 16.2 and 16.3.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in703

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Five

Plant Variety Protection under TRIPS Article 27.3(b)

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Article 27.3(b) lets a member exclude plants and animals from patentability but requires plant varieties to be protected somehow, and India built a system that protects farmers as well as breeders.

The obligation

Article 27.3(b) permits Members to exclude from patentability plants and animals other than micro-organisms, and essentially biological processes for the production of plants or animals other than non-biological and microbiological processes.

And then the sentence that creates the obligation. "However, Members shall provide for the protection of plant varieties either by patents or by an effective sui generis system or by any combination thereof."

Three routes, and a Member must take one.

Patents, as the United States does, where plant varieties may be patented under a utility patent as well as under a plant patent statute.

An effective sui generis system, meaning a system of its own kind, designed for plant varieties.

Or any combination.

The Agreement does not define effective, and it does not name UPOV. That omission is the whole of India's argument.

The review clause. "The provisions of this subparagraph shall be reviewed four years after the date of entry into force of the WTO Agreement," so in 1999. The review began in the Council for TRIPS and has never concluded, and it is now entangled with the Doha paragraph 19 mandate on the relationship between TRIPS and the Convention on Biological Diversity and on traditional knowledge.

Why not UPOV

UPOV is the International Union for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants, created by the International Convention for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants of 2 December 1961, revised in 1972, 1978 and 1991, and not administered by WIPO, which is why it does not belong in the list of twenty eight treaties.

Only the 1991 Act is open to new members, and three of its changes from the 1978 Act made it unacceptable to India: what had been an automatic carve out for a farmer's own use became an optional exception under Article 15(2); the right was extended to harvested material under Article 14(2) and to essentially derived varieties under Article 14(5); and the minimum term rose to twenty years, or twenty five for trees and vines. The chapter on the right to food sets out the consequences for Indian agriculture.

India considered accession and declined, relying on the words effective sui generis system in Article 27.3(b), which do not name UPOV and do not define effectiveness.

The Indian system

The Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Act, 2001, with the Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Authority established under section 3.

Four kinds of variety may be registered: a new variety, an extant variety, a farmers' variety, and an essentially derived variety under section 23.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in708

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Six

The TRIPS Disputes That Have Been Decided

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

Eight disputes have produced adopted reports on TRIPS in thirty years, and between them they decide almost every question a candidate is asked.

The table in words

India: Patent Protection for Pharmaceutical and Agricultural Chemical Products, WT/DS50, panel report 5 September 1997, Appellate Body report 19 December 1997, both adopted 16 January 1998. Complaint by the United States. Articles 70.8 and 70.9. The first TRIPS dispute decided.

India: Patent Protection for Pharmaceutical and Agricultural Chemical Products (EC complaint), WT/DS79, panel report 24 August 1998, adopted 22 September 1998. Article 70.8, same result. The European Communities had to bring its own case because a finding binds only the parties.

Canada: Patent Protection of Pharmaceutical Products, WT/DS114, panel report 17 March 2000, adopted 7 April 2000. Complaint by the European Communities. Articles 27.1, 28.1 and 30.

United States: Section 110(5) of the US Copyright Act, WT/DS160, panel report 15 June 2000, adopted 27 July 2000. Complaint by the European Communities. Articles 9.1 and 13.

Canada: Term of Patent Protection, WT/DS170, panel report 5 May 2000, Appellate Body report 18 September 2000, both adopted 12 October 2000. Complaint by the United States. Articles 33 and 70.2.

United States: Section 211 Omnibus Appropriations Act of 1998, WT/DS176, panel report 6 August 2001, Appellate Body report 2 January 2002, both adopted 1 February 2002. Complaint by the European Communities. Articles 3, 4, 15, 16 and 42, and Paris Articles 2 and 6quinquies.

European Communities: Protection of Trademarks and Geographical Indications for Agricultural Products and Foodstuffs, WT/DS174 and WT/DS290, panel reports 15 March 2005, adopted 20 April 2005. Complaints by the United States and Australia. Articles 3, 16, 17 and 24.

China: Measures Affecting the Protection and Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights, WT/DS362, panel report 26 January 2009, adopted 20 March 2009. Complaint by the United States. Articles 9.1, 41, 46, 59 and 61.

Australia: Certain Measures Concerning Trademarks, Geographical Indications and Other Plain Packaging Requirements Applicable to Tobacco Products and Packaging, WT/DS435, WT/DS441, WT/DS458 and WT/DS467, panel reports 2018, Appellate Body report 2020. Complaints by Honduras, the Dominican Republic, Cuba and Indonesia. Articles 15.4, 16.1, 20, 22.2(b) and 24.3.

What each one settled

The mailbox cases settled that Articles 70.8 and 70.9 operate notwithstanding the transitional periods, and that an administrative instruction without statutory backing does not create a mechanism that adequately preserves novelty and priority.

Canada: Pharmaceutical Patents settled the meaning of a limited exception in Article 30, holding it is measured by how much of the legal right is curtailed rather than by economic effect, and drew the discrimination and differentiation distinction under Article 27.1.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in715

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Seven

TRIPS Plus: Free Trade Agreements and What India Has Refused

Syllabus topic 3, "Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Agreement (TRIPs)"

In one line

TRIPS plus is any intellectual property obligation higher than TRIPS requires, it is lawful because Article 1.1 says more is permitted, and India has refused every version of it.

Where the possibility comes from

Article 1.1, second sentence. Members may, but shall not be obliged to, implement in their law more extensive protection than is required by this Agreement, provided that such protection does not contravene the provisions of this Agreement.

So the Agreement is a floor and not a ceiling, and every TRIPS plus obligation lives in the space above the floor.

And Article 4 makes each concession general. Because most favoured nation requires an advantage given to one country's nationals to be given to all, and because Article 4(d) saves only agreements in force before 1 January 1995, a TRIPS plus standard conceded to one partner in practice becomes the Member's law for everyone.

That is why the standards ratchet. Each negotiation begins from the highest level any party has already conceded.

The standard list of TRIPS plus demands

Data exclusivity. A fixed period, usually five years for new chemical entities and longer for biologics, during which a regulator may not rely on the originator's test data to approve a generic. TRIPS Article 39.3 requires protection against unfair commercial use and states no period.

Patent term extension or adjustment. Restoration of term lost to regulatory review or to delay in the patent office. TRIPS Article 33 requires twenty years from filing and no more.

Patent linkage. A rule preventing the drug regulator from approving a generic while a patent is on the register. TRIPS requires no link between marketing approval and patent status, and the Delhi High Court has declined to read one into Indian law.

Restrictions on exhaustion. A commitment to national or regional exhaustion, removing parallel imports. TRIPS Article 6 leaves exhaustion to each Member, and paragraph 5(d) of the Doha Declaration confirms it.

Broader patentable subject matter. Obligations to patent plants, animals, diagnostic methods, or new uses of known substances, which Article 27.2 and 27.3 permit a Member to exclude, and which would displace section 3(d) and section 3(j).

Longer copyright terms. Life plus seventy rather than the Berne and TRIPS floor of life plus fifty.

UPOV 1991 accession. An obligation to join, where Article 27.3(b) requires only an effective sui generis system.

Enforcement beyond Part III. Ex officio border measures for all rights and for exports, criminal liability beyond wilful counterfeiting and piracy on a commercial scale, intermediary liability, and damages calculated on the right holder's suggested retail price.

Investor state dispute settlement. Not an intellectual property provision at all, but its inclusion allows a right holder to sue a State directly over an intellectual property measure, outside the WTO system where only Members have standing.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in720

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Module IV

Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights

munotes.in

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Eight

Human Rights and Intellectual Property: Two Systems Built Apart

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Human rights law and intellectual property law were built in the same decade by different institutions, on different premises, with different beneficiaries, and they met only in the 1990s.

The two histories

The intellectual property line. Paris in 1883, Berne in 1886, the United International Bureaux for the Protection of Intellectual Property from 1893, WIPO in 1967, a specialised agency of the United Nations in 1974, TRIPS in 1994. Made by industrial property offices, ministries of commerce, publishers' and manufacturers' associations, and latterly trade negotiators.

The human rights line. The Universal Declaration in 1948, the two Covenants in 1966, in force in 1976, the treaty bodies from the 1980s, the High Commissioner from 1993. Made by foreign ministries, the human rights organs of the United Nations, and civil society.

They ran in parallel for a century and almost never crossed. Berne does not mention human rights, the Universal Declaration does not mention patents, and the WIPO Convention of 1967 states an objective of promoting protection without any balancing clause.

The four differences that matter

Who holds the right. A human right belongs to a human being. Article 15(1)(c) of the Covenant, on the reading of General Comment No. 17, protects the author, meaning the creator, whether man or woman, individual or group of individuals; it does not protect a company. An intellectual property right belongs to whoever owns it, which is usually a corporation and often not the creator.

How long it lasts. General Comment No. 17 states the point at paragraph 2: in contrast to human rights, intellectual property rights are generally of a temporary nature, and can be revoked, licensed or assigned to someone else, whereas human rights are timeless expressions of fundamental entitlements of the human person.

Whether it can be traded. Intellectual property rights may be allocated, limited in time and scope, traded, amended and even forfeited. A human right cannot be sold.

What it is for. Paragraph 1 of the General Comment puts it directly: human rights derive from the inherent dignity and worth of all persons, whereas intellectual property rights are first and foremost means by which States seek to provide incentives for inventiveness and creativity, encourage dissemination, develop cultural identities and preserve the integrity of productions for the benefit of society as a whole.

So one is an end and the other is an instrument. Every argument in this module descends from that sentence.

When they met

1994. TRIPS made intellectual property standards binding on almost every State and enforceable by trade retaliation. Suddenly a treaty about commerce determined the price of medicines, the availability of textbooks and the ownership of seed.

1995 to 2000. The consequences became visible: antiretroviral prices in southern Africa, the suit brought by pharmaceutical companies against the South African Medicines Act, the patents granted abroad over turmeric, neem and basmati.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in725

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Thirty-Nine

Universal Declaration Article 27: Two Halves of One Sentence

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Everyone has the right to share in scientific advancement and its benefits, and everyone has the right to the protection of the moral and material interests resulting from their own production.

The text

Article 27 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, adopted by the General Assembly on 10 December 1948.

Article 27(1): "Everyone has the right freely to participate in the cultural life of the community, to enjoy the arts and to share in scientific advancement and its benefits."

Article 27(2): "Everyone has the right to the protection of the moral and material interests resulting from any scientific, literary or artistic production of which he is the author."

Two paragraphs, one article, and the tension is deliberate. Paragraph 1 is the public's right of access. Paragraph 2 is the creator's right of protection. Neither is subordinated to the other.

Reading paragraph 1

Three separate entitlements.

To participate freely in the cultural life of the community. Not merely to consume culture but to take part in making it.

To enjoy the arts.

And to share in scientific advancement and its benefits. The word benefits is what carries the argument about access to medicines, because a medicine is a benefit of scientific advancement.

The subject is everyone, which includes people who create nothing.

Reading paragraph 2

Four elements.

Everyone, so the right is individual.

Protection of the moral and material interests, not of property. The drafters did not write a property clause; Article 17 of the Declaration is the property clause and it is separate.

Resulting from any scientific, literary or artistic production, which covers the inventor as well as the author, since a scientific production includes an invention.

Of which he is the author. The beneficiary is the creator.

What paragraph 2 is not

It is not a patent clause, and it is not a copyright clause. It says nothing about exclusivity, term, registration or transfer, and no international instrument was needed to give effect to it in any particular form.

It does not protect corporations. General Comment No. 17 makes the point for the parallel Covenant provision, and the same reading applies here.

And it does not entrench any existing intellectual property system. A State that abolished patents tomorrow and paid inventors by prize would still be protecting their material interests.

How the sentence got there

The drafting history is worth two lines in an answer. The provision has two sources: the Latin American tradition, in which the American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man of 1948 contains a comparable clause; and the campaign of authors' and artists' organisations for recognition of the droit moral.

General Comment No. 17 records the concern of the drafters at paragraph 12, quoting the intention that "authors of all artistic, literary, scientific works and inventors shall retain, in addition to just remuneration of their labour, a moral right on their work and/or discovery which shall not disappear, even after such a work shall have become the common property of mankind".

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in730

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty

Covenant Article 15 and General Comment No. 17

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Article 15 recognises the right to take part in cultural life, to enjoy the benefits of scientific progress, and to benefit from the protection of the moral and material interests resulting from one's own production, and General Comment No. 17 says the last of these protects the author and not the corporation.

The text

Article 15 of the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, adopted 16 December 1966, in force 3 January 1976, ratified by India on 10 April 1979.

Article 15(1): the States Parties recognise the right of everyone:

(a) to take part in cultural life;

(b) to enjoy the benefits of scientific progress and its applications;

(c) to benefit from the protection of the moral and material interests resulting from any scientific, literary or artistic production of which he is the author.

Article 15(2): the steps to be taken shall include those necessary for the conservation, the development and the diffusion of science and culture.

Article 15(3): the States Parties undertake to respect the freedom indispensable for scientific research and creative activity.

Article 15(4): the States Parties recognise the benefits to be derived from the encouragement and development of international contacts and co-operation in the scientific and cultural fields.

Compare Article 27 of the Declaration. Article 15(1)(a) and (b) split the Declaration's first paragraph into two limbs, and Article 15(1)(c) reproduces the second. Paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 are new and impose positive duties.

Article 15(3) is the one candidates miss. A State must respect the freedom indispensable for scientific research, which bears directly on the enclosure of research tools by patents.

General Comment No. 17

Adopted at the thirty fifth session of the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, Geneva, 7 to 25 November 2005, and issued as E/C.12/GC/17 on 12 January 2006. Its subject is Article 15(1)(c) alone.

Paragraph 1, the source of the right. The right is a human right which derives from the inherent dignity and worth of all persons, and this distinguishes article 15, paragraph 1(c), and other human rights from most legal entitlements recognized in intellectual property systems. Intellectual property rights are first and foremost means by which States seek to provide incentives for inventiveness and creativity.

Paragraph 2, the four contrasts. Intellectual property rights are generally of a temporary nature and can be revoked, licensed or assigned; they may be allocated, limited in time and scope, traded, amended and even forfeited; human rights are timeless expressions of fundamental entitlements of the human person.

Paragraph 7, who holds the right. Only the author, namely the creator, whether man or woman, individual or group of individuals, can be the beneficiary. Under existing treaty regimes legal entities are included among the holders of intellectual property rights, but their entitlements, because of their different nature, are not protected at the level of human rights.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in735

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-One

Is Intellectual Property Itself a Human Right?

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Intellectual property is protected as property under human rights instruments, and the European Court of Human Rights has held so expressly, but that protection is qualified and it is not the same as saying a patent is a human right.

The two questions kept separate

First question: is the author's interest a human right? Yes, by Article 27(2) of the Declaration and Article 15(1)(c) of the Covenant, and General Comment No. 17 explains what that right is.

Second question: is an intellectual property right itself protected as property? That is a different question with a different answer, and it is answered by the property clauses.

Keeping them apart is what an examiner is looking for. The first protects the creator; the second protects whoever owns the right, including a corporation.

The property clauses

Article 17 of the Universal Declaration: everyone has the right to own property alone as well as in association with others, and no one shall be arbitrarily deprived of property.

But neither Covenant contains a property clause. The drafters could not agree on one in 1966, so the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights and the Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights are both silent.

The regional instruments filled the gap. Article 1 of Protocol No. 1 to the European Convention on Human Rights, Article 21 of the American Convention on Human Rights, and Article 14 of the African Charter on Human and Peoples' Rights.

Article 1 of Protocol No. 1 provides that every natural or legal person is entitled to the peaceful enjoyment of possessions; that no one shall be deprived of possessions except in the public interest and subject to the conditions provided for by law and by the general principles of international law; and that the preceding provisions shall not in any way impair the right of a State to enforce such laws as it deems necessary to control the use of property in accordance with the general interest or to secure the payment of taxes or other contributions or penalties.

Note the phrase every natural or legal person. Unlike Article 15(1)(c) of the Covenant, the property clause expressly protects companies.

The worked case

The case is Anheuser-Busch Inc. v Portugal.

Facts. The American brewer applied in 1981 to register BUDWEISER as a trade mark in Portugal. A Czechoslovak enterprise held the appellation of origin Budweiser Bier there, and a bilateral agreement of 1986 between Portugal and Czechoslovakia protected it. The Portuguese Supreme Court, by a judgment of 23 January 2001, applied that agreement and refused the American company's registration. The company complained to Strasbourg that it had been deprived of a possession contrary to Article 1 of Protocol No. 1. The citation is Application no. 73049/01, Grand Chamber, ECHR 2007-I, decided 11 January 2007.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in741

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Two

The Conflict Approach and the Coexistence Approach

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The Sub-Commission said there is a conflict and human rights have primacy; the High Commissioner said the two can be made to work together; and the second view has prevailed everywhere except in the rhetoric.

Sub-Commission resolution 2000/7

Adopted by the Sub-Commission on the Promotion and Protection of Human Rights at its fifty second session, Geneva, 31 July to 18 August 2000, and printed in its report, document E/CN.4/2001/2 and E/CN.4/Sub.2/2000/46 of 23 November 2000. It is titled "Intellectual property rights and human rights".

The preamble records the sources of concern. The Committee's statement to the Third Ministerial Conference of the World Trade Organization at Seattle in 1999; the preliminary report on globalization by Mr J. Oloka-Onyango and Ms D. Udagama; the Convention on Biological Diversity; the panel discussion organised by WIPO on 9 November 1998 on intellectual property and human rights; the Human Development Reports of 1999 and 2000; and the calls of indigenous peoples at the WIPO Roundtables of 1998 and 1999.

And it lists the conflicts it perceives, "inter alia, impediments to the transfer of technology to developing countries, the consequences for the enjoyment of the right to food of plant variety rights and the patenting of genetically modified organisms, 'bio-piracy' and the reduction of communities' (especially indigenous communities') control over their own genetic and natural resources and cultural values, and restrictions on access to patented pharmaceuticals and the implications for the enjoyment of the right to health".

The operative paragraphs.

Paragraph 1 affirms that the right to protection of the moral and material interests resulting from one's own production is, in accordance with Article 27(2) of the Declaration and Article 15(1)(c) of the Covenant, a human right, subject to limitations in the public interest.

Paragraph 2 declares that since the implementation of the TRIPS Agreement does not adequately reflect the fundamental nature and indivisibility of all human rights, including the right to enjoy the benefits of scientific progress, the right to health, the right to food and the right to self-determination, there are apparent conflicts between the intellectual property rights regime embodied in the TRIPS Agreement, on the one hand, and international human rights law, on the other.

Paragraph 3 reminds all Governments of the primacy of human rights obligations over economic policies and agreements.

Paragraph 5 requests Governments to integrate into their legislation provisions that protect the social function of intellectual property.

Paragraph 8 requests the World Trade Organization, and the Council for TRIPS during its review, to take fully into account the existing State obligations under international human rights instruments.

Paragraph 10 requests the High Commissioner to undertake an analysis of the human rights impacts of the TRIPS Agreement.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in746

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Three

Public Interest and the Indian Intellectual Property System

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Public interest is not a doctrine imposed on Indian intellectual property law from outside; it is written into every one of the statutes, and the question is where.

The constitutional frame

Article 21, the right to life and personal liberty, which the Supreme Court has read to include the right to health and to a life with dignity.

Article 21A, the right of children of six to fourteen to free and compulsory education.

Article 38 and 39, directive principles: the State shall strive to promote the welfare of the people, and shall direct policy towards securing that the ownership and control of the material resources of the community are so distributed as best to subserve the common good, and that the operation of the economic system does not result in the concentration of wealth and means of production to the common detriment.

Article 47, the duty of the State to raise the level of nutrition and the standard of living and to improve public health.

Article 51(c), to foster respect for international law and treaty obligations.

And Article 300A, which makes property a right that a valid law may take.

Those provisions are the vocabulary Indian courts use when they speak of public interest in an intellectual property case, and citing them is what separates a legal answer from a moral one.

The Patents Act, 1970

Section 3, what are not inventions. Every clause is a public interest limit on patentability: 3(b) public order, morality, life and health and the environment; 3(d) new forms of known substances; 3(e) mere admixtures; 3(i) methods of medical treatment; 3(j) plants and animals; 3(k) computer programmes per se; 3(p) traditional knowledge.

Section 47, the conditions attached to every grant: the invention may be imported or made by or on behalf of the Government for its own use, and may be made or used by any person for the purpose merely of experiment or research including the imparting of instruction to pupils; and in the case of a medicine or drug it may be imported by the Government for its own use or for distribution in a dispensary, hospital or other medical institution maintained or notified by the Government.

Section 66, revocation in the public interest, where the Central Government is of opinion that a patent or the mode in which it is exercised is mischievous to the State or generally prejudicial to the public, after giving the patentee an opportunity to be heard.

Section 83, the general principles applicable to the working of patented inventions, which is the clearest statement of public interest in any Indian intellectual property statute. Patents are granted to encourage inventions and to secure that they are worked in India on a commercial scale and to the fullest extent that is reasonably practicable without undue delay; they are not granted merely to enable patentees to enjoy a monopoly for the importation of the article; the protection and enforcement of patent rights contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users, and in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare; patents granted do not impede protection of public health and nutrition and should act as an instrument to promote public interest specially in sectors of vital importance for socio-economic and technological development of India; patents granted do not in any way prohibit Central Government in taking measures to protect public health; the patent right is not abused by the patentee and the patentee does not resort to practices which unreasonably restrain trade or adversely affect the international transfer of technology; and patents are granted to make the benefit of the patented invention available at reasonably affordable prices to the public.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in752

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Four

The Interplay of Rights and Public Interest, and How Rights Are Abused

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The interplay is that the two are not opposed, because the public interest is the reason the rights exist; the abuse is what happens when a right is used for something other than that reason.

The interplay, stated properly

The mistake to avoid is treating them as opposites. A candidate who writes that intellectual property rights are private and public interest is the limitation on them has stated the position of no legal system in the world.

The correct statement is that the public interest is the justification. A patent is granted because the public is thought to gain more from disclosure and eventual free use than it loses from twenty years of monopoly. If that calculation fails, the patent has no justification.

Three texts say so.

TRIPS Article 7: protection and enforcement should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users of technological knowledge, in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations.

Section 83 of the Patents Act, clause (c), which reproduces that sentence, and clause (g), that patents are granted to make the benefit of the patented invention available at reasonably affordable prices to the public.

General Comment No. 17, paragraph 1: intellectual property rights are first and foremost means by which States seek to provide incentives for inventiveness and creativity, encourage dissemination, develop cultural identities, and preserve the integrity of productions for the benefit of society as a whole.

So the interplay is not a balance between two goods. It is the relationship between an instrument and its purpose.

Where the interplay is worked out in law

At the point of grant. Section 3 of the Patents Act, section 9 of the Trade Marks Act, section 4 of the Designs Act, section 9 of the Geographical Indications Act, and section 29 of the plant varieties Act each keep out of private hands things the public interest requires to stay out.

At the point of scope. Section 52 of the Copyright Act, section 30 of the Trade Marks Act, section 47 and section 107A of the Patents Act, section 30 of the plant varieties Act, and section 56 of the layout designs Act each carve out uses that may be made without permission.

At the point of exercise. Sections 84 to 92A and 100 of the Patents Act, sections 31 to 32A of the Copyright Act, and sections 47 to 49 of the plant varieties Act each permit use against the owner's will.

At the point of duration. Every right expires except a trade mark, and a trade mark expires if it is not used.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in758

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Five

The Right to Health and Access to Medicines

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The right to health is binding on India, a patent raises the price of a medicine by design, and the law has three answers: exclusion, exception and licence.

The right

Article 25(1) of the Universal Declaration: everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for health and well being, including food, clothing, housing and medical care.

Article 12 of the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights: the States Parties recognize the right of everyone to the enjoyment of the highest attainable standard of physical and mental health. Article 12(2) lists the steps to be taken, including (c) the prevention, treatment and control of epidemic, endemic, occupational and other diseases, and (d) the creation of conditions which would assure to all medical service and medical attention in the event of sickness.

General Comment No. 14 of 2000 on Article 12 is the Committee's interpretation, and it identifies accessibility, availability, acceptability and quality as the elements of the right, with accessibility including economic accessibility, that is affordability.

India ratified the Covenant on 10 April 1979.

And in Indian constitutional law the right to health is part of Article 21. The Supreme Court has held the right to life to include the right to health and medical care, and Article 47 places on the State the duty to raise the level of nutrition and the standard of living and to improve public health.

Why patents matter to it

A patent is a device for raising price. That is not a criticism; it is the mechanism. Without exclusivity a new medicine would be copied immediately and sold at the cost of manufacture, and the research would not be paid for.

The magnitude is what makes it a human rights question. Generic entry typically reduces the price of a medicine by a large multiple, and the difference between the patented and the generic price of first line antiretrovirals in the early 2000s was of that order.

The Indian illustration is Nexavar. Bayer sold sorafenib tosylate at about 280,000 rupees for a month's supply; the compulsory licensee was required to sell at 8,880 rupees.

And the population affected is not small. India supplies a large share of the generic medicines used in developing countries, so its patent law determines prices well beyond its own borders. That is why the country is described as the pharmacy of the developing world, and why the Dutch transit seizures mattered to Brazil and Nigeria as much as to India.

The three answers in law

Answer one: keep the patent out. Article 27.1 leaves the meaning of invention to national law, so a Member may set a patentability standard that refuses patents on trivial variants. That is section 3(d), and it prevents the monopoly arising rather than curing it afterwards.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in763

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Six

Compulsory Licensing in India

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

After three years anyone interested may apply on three grounds; the Government may notify an emergency and dispense with negotiation; and in thirteen years the machinery has produced one licence.

Section 84, the ordinary route

Section 84(1): at any time after the expiration of three years from the date of the grant of a patent, any person interested may apply to the Controller for a compulsory licence on any of three grounds:

(a) that the reasonable requirements of the public with respect to the patented invention have not been satisfied;

(b) that the patented invention is not available to the public at a reasonably affordable price;

(c) that the patented invention is not worked in the territory of India.

Section 84(2): the application may be made even by an existing licensee, and no admission in a licence estops the applicant from alleging any of the three grounds.

Section 84(4): if satisfied on any ground, the Controller may grant a licence upon such terms as he may deem fit.

Section 84(6), the four considerations. The Controller shall take into account (i) the nature of the invention, the time elapsed since sealing and the measures already taken by the patentee or a licensee to make full use of it; (ii) the ability of the applicant to work the invention to the public advantage; (iii) the applicant's capacity to undertake the risk in providing capital and working it; and (iv) whether the applicant has made efforts to obtain a licence from the patentee on reasonable terms and conditions without success within a reasonable period.

The proviso to (iv) disapplies it in cases of national emergency, extreme urgency, public non-commercial use, or on establishment of a ground of anti-competitive practices adopted by the patentee. That is Article 31(b) and Article 31(k).

The Explanation construes reasonable period as not ordinarily exceeding six months.

Section 84(7), when the reasonable requirements are deemed unsatisfied. Five limbs.

(a) By reason of the patentee's refusal to grant a licence on reasonable terms: an existing trade or industry or its development or the establishment of a new trade or industry in India is prejudiced; or the demand for the patented article has not been met to an adequate extent or on reasonable terms; or a market for export of the article manufactured in India is not being supplied or developed; or the establishment or development of commercial activities in India is prejudiced.

(b) By reason of conditions imposed by the patentee on licences or on purchase, hire or use, the manufacture, use or sale of unprotected materials, or the establishment or development of any trade or industry in India, is prejudiced.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in768

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Seven

The Right to Education, Cultural Life, and the Limits of Copyright

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The right to education and the right to take part in cultural life are Covenant rights, copyright is the main legal obstacle to both, and the answers are exceptions, licences and one treaty that solved a problem outright.

The rights

Article 26 of the Universal Declaration: everyone has the right to education; elementary education shall be free and compulsory; and education shall be directed to the full development of the human personality.

Article 13 of the Covenant: the right of everyone to education, with primary education compulsory and available free to all, secondary education generally available and accessible, and higher education equally accessible on the basis of capacity, in particular by the progressive introduction of free education.

Article 15(1)(a) of the Covenant: the right to take part in cultural life.

Article 15(1)(b): the right to enjoy the benefits of scientific progress and its applications.

In India, Article 21A of the Constitution, inserted by the Constitution (Eighty-sixth Amendment) Act, 2002, makes free and compulsory education for children of six to fourteen a fundamental right, given effect by the Right of Children to Free and Compulsory Education Act, 2009.

Where copyright obstructs them

Price. A textbook priced for one market is unaffordable in another, and until 2012 the standard response of Indian students was photocopying.

Format. A printed book is inaccessible to a blind reader, and converting it is a reproduction requiring permission.

Territory. A cheap edition licensed for one country may not lawfully be imported into another under a national exhaustion rule.

Term. A work published in 1960 by an author who died in 1990 remains in copyright in India until the end of 2050, so a whole century of scholarship is unavailable without permission.

And orphan works. A work whose owner cannot be found cannot be lawfully used at all in most systems.

The three answers in copyright law

Exceptions. Section 52 of the Copyright Act lists roughly seventy acts that do not constitute infringement.

Section 52(1)(a), fair dealing with any work, other than a computer programme, for private or personal use, including research, for criticism or review, and for reporting current events and current affairs including a lecture delivered in public.

Section 52(1)(h), publication of a short passage in a collection mainly composed of non copyright matter, bona fide intended for instructional use, subject to limits.

Section 52(1)(i), the education exception: the reproduction of any work by a teacher or a pupil in the course of instruction; or as part of the questions to be answered in an examination; or in answers to such questions.

Section 52(1)(j), performance in the course of the activities of an educational institution.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in775

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Eight

The Right to Food and Farmers' Rights

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The right to food is a Covenant right, seed is where intellectual property meets it, and India built a plant variety statute that protects farmers as well as breeders because UPOV 1991 would not.

The right to food

Article 25(1) of the Universal Declaration: everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for health and well being, including food.

Article 11 of the Covenant: the right of everyone to an adequate standard of living, including adequate food, and the fundamental right of everyone to be free from hunger. Article 11(2) requires measures to improve methods of production, conservation and distribution of food by making full use of technical and scientific knowledge, by disseminating knowledge of the principles of nutrition, and by developing or reforming agrarian systems to achieve the most efficient development and utilisation of natural resources.

General Comment No. 12 of 1999 interprets it, and identifies availability, accessibility and adequacy as its elements.

In India, the right to food has been read into Article 21, and Article 47 places a duty on the State to raise the level of nutrition.

And the National Food Security Act, 2013 gives statutory form to a portion of it.

Why seed is the meeting point

Because a plant variety right is a right over the means of producing food.

A patent on a machine does not stop anyone eating. A right over a seed variety controls what a farmer may sow, save, exchange and sell, and in a country where the great majority of holdings are small and seed is routinely saved, that reaches the household directly.

Three chains of consequence.

Price. Protected seed costs more than saved seed, and a farmer who must buy every season bears a recurring cost.

Dependence. A variety that must be repurchased, or that carries a technology fee, transfers control from the farm to the supplier.

And diversity. Uniform protected varieties displace landraces, which reduces the genetic base on which future breeding and food security depend, which is the concern the Convention on Biological Diversity and the plant genetic resources treaty both address.

Why India refused UPOV 1991

UPOV 1978 Article 5(1) confined the breeder's right to the production for purposes of commercial marketing, the offering for sale and the marketing of the reproductive or vegetative propagating material, which left a farmer's use of saved seed on their own holding outside the right entirely.

UPOV 1991 changed three things.

The farmers' privilege became an option. Article 15(2) permits, but does not require, each party to restrict the breeder's right in order to permit farmers to use for propagating purposes, on their own holdings, the product of the harvest obtained on those holdings, within reasonable limits and subject to safeguarding the legitimate interests of the breeder.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in780

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Forty-Nine

The Convention on Biological Diversity 1992, Articles 1 to 21

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Genetic resources belong to the State on whose territory they are found, access requires prior informed consent on mutually agreed terms, and the benefits must be shared.

What it is and why it matters here

Adopted at Nairobi on 22 May 1992 and opened for signature at the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development at Rio de Janeiro on 5 June 1992, in force 29 December 1993. India ratified on 18 February 1994.

It is an environmental treaty, negotiated in the United Nations Environment Programme, and it is in this syllabus for three reasons.

It asserts sovereignty over genetic resources, which answers the previous assumption that they were the common heritage of mankind and freely takeable.

It creates access and benefit sharing, which is the counter claim to a patent taken out on material collected elsewhere.

And it addresses intellectual property directly in Article 16, which is the provision that collides with TRIPS.

Article 1, the three objectives

The conservation of biological diversity; the sustainable use of its components; and the fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising out of the utilization of genetic resources, including by appropriate access to genetic resources, by appropriate transfer of relevant technologies, taking into account all rights over those resources and to technologies, and by appropriate funding.

Three objectives, and the third is the one this paper is about.

Article 2, the definitions that matter

Biological diversity: the variability among living organisms from all sources, including diversity within species, between species and of ecosystems.

Biological resources: genetic resources, organisms or parts thereof, populations, or any other biotic component of ecosystems with actual or potential use or value for humanity.

Genetic resources: genetic material of actual or potential value; genetic material meaning any material of plant, animal, microbial or other origin containing functional units of heredity.

Biotechnology: any technological application that uses biological systems, living organisms or derivatives thereof to make or modify products or processes for specific use.

Country of origin of genetic resources: the country which possesses those resources in in situ conditions.

Country providing genetic resources: the country supplying them, whether from in situ sources or from ex situ sources, whether or not originating in that country.

Article 3, the principle

States have, in accordance with the Charter of the United Nations and the principles of international law, the sovereign right to exploit their own resources pursuant to their own environmental policies, and the responsibility to ensure that activities within their jurisdiction or control do not cause damage to the environment of other States or of areas beyond the limits of national jurisdiction.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in786

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty

The Convention on Biological Diversity: Machinery and Final Clauses, Articles 22 to 42

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A Conference of the Parties, a Secretariat, a scientific body, reports, a soft dispute clause, no reservations, and one article saying the Convention yields to earlier treaties unless biological diversity would be seriously damaged.

Article 22, the relationship with other treaties

Article 22(1): the provisions of this Convention shall not affect the rights and obligations of any Contracting Party deriving from any existing international agreement, except where the exercise of those rights and obligations would cause a serious damage or threat to biological diversity.

Read it in two halves.

The general rule is deference. Earlier agreements are unaffected.

The exception is narrow and it is the only foothold. Where the exercise of rights under another agreement would cause serious damage or threat to biological diversity, the deference stops.

Applied to TRIPS this produces an unsatisfying answer. TRIPS is not an existing agreement relative to the Convention, since the Convention of 1992 predates TRIPS of 1994, so on a literal reading Article 22(1) does not address it at all. And even if it did, a party would have to show that the exercise of a patent right causes serious damage to biological diversity, which is a high factual threshold nobody has attempted to meet.

Article 22(2): implementation with respect to the marine environment shall be consistent with the rights and obligations of States under the law of the sea.

Article 23, the Conference of the Parties

Established by the Convention. The first meeting was convened by the Executive Director of the United Nations Environment Programme not later than one year after entry into force, and ordinary meetings are held at intervals the Conference determines.

Extraordinary meetings may be held when the Conference thinks necessary, or at the written request of any Party if, within six months of communication by the Secretariat, it is supported by at least one third of the Parties.

Rules of procedure and financial rules are adopted by consensus, and a budget is adopted at each ordinary meeting for the period until the next.

Its functions include keeping under review the implementation of the Convention, establishing subsidiary bodies, considering and adopting protocols and amendments and annexes, and contacting the executive bodies of other conventions.

In practice the Conference of the Parties is where everything happens, including the adoption of the Cartagena Protocol in 2000, the Bonn Guidelines on access and benefit sharing in 2002, and the Nagoya Protocol in 2010.

Articles 24 and 25, the Secretariat and the scientific body

Article 24, the Secretariat, whose functions are to arrange for and service meetings of the Conference, to perform functions assigned by any protocol, to prepare reports on the execution of its functions, to coordinate with other relevant international bodies and enter into administrative and contractual arrangements, and to perform such other functions as the Conference determines. The Conference designated the Secretariat at its first meeting from among existing competent international organisations, and it is administered by the United Nations Environment Programme and located in Montreal.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in793

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-One

The Nagoya Protocol 2010, Articles 1 to 18

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The Convention said access requires consent and benefits must be shared; the Protocol says what the user country must do about it.

What it is

The Nagoya Protocol on Access to Genetic Resources and the Fair and Equitable Sharing of Benefits Arising from their Utilization to the Convention on Biological Diversity, adopted at Nagoya on 29 October 2010 at the tenth meeting of the Conference of the Parties, in force 12 October 2014.

India signed on 11 May 2011 and ratified on 9 October 2012.

Why it was needed. Article 15 of the Convention imposed obligations on the country providing genetic resources: it decides access, sets the terms and requires consent. It imposed almost nothing on the country in which the resources are used. A user in a country that asked no questions could take material collected abroad, develop and patent an invention from it, and the provider country had no remedy anywhere.

The Bonn Guidelines of 2002 tried to fix that voluntarily and failed. The Protocol makes the user country's obligations binding.

Articles 1 to 4, objective, terms, scope and relationship

Article 1, the objective: the fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the utilization of genetic resources, including by appropriate access, by appropriate transfer of relevant technologies, taking into account all rights over those resources and to technologies, and by appropriate funding, thereby contributing to the conservation of biological diversity and the sustainable use of its components.

Notice the direction of the sentence. Benefit sharing is the objective and conservation is the consequence, which is the reverse of the emphasis in Article 1 of the Convention.

Article 2, use of terms. The definitions in Article 2 of the Convention apply, and three are added. Utilization of genetic resources means conducting research and development on the genetic or biochemical composition of genetic resources, including through the application of biotechnology as defined in Article 2 of the Convention. Biotechnology carries the Convention definition. And derivative means a naturally occurring biochemical compound resulting from the genetic expression or metabolism of biological or genetic resources, even if it does not contain functional units of heredity.

The definition of utilization is the trigger for the whole Protocol. It is research and development on composition, not the filing of a patent application, so the obligation bites long before any intellectual property right is sought.

Article 3, scope. The Protocol applies to genetic resources within the scope of Article 15 of the Convention and to the benefits arising from their utilization, and also to traditional knowledge associated with genetic resources within the scope of the Convention and to the benefits arising from the utilization of such knowledge.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in799

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-Two

Nagoya: Machinery, Final Clauses, and the Biological Diversity Act

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The Protocol's remaining articles supply model clauses, capacity, technology transfer, institutions and final clauses; India's implementation is a three tier structure of authority, boards and village committees.

Articles 19 to 25, the supporting obligations

Article 19, model contractual clauses. Each Party shall encourage the development, update and use of sectoral and cross-sectoral model contractual clauses for mutually agreed terms, and the Conference of the Parties serving as the meeting of the Parties shall periodically take stock of their use.

Article 20, codes of conduct, guidelines and best practices. Each Party shall encourage the development, update and use of voluntary codes of conduct, guidelines and best practices and standards in relation to access and benefit sharing.

Article 21, awareness raising. Each Party shall take measures to raise awareness of the importance of genetic resources and associated traditional knowledge, listing among them promotion of the Protocol, meetings of indigenous and local communities and stakeholders, establishment of a help desk, dissemination through the Clearing-House, promotion of voluntary codes of conduct, promotion of domestic, regional and international exchanges of experience, education and training of users and providers, involvement of indigenous and local communities, and awareness raising of community protocols and procedures.

Article 22, capacity. The Parties shall cooperate in the capacity building, capacity development and strengthening of human resources and institutional capacities of developing country Parties, in particular least developed countries and small island developing States among them, and Parties with economies in transition, including through existing global, regional, subregional and national institutions and organizations, with indigenous and local communities and relevant stakeholders, including non governmental organizations and the private sector, identified as key stakeholders.

Article 23, technology transfer, collaboration and cooperation. In accordance with Articles 15, 16, 18 and 19 of the Convention, the Parties shall collaborate and cooperate in technical and scientific research and development programmes, including biotechnological research activities, as a means to achieve the objective of the Protocol; and they undertake to promote and encourage access to technology by, and transfer of technology to, developing country Parties, in particular the least developed countries and small island developing States among them, and Parties with economies in transition, in order to enable the development and strengthening of a sound and viable technological and scientific base. Where possible and appropriate such collaborative activities shall take place in and with a Party or the Parties providing genetic resources.

Article 24, non-Parties. The Parties shall encourage non-Parties to adhere to the Protocol and to contribute appropriate information to the Clearing-House. It is the article that acknowledges the absence of the largest user country.

Article 25, financial mechanism and resources. The financial mechanism of the Convention shall be the financial mechanism for the Protocol, and the Conference of the Parties shall provide guidance on resources for developing country Parties.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in806

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-Three

Traditional Knowledge: Why Patent Law Cannot See It

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Patent law cannot see traditional knowledge because it is old, collective, unattributed and continuing, and every one of those is the opposite of what a patent requires.

What traditional knowledge is

There is no agreed definition, and a candidate should say so and then give the working description.

The working description. Knowledge, know how, skills, innovations and practices developed, sustained and passed on within an indigenous or local community, forming part of its cultural or spiritual identity, often relating to biological resources, and transmitted from generation to generation.

The Convention on Biological Diversity uses a longer phrase in Article 8(j): knowledge, innovations and practices of indigenous and local communities embodying traditional lifestyles relevant for the conservation and sustainable use of biological diversity.

Two distinctions are needed at the outset.

Traditional knowledge proper, meaning technical knowledge: medicinal uses of plants, agricultural practices, methods of preparation.

Traditional cultural expressions, meaning expressive material: songs, designs, symbols, dances, textile patterns. These are the subject of a separate chapter.

And a third category, genetic resources, which are the physical material itself and are governed by the Convention on Biological Diversity and the Nagoya Protocol rather than by intellectual property law.

Codified and non codified. Codified traditional knowledge exists in written texts, as Ayurveda, Siddha, Unani and Sowa Rigpa do. Non codified knowledge exists only in practice and oral transmission. The distinction matters in India because the 2023 amendment to the Biological Diversity Act exempts codified traditional knowledge from section 7.

The four requirements it fails

Novelty. A patent requires that the invention not be part of the state of the art. Traditional knowledge is by definition old and often published, in Sanskrit or Tamil or Arabic texts, so it is not new.

Inventive step. A patent requires a non obvious advance over the prior art. Knowledge that has been practised for centuries makes no advance over anything.

An identifiable inventor. A patent is granted to a person who devised the invention. Traditional knowledge has no identifiable inventor; it is the accumulated product of a community over generations, and the law has no mechanism for granting a right to an unbounded and shifting group.

A limited term. Every intellectual property right except a trade mark expires, on the theory that the public gets the subject matter back. A community that has held knowledge for five centuries is not asking for twenty years of exclusivity followed by loss; it is asking for permanent control, which no patent or copyright system provides.

And a fifth, sometimes overlooked. Fixation. Copyright in most systems protects expression, and many require fixation in a material form; oral knowledge fails that test too.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in814

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-Four

Biopiracy: Turmeric, Neem, Basmati, and the Digital Library

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Biopiracy is the acquisition of an intellectual property right over biological material or knowledge taken from a community without consent or benefit, and India fought three famous instances and then built a database so it would not have to fight a fourth.

What the word means

There is no legal definition, and the term is contested. Sub-Commission resolution 2000/7 used it in quotation marks, listing among its concerns bio-piracy and the reduction of communities', especially indigenous communities', control over their own genetic and natural resources and cultural values.

The working description. The acquisition, usually by patent, of exclusive rights over biological material or associated traditional knowledge obtained from a country or community, without the prior informed consent required by the Convention on Biological Diversity and without sharing the benefits.

Two distinct wrongs are bundled in the word.

Misappropriation of material, taking a plant or a micro-organism and patenting an invention derived from it.

And wrongful patenting of knowledge, obtaining a patent over something that was not new because a community had done it for centuries.

The second is the more common complaint and the easier to remedy, because it is answered by prior art rather than by a property claim.

The turmeric patent

United States Patent 5,401,504, "Use of turmeric in wound healing", filed 28 December 1993, issued 28 March 1995, to inventors Suman K. Das and Hari Har P. Cohly, assigned to the University of Mississippi Medical Center.

The claims covered a method of promoting healing of a wound by administering turmeric.

The objection. The use of turmeric on wounds is ancient household practice in India and is recorded in Ayurvedic texts.

What India did. The Council of Scientific and Industrial Research requested re-examination, filing documentary prior art including an ancient Sanskrit text and a paper published in an Indian medical journal in 1953.

The outcome. A reexamination certificate issued on 21 April 1998, and the re-examination decision cancelled all claims.

The lesson. The patent fell on ordinary novelty grounds. Nothing exotic was needed; the prior art simply had to be put before the examiner.

The neem patent

European Patent 0436257 B1, "Method for controlling fungi on plants by the aid of a hydrophobic extracted neem oil", filed 20 December 1990 with a priority date of 26 December 1989, granted 14 September 1994, to inventors James Charles Locke, Hiram Gordon Larew III and James Frederic Walter, assigned to W. R. Grace and Company and the United States Department of Agriculture.

The objection. The fungicidal use of neem oil was ancient and widespread Indian practice.

What was done. An opposition was filed on 14 June 1995, the opponents including a Member of the European Parliament for the Green Group, together with Indian and international organisations. The evidence included an affidavit from an Indian who had used the process on his own fields for years.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in820

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-Five

Traditional Cultural Expressions and Indigenous Peoples

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

Songs, designs, symbols and dances held by a community fail copyright for the same reasons traditional knowledge fails patent law, and after twenty five years of negotiation nothing binding protects them.

What they are

Traditional cultural expressions, also called expressions of folklore, are the expressive forms in which a community's culture is manifested: verbal expressions such as tales, poetry and riddles; musical expressions such as songs and instrumental music; expressions by action such as dances, plays and rituals; and tangible expressions such as drawings, designs, paintings, carvings, pottery, textiles, carpets, costumes, musical instruments and architectural forms.

The distinction from traditional knowledge is between the technical and the expressive. Knowledge of a plant's medicinal use is traditional knowledge; the song sung while preparing it is a traditional cultural expression. Both belong to the same community and are governed by different branches of intellectual property law, which is why WIPO negotiated them as separate subjects.

Indian examples: Warli painting, Madhubani painting, Kalamkari, Chikankari embroidery, Pochampally ikat, Kanchipuram silk, Kathakali, Baul songs, and the designs on Kashmiri shawls.

Why copyright cannot hold them

Authorship. Copyright vests in an author, an identifiable person or persons. A community is not an author, and the individuals who developed the form are unknown and long dead.

Originality. Copyright protects original expression. A traditional design faithfully reproduced is by definition not original, and a modern reproduction attracts copyright in the reproduction rather than in the tradition.

Term. Copyright expires. A community seeks permanent control.

Fixation. Many systems require fixation in a material form, and songs, dances and rituals may exist only in performance.

And the public domain. Once the tradition is old and unattributed the law treats it as free for all, which is precisely the conclusion the communities dispute.

The result is that a designer may reproduce a traditional textile pattern, register the reproduction as a design or claim copyright in the drawing, and sell it worldwide, while the community that developed the pattern has no claim at all.

What Indian law does provide

Section 31A of the Copyright Act, a compulsory licence in unpublished or published works where the author is dead, unknown or cannot be traced, which is a partial answer to the orphan problem but confers nothing on a community.

The Geographical Indications of Goods (Registration and Protection) Act, 1999, which is India's most effective instrument here. The right belongs to an association of persons or producers or an organisation or authority representing the interest of the producers under section 11; it cannot be assigned, transmitted, licensed, pledged or mortgaged under section 24; and it is perpetual so long as it is renewed. Registrations cover handicrafts and textiles as well as agricultural goods, and the register includes Chanderi, Pochampally ikat, Kani shawls, Madhubani painting and many others.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in826

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-Six

The Challenges of Governing Public Interest and Intellectual Property Together

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

The difficulties are institutional, evidential, temporal, political and conceptual, and none of them is solved by writing a better statute.

Why the question is put this way

MU asked candidates to critically analyse the challenges faced while governing public interest and intellectual property together. The word is challenges, not criticisms.

So the answer must identify difficulties that a well intentioned government would still face, rather than list objections to the system.

Five kinds, and each has a worked example in Indian law.

The institutional difficulty

The functions are split across bodies that do not answer to one another.

The Controller General of Patents, Designs and Trade Marks grants rights, under the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade.

The Competition Commission of India polices their exercise.

The National Pharmaceutical Pricing Authority caps prices under the Drugs (Prices Control) Order.

The Central Drugs Standard Control Organisation approves medicines.

The National Biodiversity Authority approves access and intellectual property applications over biological resources.

The Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers' Rights Authority registers varieties.

And the High Courts hear revocation and infringement, the Intellectual Property Appellate Board having been abolished by the Tribunals Reforms Act, 2021.

The consequence. A single question, whether a medicine is available at a reasonably affordable price, may be before the Controller under section 84, the pricing authority under the Order, and a High Court in an infringement suit, with no mechanism for a common answer.

And the abolition of the Appellate Board in 2021 returned a specialised jurisdiction to generalist courts, which improved constitutional propriety and worsened the availability of technical expertise. Both propositions are true and an answer should say so.

The evidential difficulty

Every public interest provision turns on facts the State does not hold.

Section 84(1)(a) asks whether the reasonable requirements of the public are satisfied. That requires knowing how many patients need the medicine and how many receive it.

Section 84(1)(b) asks whether the price is reasonably affordable, which requires knowing purchasing power and the cost of supply.

Section 84(1)(c) asks whether the invention is worked in India, which requires knowing what the patentee manufactures and imports.

The statutory answer is section 146 and Form 27, requiring every patentee and licensee to file an annual statement of working. Compliance has been incomplete, the form was simplified in 2020, and the information it yields is thinner than the statutory tests require.

The same difficulty appears elsewhere. Whether a licensing condition unreasonably restrains trade under section 140 requires market data. Whether a traditional knowledge claim is anticipated requires prior art that may be oral. Whether benefit sharing is fair and equitable under section 21 of the Biological Diversity Act requires knowing what the resource contributed to a product's value.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in832

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter One Hundred Fifty-Seven

A Human Rights Framework for Intellectual Property

Syllabus topic 4, "Human Rights and Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)"

In one line

A human rights framework for intellectual property would separate the author from the owner, require every limitation to be justified rather than assumed, and put the burden of proof on the side that has the evidence.

What the phrase means

A human rights framework, or a human rights approach, is not a demand that intellectual property be abolished. General Comment No. 17 affirms at paragraph 1 that the protection of the moral and material interests resulting from one's own production is a human right.

It is a method of analysis with four steps.

Identify the right holders, which means asking who actually holds the interest the law protects, rather than who holds the legal title.

Identify the affected rights, which in this field are health under Article 12, education under Article 13, food under Article 11, participation in cultural life and the benefits of scientific progress under Article 15(1)(a) and (b), and the author's own interest under Article 15(1)(c).

Require justification for limitation, applying the test in General Comment No. 17 paragraphs 22 and 23: a limitation must be determined by law, compatible with the nature of the right, pursue a legitimate aim, be strictly necessary for the promotion of the general welfare, and be proportionate, meaning the least restrictive measure available.

And require balance as an obligation of immediate effect, which paragraph 39(e) makes a core obligation not subject to progressive realisation.

What it would change, provision by provision

The author against the owner. The framework distinguishes them, and Indian law would follow the distinction further than it does. Section 57 of the Copyright Act already protects the author independently of the owner, and the royalty provisos to section 18 already prevent an author from assigning away royalties. A human rights approach would extend the reasoning: a limitation that touches only the owner's commercial return is easier to justify than one that touches the author's attribution or livelihood, and the two should not be assessed alike.

The term. Paragraph 16 of General Comment No. 17 states that the term of protection of material interests need not extend over the entire lifespan of the author. India's copyright term of life plus sixty is therefore not a human rights requirement, and on a human rights analysis the burden would lie on those defending it rather than on those questioning it. The same applies to any proposal to extend it.

Compulsory licences. Paragraph 24 expressly contemplates that limitations may require compensatory measures such as payment of adequate compensation for the use of productions in the public interest. That is not merely permission for sections 31 and 31D of the Copyright Act and sections 84, 90 and 92 of the Patents Act; it is a description of what a properly designed limitation looks like, which is a limitation with compensation rather than an expropriation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in837

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

The rest of this subject

These notes are cut from the University's printed syllabus. Open the syllabus itself, or the past papers, for the same subject.

Report or request
Done!